IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200

Tape Library 

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3573

GA32-0545-09
IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200
Tape Library 

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3573

GA32-0545-09
 Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices” on page
I-1 in the IBM System Storage TS3100 and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide.

To ensure that you have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.

This edition applies to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and
Service Guide, GA32-0545-09, and to the subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new
editions.
© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005, 2010.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
 Read This First
Minimum Firmware Levels for Common Library Features
Table 1. Minimum Firmware Levels for common Library features
Feature Minimum Firmware Level(s) Required
| LTO 5 Tape Drive Library firmware must be at 9.00, or greater,
to support the Ultrium 5 drives. If using the
IBM Tape Device Driver or ITDT (IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool), ensure the minimum
version required to support Ultrium 5 tape
drives are installed on the host. Ensure any
host applications and software, that use their
own device drivers, are at the minimum
level required to support Ultrium 5 tape
drives.
| Library BCR (Bar Code Reader) Libraries manufactured after May 2010 may
have a BCR that requires a minimum level
of library firmware. The minimum level of
firmware for these libraries is 9.00. Attempts
to downlevel these libraries below 9.00 will
be blocked by the library.
Dedicated Cleaning Slot removal Library firmware level must be greater than
1.95.
Encryption Library firmware level must be 4.0 or
greater.

Drive firmware level must be 74H4 or

greater.
Key Path Diagnostics Library firmware level must be greater than
6.3.
| Path Failover (for one activation key for LTO 4 Tape Drives: No minimum level of
| both Control Path Failover and Data Path firmware is required.
| Failover)
LTO 3 Tape Drives: Drive firmware must be
greater than 73P5.

| Library firmware levels greater than 1.95,

| but not greater than 8.xx support Path
| Failover on the TS3200 (3573-L4U) and Full
| High drives. Library firmware levels greater
| than 8.xx support Path Failover on the
| TS3100 and TS3200 (3573-L2U and 3573-L4U)
| for both Full High and Half High drives.
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) over Encryption Library firmware must be 6.3 or higher
Key Manager (EKM)

Accessing Online Technical Support

For online Technical Support for your Library, visit:
http://www.ibm.com/support/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 iii

 Registering for My Notification
My Notification registration provides email notification when firmware levels have
been updated and are available for download and installation. To register for My
Notification:
1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/us.
2. Click Get support.
3. Click My support.

Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released
together. When updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed
components such as tape drive(s), and library are at the latest levels
noted on the Support web site. Mixing different levels of library and tape
drive firmware is not supported and may cause unpredictable results.

Sending Us Your Comments

Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and highest
quality information. To submit any comments about this book or any other
TS3100/TS3200 documentation:
v Send your comments by e-mail to [email protected]. Be sure to include the
following information:
– Exact publication title and version
– Publication form number (for example, GA32-1234-02)
– Page, table, or illustration numbers that you are commenting on
– A detailed description of any information that should be changed

Contacting IBM Technical Support

In the USA: Call 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).

Note: Before calling, complete all the steps in "Contacting IBM Technical Support"
in chapter 9.

All other Countries/Regions: Visit http://www.ibm.com.

To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click on Open a
service request.

Summary of Changes
| The following information has been added to the GA32-0545-09 edition:
| v Ultrium 5 Full High drives:
| – 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
| – 6 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
| v Ultrium 5 Half High drives:
| – 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
| – 6 Gb/s SAS - dual port
| v Ultrium 5 media:
| – 1500 GB data capacity
| – 3000 GB data capacity with 2:1 compression

iv TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| v Path Failover feature enhancements:
| – Support for Half High drives
| – Support for TS3100 (3573-L2U)
| v Audit Logging
| – The Configure Library SNMP web page includes the option to enable Audit
| Logging.
| – When SNMP and Audit Logging are enabled, the library will send a trap for
| library and drive Configuration Change events.
| v Updated SNMP MIB information
| – Configuration Change events
| – Library Login events
| – Library Logout events

Read This First v

vi TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Contents
Read This First . . . . . . . . . . . iii Web User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Minimum Firmware Levels for Common Library Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Accessing Online Technical Support . . . . . . iii Web User Interface Help Pages . . . . . . 2-8
Registering for My Notification . . . . . . . . iv Logging out of the Web User Interface . . . . 2-8
Sending Us Your Comments . . . . . . . . . iv
Contacting IBM Technical Support . . . . . . . iv Chapter 3. Installation Planning . . . . 3-1
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . iv Determining the Number of Logical Libraries . . . 3-1
Basic Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Library Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using Multiple Control Paths . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using Multiple Control Paths for System i,
Safety and Environmental Notices xvii iSeries, and AS/400 Attachment . . . . . . 3-2
Danger Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii Using Multiple Control Paths for Path Failover 3-2
Caution Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii Library Partitioning and Element Addressing . . . 3-3
Laser Safety and Compliance . . . . . . . . xix Using Persistent Binding to Ensure SCSI ID
Class I Laser Product . . . . . . . . . . xix Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Performing the Safety Inspection Procedure . . . xix Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning . . . . . 3-7
Rack Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx Host Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements SCSI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
for NEBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii SAS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fibre Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . xxv Chapter 4. Installation and
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chapter 1. Product Description . . . . 1-1 Using the Library Configuration Form . . . . . 4-1
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Installing Your Library . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Choosing a Location . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Unpacking the Library . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Verifying the Shipment . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Supported Internet Protocols . . . . . . . . 1-5 Installing the Library Foot Pads (for Desktop
SNMP Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Installation ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock . . . 4-4
Maximum Library Storage Capacity and Data Rackmounting the Library (for Rack Installation
Transfer Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Ultrium Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Connecting the Host Interface Cable . . . . 4-15
Speed Matching . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Connecting a Power Cord . . . . . . . . 4-17
Channel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Configuring Your Library . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Choosing Your Configuration Method . . . . 4-18
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration 4-19
Library Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Configuring Your Library using the Web User
Product Environment . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Configuring Your Library using the Operator
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Supported Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Preparing the Host . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Verifying the Connection . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Chapter 2. User Interfaces . . . . . . 2-1 Cartridge Magazines. . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Populating the Library with Data Cartridges 4-42
Operator Control Panel Philosophy . . . . . 2-1 Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . 4-42
Power-ON Display. . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Registering for My Notification . . . . . . . 4-43
Note about the Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . 2-2
Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Chapter 5. Operations . . . . . . . . 5-1
Power ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Operator Control Panel Navigation . . . . . . 5-7

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 vii

Operator Control Panel Menu Tree . . . . . . 5-9 Chapter 9. Service Procedures . . . . 9-1
Monitor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots. . . . 9-1
Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Releasing the Magazines Manually . . . . . . 9-1
Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) . . 9-4
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Contacting IBM Technical Support . . . . . . 9-5
Web User Interface Menus . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Monitor Library Menu . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove,
Manage Library Menu . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Configure Library Menu . . . . . . . . 5-43
and Replace . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Service Library Menu . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Import and Export Media during Normal Library Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64 Relocating Your Library. . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots . . 5-65 Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled 10-3
Removing a Tape Drive Sled . . . . . . . 10-4
Installing a Tape Drive Sled . . . . . . . 10-6
Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media . . . . 6-1 Adding a Tape Drive Sled . . . . . . . . 10-9
Data Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Removing the Slot Blocker - 2U Library . . . . 10-10
Cartridge Compatibility . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Replacing a Power Supply . . . . . . . . 10-11
Capacity Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Replacing a Library Controller Card . . . . . 10-12
WORM (Write Once, Read Many). . . . . . . 6-3 Replacing Cartridge Magazines . . . . . . . 10-14
WORM Media . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Replacing Magazine Fiducials . . . . . . . 10-14
Data Security on WORM Media . . . . . . 6-3 Replacing the Library Enclosure . . . . . . 10-15
WORM Media Errors . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Preparing the Defective Library for
Requirements for WORM Capability . . . . . 6-4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Cleaning Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement
Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM) . . . . . . 6-4 Library Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Bar Code Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Installing Your Drive(s) in the Replacement
Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels . . . . 6-6 Library Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Write-Protect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Swapping Power Supplies . . . . . . . 10-21
Handling the Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Swapping Library Controller Cards . . . . 10-22
Provide Training . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Swapping Cartridge Magazines. . . . . . 10-24
Ensure Proper Packaging . . . . . . . . 6-8 Installing the Replacement Library Enclosure 10-27
Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Completing the Installation of the
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Replacement Library Enclosure . . . . . . 10-28
Perform a Thorough Inspection . . . . . . 6-9 Returning the Defective Library Enclosure 10-29
Handle the Cartridge Carefully . . . . . . 6-10
Examples of Cartridge Problems . . . . . . 6-10
Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin . . . 6-11
Chapter 11. Optional Features,
Repositioning a Leader Pin . . . . . . . 6-11 Replacement Parts and Power Cords . 11-1
Reattaching a Leader Pin . . . . . . . . 6-13
Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Appendix A. Information for Trained
Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Service Personnel . . . . . . . . . A-1
Disposing of Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . 6-18 Internal View of Library. . . . . . . . . . A-1
Ordering Media Supplies . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Manual Cartridge Removal Procedure . . . . . A-2
Ordering Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . 6-21 Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting . . . . . 7-1 Beginning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Removing the Drive Brick from the Sled . . . A-3
Library Recovery Problem Determination . . . . 7-7 Removing the Drive Cover . . . . . . . . A-6
Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems . . . . . 7-8 Full-high Drive: Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel . . A-7
Isolating a Power Supply Problem . . . . . 7-8 Half-high Drive: Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel A-8
Isolating Drive Sled Problems. . . . . . . 7-10 Full-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken near
Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Leader Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Enclosure Problem . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Half-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken
Isolating Web User Interface Problems . . . . 7-12 near Leader Pin . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems . . . . 7-13 Full-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape . . . A-13
Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems 7-13 Half-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape A-14
Identifying a Suspect Cartridge . . . . . . . 7-14 Full-high Drive: Tape Tangled along Tape Path A-15
Half-high Drive: Tape Tangled along Tape Path A-18
Chapter 8. Error Codes . . . . . . . 8-1 Full-high Drive: No Apparent Failure or Damage
to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

viii TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Half-high Drive: No Apparent Failure or Appendix F. SNMP Status MIB
Damage to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 Variables and Traps . . . . . . . . . F-1
Ending Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Accessing the Library using Telnet . . . . . . A-25
Appendix G. Library Configuration
Appendix B. SCSI Element Types, Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
SCSI Addresses, and Physical
Appendix H. Accessibility . . . . . . H-1
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
2U Library I/O Slot, Storage Slots and Drive Slot
Element Addresses and Physical Locations . . . B-1 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
4U Library I/O Slots, Storage Slots, and Drive Slots Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-2
Element Addresses and Physical Locations . . . B-2 Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . I-2
Library Partitioning and Element Addressing . . . B-3 Industry Canada Compliance Statement. . . . I-3
European Union (EU) Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive . . . . . . . I-3
Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags . . . . . C-1
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility
TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library . . . . C-1
Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3
TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive . . . . C-3
Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-4
Appendix D. Sense Data . . . . . . . D-1 People's Republic of China Class A Electronic
Library Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . I-4
Drive Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement I-4
IBM Taiwan Contact Information . . . . . . I-5
Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement I-5
Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement I-5
Retrieving from an IBM System p or IBM Power
System with AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
SCSI Sense Data Definition . . . . . . . . E-2
SCSI Sense Data - Library Error . . . . . . E-2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
SCSI Sense Data - Drive Error . . . . . . . E-3
Retrieving from a Sun System . . . . . . . . E-4
Retrieving from an HP-UX System . . . . . . E-5
Retrieving from an IBM System i or IBM Power
System with IBM i OS . . . . . . . . . . E-5

Contents ix
x TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Figures
1-1. Front panel of a 2U library . . . . . . 1-1 4-20. Removing the protective label from the
1-2. Front panel of a 4U library . . . . . . 1-1 power receptacle . . . . . . . . . 4-18
1-3. Rear panel of a 2U library with a SCSI drive 1-3 4-21. Log in screen on the Web User Interface 4-22
1-4. Rear panel of a 4U library with full high 4-22. The 2U library Configure Library: General
Fibre Channel drive and half high SCSI and screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
SAS drives . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 4-23. Example: The 4U library Configure
1-5. Rear panel of a 2U library with a full high Library: General screen . . . . . . . 4-25
dual port SAS drive . . . . . . . . . 1-3 4-24. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical
1-6. Library drive sled without ESD springs Libraries page . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
(SCSI sled shown) . . . . . . . . . 1-8 4-25. The Configure Library: Path Failover
1-7. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] Feature Activation screen. . . . . . . 4-26
(SAS sled shown) . . . . . . . . . 1-8 4-26. Feature Key verification screen . . . . . 4-26
2-1. Power-ON screens . . . . . . . . . 2-2 4-27. Feature Activation Key screen . . . . . 4-27
2-2. Web User Interface login page . . . . . 2-6 4-28. Configure Library: Encryption Activation
2-3. 2U library System Status screen . . . . . 2-6 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
2-4. 4U library System Status screen . . . . . 2-6 4-29. The Configure Library: Drive screen 4-29
2-5. 4U library System Status screen showing 4-30. Configure Library: Network Page 4-30
media attention status . . . . . . . . 2-7 4-31. Warning Screen . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
2-6. 4U library System Status screen showing a 4-32. The Configure Library: User Access screen 4-32
power supply failure . . . . . . . . 2-7 4-33. The Configure Library: Date and Time
3-1. Configuration of a one - partition system 3-4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
3-2. Configuration of a two - partition system 3-5 4-34. The Configure Library: Logs and Traces
| 3-3. Configuration of a three - partition system 3-5 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
3-4. Configuration of a four - partition system 3-6 4-35. The Configure Library: Email Notification
3-5. Examples of SCSI element addressing 3-6 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-1. Installing foot pads on the bottom of the 4-36. Configure Library: SNMP Page 4-35
library enclosure . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4-37. 2U library left magazine . . . . . . . 4-38
4-2. Shipping lock and label . . . . . . . 4-5 4-38. 2U library right magazine . . . . . . 4-39
4-3. Library shipping lock and label storage 4-39. 2U library I/O Station in the left magazine 4-39
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4-40. 4U library left magazines. . . . . . . 4-40
| 4-4. Rack Kit A mounting hardware . . . . . 4-7 4-41. 4U library right magazines . . . . . . 4-40
4-5. Examples of EIA units for round hole and 4-42. 4U library I/O Station in the lower left
square hole installations . . . . . . . 4-8 magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-6. Rear view of a rack showing the narrow 4-43. Finger Holes on back side of 4U Library
part of the rail. . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
| 4-7. Alternate rear view of a rack showing the 5-1. 2U Library Control Keys . . . . . . . 5-8
| narrow part of the rail . . . . . . . . 4-9 5-2. 4U Library Control Keys . . . . . . . 5-8
| 4-8. Front view of rack showing rails installed 5-3. Operator Control Panel Menu Tree 5-10
| and alternate front view of rack with rails 5-4. Monitor: Library menu . . . . . . . 5-11
| installed . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 5-5. Monitor: Drive menu . . . . . . . . 5-13
4-9. Close-up . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 5-6. Example of a 4U Monitor: Inventory menu 5-15
4-10. 2U library side screws to remove 4-11 5-7. Overview of inventoried cartridges: Lower
4-11. 2U library rack anchors and mounting Left Magazine of a 4U Library . . . . . 5-15
brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 5-8. Detailed information on cartridges residing
4-12. Sliding the 2U library into the rack 4-13 in a magazine . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
4-13. Sliding the 4U library into the rack 4-13 5-9. Control: I/O Station menu . . . . . . 5-16
4-14. Securing the 2U library to the rack 4-14 5-10. Control: Move Cartridges menu 5-17
4-15. Securing the 4U library to the rack 4-14 5-11. Control: Magazine menu . . . . . . . 5-17
4-16. Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the 5-12. Control: Re-Inventory menu. . . . . . 5-18
2U library . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 5-13. Configure: Logical Libraries menu 5-19
4-17. Attaching host interface cables to the 4U 5-14. Configure: Library menu . . . . . . . 5-20
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 5-15. Configure: Drive menu . . . . . . . 5-23
4-18. Attaching a SAS interface cable to the 2U 5-16. Configure: Network menu . . . . . . 5-24
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 5-17. Configure: Set Access PIN menu 5-25
4-19. Interposer installation . . . . . . . . 4-17

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 xi

5-18. Pound sign (#) shows accessible menus 5-60. The 4U library Service Library: Upgrade
when access PIN is enabled but before it is Firmware page . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
entered. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 5-61. Service Library: Reboot page . . . . . 5-64
5-19. Configure: Save/Restore menu . . . . . 5-27 | 6-1. The IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data
5-20. Configure: Set Date and Time menu 5-29 Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
5-21. Configure: Path Failover . . . . . . . 5-29 | 6-2. Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges 6-3
5-22. Service: Library Verify menu . . . . . 5-30 6-3. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 5
5-23. Service: Run Tests menu . . . . . . . 5-30 Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
5-24. Service: Service menu . . . . . . . . 5-31 6-4. Setting the write-protect switch . . . . . 6-7
5-25. Service: Display Contrast menu 5-32 6-5. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase . . . . . 6-8
5-26. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library 6-6. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping 6-9
Identity page . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 6-7. Checking for gaps in the seams of a
5-27. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Identity page showing one SAS (#1), one 6-8. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct
SCSI drive (#2), and one Fibre Channel positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
drive (#3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 6-9. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the
5-28. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library correct position . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Status page . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 6-10. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge 6-13
5-29. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive 6-11. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit . . . . . 6-14
Status page . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 6-12. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the
5-30. The 2U library Monitor Library: Inventory cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 6-13. Winding the tape out of the cartridge 6-16
5-31. The 4U library Monitor Library: Inventory 6-14. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin 6-16
page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 6-15. Attaching the leader pin to the tape 6-17
5-32. Manage Library: Move Media page 5-42 7-1. A 250w power supply with LEDs 7-8
5-33. Manage Library: Perform Inventory page 5-42 7-2. A 80w power supply without LEDs 7-9
5-34. Manage Library: Release Magazine page 5-42 9-1. Access holes for the left magazine 9-2
5-35. The 4U library Configure Library: General 9-2. Access holes for the right magazine 9-3
and Extended page. . . . . . . . . 5-44 9-3. Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library 9-4
5-36. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical 9-4. Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library 9-4
Libraries page . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 10-1. ESD label . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
5-37. The 4U library Configure Library: Path 10-2. Shipping Lock and Label Storage Location 10-2
Failover page . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 10-3. Shipping Lock and Label . . . . . . . 10-2
5-38. Path Failover license verification page 5-46 10-4. Library drive sled without ElectroStatic
5-39. Feature Activation Key screen . . . . . 5-47 Discharge (ESD) springs (SCSI sled shown) 10-3
5-40. Configure Library: Encryption Feature 10-5. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1]
configuration screen . . . . . . . . 5-47 (SAS sled shown) . . . . . . . . . 10-4
5-41. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 10-6. Drive sled components (full-high fibre
2U library . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 drive in top position, half-high SCSI drive
5-42. The Configure Library: Drives page for a in middle position, half-high SAS drive in
4U library . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 bottom position) on back panel of a 4U
5-43. Configure Library: Network Page 5-51 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
5-44. Warning Screen . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 10-7. Pulling the drive sled out of the library
5-45. Configure Library: User Access page 5-53 (drive sled without ESD springs shown) . 10-6
5-46. The Configure Library: Date & Time page 5-54 10-8. Pushing the drive sled into the library
5-47. Configure Library: Logs & Traces page 5-54 (drive sled without ESD springs shown) . 10-7
5-48. Configure Library: Email Notification page 5-55 10-9. Diagrams for applying conductive tape for
5-49. Configure Library: SNMP Page 5-56 ESD protection to the back of a drive sled
5-50. Configure Library: Save/Restore page 5-57 installed in a 2U or 4U library . . . . . 10-8
5-51. No Cleaning Required . . . . . . . 5-58 10-10. 2U Magazine with Slot Blocker 10-10
5-52. No Cleaning Cartridge in Library 5-58 10-11. Popping the Slot Blocker out of the Cell 10-11
5-53. Service Library: Clean Drive page 5-58 10-12. A power supply being removed from a
5-54. Service Library: View Logs page 5-59 2U library . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
5-55. Service Library: View Drive Logs screen 5-60 10-13. A Library Controller Card being removed
5-56. Service: Save Drive Dump . . . . . . 5-60 from the library . . . . . . . . . 10-13
5-57. Service Library: Perform Diagnostics page 5-61 10-14. Magazine fiducial . . . . . . . . . 10-14
5-58. Service Library: Perform Key Path 10-15. Removing the two mounting bracket
Diagnostics page . . . . . . . . . 5-62 screws anchoring the library to the rack
5-59. The 2U library Service Library: Upgrade (one screw on each side of the library) . . 10-16
Firmware page . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 10-16. Foot pads installed on the bottom of the
library enclosure . . . . . . . . . 10-17

xii TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
10-17. Removing the shipping label and lock A-6. Removing the bezel and the cover from the
from the top of the library and storing on half high internal drive . . . . . . . A-7
the rear panel . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 A-7. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into
10-18. Library shipping lock and label storage cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
location on the real panel of the library . 10-18 A-8. Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . A-9
10-19. Removing a drive sled from the library A-9. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
(drive sled without ESD springs shown) . 10-19 train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
10-20. Drive sled taping diagrams . . . . . 10-20 A-10. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . A-11
10-21. A power supply being removed from a A-11. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
library . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
10-22. Removing a Library Controller Card from A-12. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) A-13
the library . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 A-13. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into
10-23. Library front panel LEDs . . . . . . 10-24 cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
10-24. Access hole for the left magazine (facing A-14. Rewinding tape into cartridge A-15
rear of library) . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 A-15. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into
10-25. Access hole for the right magazine (facing cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
rear of library) . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 A-16. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
10-26. Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
(facing front of library) . . . . . . . 10-27 A-17. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) A-18
10-27. Mounting brackets and anchors for A-18. Rewinding tape into cartridge A-19
securing the library in a rack (one bracket A-19. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into
and anchor on each side of the library). . 10-28 cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
10-28. Front view of a rack showing the rails A-20. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
installed . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
10-29. Proper placement of the Repair A-21. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) A-22
Identification (RID) Tag . . . . . . . 10-29 A-22. Rewinding tape into cartridge A-23
11-1. Types of Receptacles . . . . . . . . 11-8 A-23. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
A-1. Internal view of the library . . . . . . A-1 train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-2. Drive connection card showing screws and A-24. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) A-24
plastic cover . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 B-1. Configuration of a one - partition system B-4
A-3. Half high drive with the connection card B-2. Configuration of a two - partition system B-5
moved to the side showing the screws . . A-5 B-3. Configuration of a three - partition system B-5
A-4. The drive brick showing the cables to be B-4. Configuration of a four - partition system B-6
unplugged. . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 B-5. Examples of SCSI element addressing B-6
A-5. Removing the bezel and the cover from the E-1. AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example E-3
4U internal drive . . . . . . . . . A-6 E-2. AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example E-4

Figures xiii
xiv TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Tables
1. Minimum Firmware Levels for common | 6-3. Bar code label requirements for Ultrium
Library features . . . . . . . . . . iii | tape drives and libraries . . . . . . . 6-5
2. NEBS Compliance Statements . . . . . xxiii | 6-4. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with
1-1. 2U library and 4U library front panel | the Ultrium Tape Drives . . . . . . . 6-5
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 6-5. Location of the write-protect switch 6-7
1-2. 2U library and 4U library rear panel 6-6. Environment for operating, storing, and
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge . 6-18
1-3. Tape drive model and host interface type 1-6 6-7. Media supplies . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
1-4. Library storage capacity and data transfer 6-8. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code
rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
1-5. Physical Specifications . . . . . . . 1-10 7-1. Troubleshooting table . . . . . . . . 7-1
1-6. Power Specifications . . . . . . . . 1-10 7-2. Power Supply LED Meanings . . . . . 7-9
| 1-7. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 5 1-10 8-1. Main Error Codes . . . . . . . . . 8-2
1-8. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 4 1-10 8-2. Sub error codes . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
1-9. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 3 1-11 8-3. Warning Events . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
1-10. Environmental Specifications . . . . . 1-11 10-1. Shipping Lock/Shipping Label . . . . . 10-2
3-1. Host Drive Interface Support . . . . . . 3-7 11-1. Optional Features . . . . . . . . . 11-1
3-2. Maximum bus length between terminators 3-9 11-2. Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . 11-2
3-3. Recommended maximum quantity of drives 11-3. Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
per SCSI bus . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 A-1. Internal view description . . . . . . . A-1
4-1. Location criteria . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 B-1. 2U library SCSI Element Types and Element
5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts . . . . . . 5-1 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
5-2. Library Control Keys . . . . . . . . 5-8 B-2. 4U library SCSI Element Types and Element
5-3. Detailed information on cartridges residing Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
in a magazine . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 B-3. 2U library SCSI element addresses for
5-4. Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . 5-27 storage slots and drive slot (one logical
5-5. Web User Interface Menus . . . . . . 5-32 partition with one drive) . . . . . . . B-2
5-6. Library Identity page elements . . . . . 5-33 B-4. 4U library SCSI element addresses for
5-7. Drive Identity page elements . . . . . 5-34 storage slots and drive slot (one logical
5-8. Library Status page elements . . . . . 5-36 partition with drives in slot 1 and slot 2). . B-2
5-9. Drive Status page elements . . . . . . 5-37 C-1. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium
5-10. Configure Library: General page elements 5-43 Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
5-11. Configure Library: Specific page elements 5-43 D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ D-1
5-12. Drive Identity page elements . . . . . 5-49 D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data . . . . . . D-6
| 6-1. Nominal Cartridge Life: Load/Unload E-1. AIX ERRPT Library Sense Data . . . . . E-3
| Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 E-2. AIX ERRPT Drive Sense Data . . . . . E-4
6-2. Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with F-1. SNMP Status Events . . . . . . . . F-1
Ultrium tape drive . . . . . . . . . 6-3

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 xv

xvi TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Safety and Environmental Notices
When using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices that
are contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent
the severity of the safety condition.

Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number (Dxxxx or Cxxxx). Use
the reference number to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Information
(G229-9054) publication included in your ship group.

The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples.

Danger Notice
A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is
potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people. A
lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice
to represent a dangerous electrical condition.

Caution Notice
A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to
people because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied
by one of several symbols:

If the symbol is... It means....

A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than electrical
danger.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by other safety

symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the product. Laser

symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as
defined by the U. S. Department of Health and Human Services (for
example, Class I, Class II, and so forth).

A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or around the

product.

A hazardous condition due to the weight of the unit. Weight symbols

are accompanied by an approximation of the product's weight.
svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 xvii

 If the symbol is... It means....
A hazardous condition due to the unit's susceptibility to electrostatic
discharge.

xviii TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Laser Safety and Compliance
Before using the library, review the following laser safety information.

Class I Laser Product

The library may contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance
standards set by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser
product. Class I laser products do not emit hazardous laser radiation. The library
has the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser
radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits. External safety
agencies have reviewed the library and have obtained approvals to the latest
standards as they apply.

Performing the Safety Inspection Procedure

Before you service the unit, perform the following safety inspection procedure:
1. Stop all the activities between the host and the library's tape drives.
2. Turn off the power to the library by pushing in on the Power button (1)
shown in Figure 1-1 on Page 1-1 for 4 seconds.
3. If drives are SCSI attached, disconnect the SCSI cable and check the SCSI bus
terminator for damage.
4. Unplug the library's power cord or cords from the electrical outlet and the
library power supply.
5. Check the library's power cord for damage, such as a pinched, cut, or frayed
cord.
6. If drives are SCSI attached, check the tape drive's SCSI bus (signal) cable for
damage.
7. If drives are FC/SAS attached, check the tape drive's FC/SAS cable for
damage.
8. Check the cover of the library for sharp edges, damage, or alterations that
expose its internal parts.
9. Check the cover of the library for proper fit. It should be in place and secure.
10. Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure that it matches
the voltage at your outlet.

Safety and Environmental Notices xix

Rack Safety
The following general safety information should be used for all rack mounted
devices.

DANGER

v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven
mechanical loading, always install the heaviest
devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Always
install servers and optional devices starting from the
bottom of the rack cabinet.
v Rack mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf
or work space. Do not place any object on top of rack
mounted devices.
v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power
cord. Ensure that all power cords in the rack cabinet
are disconnected before servicing any device in the
rack cabinet.
v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to
power devices installed in the same rack cabinet. Do
not plug a power cord from a device installed in one
rack cabinet into a power device installed in a
different rack cabinet.
v An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could
place hazardous voltage on the metal parts of the
system or the devices that attach to the system. It is
the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the
outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an
electrical shock.

xx TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
CAUTION:
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack
ambient temperatures WILL exceed the manufacturer's
recommended ambient temperature for all your rack
mounted devices.
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is
compromised. Ensure that air flow is not blocked or
reduced on any side of the unit.
v Connect the equipment to the supply circuit such that
overloading of the circuits does not compromise the
supply wiring or overcurrent protection. To provide the
correct power connection to a rack, refer to the rating
labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine
the total power requirement of the supply circuit.
v (For sliding drawers) Do not pull out or install any drawer
or feature if the rack stabilizer brackets are not attached
to the rack. Do not pull out more than one drawer at a
time. The rack may become unstable if you pull out
more than one drawer at a time.
v (For fixed drawers) Do not move a fixed drawer.
Attempting to move the drawer partially or completely
out of the rack may cause the rack to become unstable
or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack.

(R001)

Safety and Environmental Notices xxi

 CAUTION:
Removing components from the upper positions in the
rack cabinet improves rack stability during relocation.
Follow the general guidelines as listed below whenever
you relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or
building:
v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing
equipment starting at the top of the rack cabinet. When
possible, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of
the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration
is not known, you must do the following:
– Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.
– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the
bottom of the rack cabinet.
– Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between
devices installed in the rack cabinet below the 32U
level.
v If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of
rack cabinets, detach the rack cabinet from the suite.
v Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate
potential hazards.
v Verify the route that you choose can hold the weight of
the loaded rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that
comes with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded
rack cabinet.
v Verify that all door openings are at least 762 x 2032 mm
(30 x 80 inches).
v Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and
cables are secure.
v Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their
highest position.
v Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the
rack cabinet during movement.
v Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees.
v Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the
following:
– Lower the four leveling pads.
– Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
– If you remove any of the devices from the rack
cabinet, repopulate the rack cabinet from the lowest
position to the highest position.
v If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack
cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you
received it. Pack the rack cabinet in the original
packaging material, or equivalent. Also lower the
leveling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and
bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet.
(R002)

xxii TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
This library is NEBS certified. This section includes the cautions and regulatory
compliance statements for the Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS)
certification from the Telcordia Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety
- Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment (A Module of
LSSGR, FR-64; TSGR, FR-440; and NEBSFR, FR-2063) Telcordia Technologies
Generic Requirements, GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4, June 2006.
Table 2. NEBS Compliance Statements

Caution: To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089-CORE standard for electromagnetic

compatibility and safety, for Ethernet RJ-45 ports, use only shielded Ethernet cables that are
grounded on both ends. In a NEBS installation, all Ethernet ports are limited to
intra-building wiring.

Caution: The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are only suitable for
connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling. The intra-building ports of
the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use only as
intra-building interfaces (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4),
and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary protectors is
not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
An external Surge Protective Device (SPD) is not required for operating this library.
This product can be installed in a network telecommunication facility or location where the
NEC applies.

Safety and Environmental Notices xxiii

xxiv TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Preface
This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the installation,
operation, and service of the IBM® System Storage™ TS3100 Tape Library and
TS3200 Tape Library.

Note: The IBM System Storage™ TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a
customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and
maintenance of the tape library. The customer will be charged for service if a
service contract is not in place.

Related Publications
Refer to the following publications for additional information. To ensure that you
have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
v IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Getting Started
Guide (GA32-0546) provides installation information.
v IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI Reference
(GA32-0547) provides supported SCSI commands and protocol governing the
behavior of SCSI interface.
| v IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference (GA32-0450) provides
| supported SCSI commands and protocol governing the behavior of SCSI
| interface for the tape drive.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Installation and User's Guide (GC27-2130) provides
instructions for attaching IBM-supported hardware to open-systems operating
systems. It indicates what devices and levels of operating systems are supported.
It also gives requirements for adapter cards, and tells how to configure hosts to
use the device driver. All of the above are with the Ultrium family of devices.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Programming Reference (GA32-0566) supplies information
to application owners who want to integrate their open-systems applications
with IBM-supported Ultrium hardware. The reference contains information
about the application programming interfaces (APIs) for each of the various
supported operating-system environments.
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Quick Start Guide
(GA76-0420) gets you started with a basic configuration for encryption on LTO 4
tape drives.
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Introduction, Planning,
and User's Guide (GA76-0418) contains information to help you install, configure,
and use the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform.
v IBM Tivoli® Key Lifecycle Manager V1.0 (English) publications may be
downloaded from the following Web site: http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/
library.
– IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Quick Start Guide (GI11-8738)
– IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Installation and Configuration Guide
(SC23-9977)
v The IBM Publications Center: http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order The
Publications Center is a worldwide central repository for IBM product
publications and marketing material with a catalog of 70,000 items. Extensive
search facilities are provided. Payment options for orders are via credit card (in

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 xxv

 the U.S.) or customer number for 20 countries. A large number of publications
are available online in various file formats, and they can all be downloaded by
all countries, free of charge.

xxvi TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Chapter 1. Product Description
The IBM System Storage® TS3100 Tape Library (2U library) and the IBM System
Storage TS3200 Tape Library (4U library) provide compact, high-capacity, low-cost
solutions for simple, unattended data backup. The 4U library houses up to 48 tape
cartridges (or 45 and an elective 3-slot I/O Station) in a compact 4U form factor
with easy access to cartridges via four removable magazines. The 2U library
houses up to 24 tape cartridges (or 23 and an elective 1-slot I/O Station) in a
compact 2U form factor with easy access to cartridges via two removable
magazines.

| The fifth generation of the Ultrium series of products is available with interfaces to
| suit your needs: a Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI), Fibre Channel
| interface (FC), or Serial Attached SCSI interface (SAS).

Front Panel

3 1 2 3

a77ug006
8 4 7 6 5 4

Figure 1-1. Front panel of a 2U library

3 1 2 3
a77ug115

8 7 4 6 5

Figure 1-2. Front panel of a 4U library

Table 1-1 on page 1-2 below contains front panel descriptions for both the 2U
library in Figure 1-1 and the 4U library in Figure 1-2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 1-1

Table 1-1. 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions
Number Item Description
1 Power button Pressing this button powers ON the library. Pressing and holding this button for 4
seconds will power OFF the unit (soft power down). No power switch or button can
be found on the back panel of the library.
2 Front panel v Ready/Activity (Green LED) - It is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and
LEDs (left to able to function. It should blink whenever there is library or drive activity, or when
right) the library is in the process of powering up.
v Clean Drive (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when the drive needs to be cleaned.
The LED will be turned OFF after the drive is cleaned successfully.
v Attention (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when there has been a failure that
indicates a piece of media is bad, marginal, or invalid. It will be cleared when all
invalid cartridges have been exported from the library. The amber LED may also be
lit because a power supply or a power supply fan is failing, or a drive sled is
defective, missing, or has been replaced by a different drive type.
v Error (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable library or
drive failure. A message is displayed at the same time on the Operator Control Panel
display.
3 Cartridge v The 2U library contains two cartridge magazines.
magazines
– The left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges (or 11 data cartridges and the
elective 1-slot I/O Station.)
– The right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
v The 4U library contains four cartridge magazines.
– The upper left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
– The lower left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges (or 9 data cartridges and the
elective 3-slot I/O Station.)
– The upper right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
– The lower right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
4 Air vents These vents draw cooler air into the library enclosure and allow warm air to escape,
which helps keep the library at a normal operating temperature.
5 Control keys v UP (+) - The upper left button is used to scroll upward through menu items.
v DOWN (-) - The lower left button is used to scroll downward through menu items.
v CANCEL (X) - The upper right button is used to cancel a user action and return to
the previous menu screen.
v SELECT - The lower right button is used to display a sub-menu or force an accessor
action.
6 Machine type, The machine type, model number and serial number of the library are located on this
Model number, label. This serial number is the number that links the library to your warranty.
and Serial
Number label
7 Operator This component is a 128 X 64 monochrome graphic display.
Control Panel
display
8 I/O Station The Input/Output (I/O) Station is used to import and export cartridges into and out
of the library.
v The 2U library has an elective 1-slot I/O Station.
v The 4U library has an elective 3-slot I/O Station.

1-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Rear Panel

1 2 3 4

12

a77ug232
11 11 10 9 8 7 5

Figure 1-3. Rear panel of a 2U library with a SCSI drive

1 2 3 4

12

a77ug233
11 10 9 8 7 6 5

Figure 1-4. Rear panel of a 4U library with full high Fibre Channel drive and half high SCSI and SAS drives.

1 2 3 4

12
a77ug234

11 10 9 8 7 6 5

Figure 1-5. Rear panel of a 2U library with a full high dual port SAS drive

Table 1-2. 2U library and 4U library rear panel descriptions

Number Item Description

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-3

 1 Power connector(s) Both libraries require a 110/220 volt AC power connection.
v The 2U library has one power supply.
v The 4U library has a minimum of one power supply, but has the capability of
adding a redundant power supply.
2 Host interface The library has one or more of the following host interface connectors on the drive
connectors sled:
v a 68-pin HD SCSI connector
v a Fibre Channel connector
v a SFF-8088 mini-SAS connector
3 Tape drive sled This library supports the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drive. The tape drive in the
library is packaged in a container called a drive sled. Drive sleds come in a full
high or half high configuration. The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit
(CRU), and is hot-pluggable, which is designed for easy removal and replacement.
4 Shipping lock and The shipping lock, which secures the accessor during shipping, and associated
label storage label are stored on the rear panel of the library for future use. See “Removing and
location Storing the Shipping Lock” on page 4-4.
Note: The shipping lock must be removed before powering ON the library to
allow the accessor to function properly.
| 5 USB port Used to save/restore library configuration information on a USB device.
6 Library Control An LED showing the status of the Library Control Board.
Board (LCC) LED
LED flashing (1 flash per second) - normal operation
7 Serial port This port is used to communicate serially with the library using an RJ-11 connector.
For use by IBM Service Personnel.
8 Ethernet port This port is used to connect the library to a network.
9 Tape drive LED This LED indicates the current status of the drive. When the LED is green, it
indicates normal drive activity.
10 Machine type, The machine type, model number and serial number of the library are located on
Model number, and this pull-out label. This serial number is the number that links the library to your
Serial Number warranty.
pull-out label
11 Fan vents These vents allow air to escape from the power supply and tape drive sled.
12 ESD label The Electrostatic Discharge label is a reminder that some of the components of this
library are susceptible to electrostatic discharge. See “Electrostatic Discharge” on
page 10-1.

Bar Code Reader

The bar code reader is an integral part of the library accessor. The bar code reader
provides inventory feedback to the host application, Operator Control Panel
display, and Web User Interface by reading cartridge bar code labels. The library
stores the customized inventory data in memory.

Library firmware supports a 6 or 8 character volume serial number (VOLSER) on

the bar code label on the tape cartridge.

1-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Encryption
| The LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Drive supports host Application Managed Encryption
| (AME), Library Managed Encryption (LME), and System Managed Encryption
| (SME), using T10 encryption methods, for SAS and Fibre Channel drives only. Data
| encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 4 and Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges only.
| Encryption is also supported with library firmware version 4.0 or higher.

The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to
encrypt and decrypt host tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption
keys are provided by the host application or host server. A drive digital certificate
is installed at manufacturing time. Each drive receives a unique serial number and
certificate. The T10 application may validate each drive instance by checking the
drive's digital certificate.

| The LTO Ultrium 5 encryption environment is complex and requires knowledge

| beyond that of product trained Service Support Representatives (SSRs). The
| Encryption function on tape drives (desktop, stand alone and within libraries) is
| configured and managed by the customer. In some instances, SSRs are required to
| enable encryption at a hardware level when service access or service password
| controlled access is required. Customer setup support is by Field Technical Sales
| Support (FTSS), customer documentation, and software support for encryption
| software problems. Customer 'how to' support is also provided via support line
| contract.

The library firmware should always allow the user to select "None" or "Application
Managed Encryption" from the Web User Interface, as long as there is at least one
encryption capable drive in the logical library. If a valid Transparent Encryption
license key has been previously entered, "System Managed Encryption" or "Library
Managed Encryption" can be selected. The factory default is "None."

Note: The optional Transparent Encryption Key feature enabling System Managed
Encryption and Library Managed Encryption is not available on TS3200 and
TS3100 models purchased through High Volume (HVEC) channels.

Note: All encryption settings should be configured or re-verified in the drive after
any library or drive reset. This is because a new drive may have been added
or an existing drive may have been swapped with another drive.

For more details, see the IBM Tape Device Drivers documentation, and the IBM
LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference documentation. See "Related Publications"
in the Preface.

Supported Internet Protocols

The library supports the following Internet protocols:
v IPv4
v IPv6

To learn more about IPv4, visit http://www.iana.org/. To learn more about IPv6,
visit http://www.ipv6.org/.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-5

 SNMP Messaging
Occasionally, the library may encounter a situation that you want to know about,
such as an open magazine or a fault that causes the library to stop. The library
provides a standard TCP/IP protocol called Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) to send alerts about conditions (such as need for operator intervention)
over a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station. These alerts are
called SNMP traps. Using the information supplied in each SNMP trap, the
monitoring station (together with customer-supplied software) can alert operations
personnel of possible problems or operator interventions that occur.

SNMP Traps
SNMP traps are alerts or status messages that can be collected, monitored and
used to proactively manage attached libraries using SNMP protocol with the host
server(s). In summary, each trap provides the following information:
v Product Identification such as product name, description, manufacturer, model
number, firmware level, and the URL that the trap is designated for.
v Product Status such as the severity of the trap, status (current and previous) and
the time the trap occurred.
v Library State (physical device status) such as identification and status of devices
that are monitored. In the case of the library, it would include enclosure, power
supply, controller, magazine status, drive count, cartridge slot count, and I/O
station count. Also included would be certain library statistics, and where
appropriate, the fault FSC (fault symptom code) including the severity and
description of that fault.
v Drive Status such as the identification of each drive in the library, firmware
level, serial number and other address and status information.
v Trap Definitions such as library status change, open magazine, I/O accessed,
hard fault information, drive cleaning requests, excessive retries and library
returning to normal operations. For additional information, refer to Appendix G.
"SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps" on page G-1.
v SNMP MIBs: The library's Management Information Base (MIB) contains units
of information that specifically describe an aspect of the system, such as the
system name, hardware number or communications configuration. Status and
error data is also gathered by MIBs and sent to one or more IP addresses
defined during the SNMP configuration operation. Download the SNMP MIB
file for this library from http://www.ibm.com/storage/support.

Maximum Library Storage Capacity and Data Transfer Rate

Maximum library storage capacity and maximum data transfer rates are as follows:
Table 1-3. Tape drive model and host interface type
Tape Drive Model Host Interface
|| Ultrium 5 Full High drives v 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
| v 3 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
|| Ultrium 5 Half High drives v 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
| v 6 Gb/s SAS - dual port
Ultrium 4 Full High drives v 4 Gb/s Fibre Channel
v 3 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 4 Half High drives v 3 Gb/s SAS - single port

1-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table 1-3. Tape drive model and host interface type (continued)
Tape Drive Model Host Interface
Ultrium 3 Full High drives v Ultra160 SCSI LVD (depending on drive; single-ended (SE) is not
recommended as it will severely degrade performance)
v 4 Gb/s Fibre Channel
Ultrium 3 Half High drives v Ultra 160 SCSI LVD (depending on drive; single-ended (SE) is not
recommended as it will severely degrade performance)
v 3 Gb/s SAS - single port

Table 1-4. Library storage capacity and data transfer rate

Characteristic 2U Library Specification 4U Library Specification
|| Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
| Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges
| v Native: 36 TB v Native: 72 TB
| v Compressed: 72 TB (2:1 compression) v Compressed: 144 TB (2:1
| compression)
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges
v Native: 19.2 TB v Native: 38.4 TB
v Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1 v Compressed: 75.2 TB (2:1
compression) compression)
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges
v Native: 9.6 TB v Native: 19.2 TB
v Compressed: 19.2 TB (2:1 v Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1
compression) compression)
Sustained native data transfer LTO 3 HH: 60 MBs,
rate
LTO 3 FH: 80 MBs

LTO 4 HH and FH: 120 MBs

| LTO 5 HH and FH: 140 MBs

Ultrium Tape Drives

| This library supports the Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Tape Drives. Each
tape drive in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled. The drive
sled is a customer replaceable unit (CRU), and is designed for quick removal and
replacement in the library.

| The Ultrium 5 Full High Tape Drives support Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or Fibre
| Channel interfaces. It features two SFF-8088 SAS connectors, or one LC Fibre
| Channel connector. The Ultrium 5 Half High Tape Drive supports two SAS
| SFF-8088 connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The SFF-8088 SAS
| connectors on the Ultrium 5 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2
| cables.

The Ultrium 4 Full High Tape Drives support LVD Ultra160, Serial Attached SCSI
(SAS) , or Fibre Channel interfaces. It features two SFF-8088 SAS connectors, or one
LC Fibre Channel connector. The Ultrium 4 Half High Tape Drive supports one
| SAS SFF-8088 connector. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 4 tape drives
| are compatible with SAS-1 cables.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-7

 The Ultrium 3 Full High Tape Drive supports LVD Ultra160, or Fibre Channel
interfaces. It features two HD68 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The
Ultrium 3 Half High Drive supports one SAS SFF-8088 connector or two HD68
| SCSI connectors. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3 tape drives are
| compatible with SAS-1 cables.

a77ug008
Figure 1-6. Library drive sled without ESD springs (SCSI sled shown)

1
a77ug202

Figure 1-7. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS sled shown)

Note: Ultrium 3 and 4 SCSI, SAS, and Fibre Channel drives are allowed in the
same physical and logical library.

1-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Speed Matching
| To improve system performance, the Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Tape
| Drives use a technique called speed matching to dynamically adjust its native
(uncompressed) data rate to the slower data rate of the attached server.

Channel Calibration
| The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Tape
| Drives customizes each read/write data channel for optimum performance. The
customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel
transfer function, media characteristics, and read/write head characteristics.

Power Management
| The Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Tape Drive's power management function
controls the drive's electronics so that part of the electronics completely turn OFF
when circuit functions are not needed for the drive's operation.

Media
| The library uses Ultrium Tape Cartridges that provide up to 1500 GB native
| capacity (up to 3000 GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 5 tape
| drives, up to 800 GB native capacity (up to 1600 GB with 2:1 hardware data
| compression) for LTO-4 tape drives, and up to 400 GB native capacity (up to 800
| GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for LTO-3 tape drives.

| IBM Ultrium 5 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges. IBM
| Ultrium 5 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges at
| original Ultrium 4 capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges
| with improved data rates. IBM Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges. IBM Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 3 capacities, and can also read LTO
Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges with improved data rates. IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives
| can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges. IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can
| read and write LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 2 capacities, and
can also read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges with improved data rates of up to 20
MB/second native data transfer rate (40 MB/second with 2:1 compression).
| Ultrium 4 tape drives cannot read Ultrium 1 tapes. Ultrium 5 tape drives cannot
| read Ultrium 1 or Ultrium 2 tapes.

Supported cartridges include:

| v IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 5)
v IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 4)
v IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 3)
| v IBM Write-Once-Read-Many WORM Data Cartridge (Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4,
| Ultrium 5)
v IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 2)
v IBM 100 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 1; read only)
v IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge

Important: Cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar
code labels. For additional information, see Chapter 6, “Using Ultrium
Media,” on page 6-1.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-9

 Library Specifications
Physical Specifications
Table 1-5. Physical Specifications
Specification 2U library 4U library
Rack mount 87.6 mm (3.44 in), Rack mount 175.2 mm (6.9 in),
Height stand-alone 97.6 mm (3.84 in) stand-alone 185.2 mm (7.3 in)
Width 447.5 mm (17.6 in.) 447.5 mm (17.6 in.)
Rack mount 740 mm (29.13 in), Rack mount 740 mm (29.13 in),
Depth stand-alone 810 mm (31.9 in) stand-alone 810 mm (31.9 in)
Weight with 1 drive and without
media 15.59 kg (34.37 lbs.) 21.32 kg (47 lbs.)
Weight with media 20.67 kg (45.57 lbs.) 31.71 kg (69.9 lbs.)

Power Specifications
Table 1-6. Power Specifications
AC power voltage 100-127 VAC; 200-240 VAC (4 - 2 A)
Line frequency 50-60 Hz

Operation Specifications
| Table 1-7. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 5
| Library with
| 2U Library 4U Library
| Ultrium 5 drive(s)
| Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
| Maximum storage
| Native: 36 TB Native: 72 TB
| capacity
| Compressed: 72 TB (2:1 compression) Compressed: 144 TB (2:1 compression)
| Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O station slots)
| Sustained native Ultrium 5 Full High Drive: 140 MB/s
| data transfer rate Ultrium 5 Half High Drive: 140 MB/s

| Ultrium 5 Full High Drive

| Drive types Fibre Channel, SAS
| Ultrium 5 Half High Drive:
| Fibre Channel, SAS

| Interfaces 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel

| 6 Gb/s SAS
| *Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.
|
Table 1-8. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 4
Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 4 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 19.2 TB Native: 38.4 TB
capacity
Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1 compression) Compressed: 75.2 TB (2:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O station slots)

1-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 1-8. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 4 (continued)
Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 4 drive(s)
Sustained native Ultrium 4 Full High Drive: 120 MB/s
data transfer rate Ultrium 4 Half High Drive: 120 MB/s

Ultrium 4 Full High Drive

Drive types
SCSI, Fibre Channel, SAS
Ultrium 4 Half High Drive: SAS

Ultra160 SCSI LVD

Interfaces
4 Gb/s Fibre Channel
3 Gb/s SAS
*Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.

Table 1-9. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 3

Library with
2U library 4U library
Ultrium 3 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 9.6 TB Native: 19.2 TB
capacity
Compressed: 19.2 TB (2:1 compression) Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O station slots.)
Sustained native Ultrium 3 Full High Drive: 80 MB/s
data transfer rate Ultrium 3 Half High Drive: 60 MB/s
Ultrium 3 Full High
Drive types Drive: SCSI, Fibre Channel
Ultrium 3 Half High Drive: SCSI, Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
Ultra160 SCSI LVD
Interfaces 4 Gb/s Fibre Channel
3 Gb/s SAS

Environmental Specifications
Table 1-10. Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Storage, without cartridges -30° to 60° C (-22° to 140° F)
Wet bulb, operating 26° C (79.0° F) maximum
Temperature shock immunity - maximum rate of change 10° C (18° F) per hour
Miscellaneous
Dust concentration less than 200 microgram/cubic meter
Altitude (operating) 2500 meters (8200 ft.) at 25°C ambient
Maximum acoustical noise sound power levels LwAd in bels 6.6/6.8
Humidity
Operating 15% to 80% RH non-condensing
Storage, without cartridges 10% to 90% RH non-condensing

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-11

Product Environment
The library is designed to operate in a general business environment.

The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category
2D. Category 2D states that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m (13
ft.) from a permanent work station.

To allow for service access, install the library a minimum of 0.9 m (3 ft.) from all
obstacles.

The library is a precision computer peripheral. To ensure maximum longevity of

your library, locate the library away from dust, dirt, and airborne particulates:
v Keep the library away from high-traffic areas, especially if the floor is carpeted.
Carpeting harbors dust and people walking on the carpet can cause the carpet
fibers and the dust to become airborne.
v Keep the library out of printer/copier rooms because of toner and paper dust.
Additionally, do not store paper supplies next to the library.
v Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorways, open windows,
fans, and air conditioners.

Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any
contamination from airborne particles.

Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Software

The library is supported by a wide variety of servers (hosts), operating systems,
and adapters. These attachments can change throughout the life cycle of the
product.

To determine the latest supported attachments:

1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/.
2. Point cursor at Support & downloads, then Support by product, then point
and click System storage.
3. Select the appropriate Interoperability link.

Supported Device Drivers

IBM maintains the latest levels of device drivers and driver documentation for the
library on the Internet. You can use one of the following procedures to access this
material. (Note: If you do not have Internet access and you need information
about device drivers, contact your Marketing Representative.)
v Using a browser, type one of the following:
– http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto
– ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/devdrvr
v Using File Transfer Protocol (FTP), enter the following specifications:
– FTP site: ftp.software.ibm.com
– IP Addr: 207.25.253.26
– Userid: anonymous
– Password: (use your current e-mail address)
– Directory: /storage/devdrvr

1-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
IBM provides Portable Document Format (.pdf) and Postscript (.ps) versions of its
device driver documentation in the /storage/devdrvr/Doc directory:
v IBM_tape_IUG.pdf and IBM_tape_IUG.ps contain the current version of the IBM
Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide.
v IBM_tape_PROGREF.pdf and IBM_tape_PROGREF.ps contain the current version
of the IBM Tape Device Drivers Programming Reference.

A list of device drivers for each supported server appears at /storage/devdrvr/.

Note: The device driver for System i servers is included in the OS/400 operating
system.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-13

1-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 2. User Interfaces
This library has two user interfaces.
v Operator Control Panel - located on the front panel of the library
v “Web User Interface” on page 2-4 - accessed via a web browser

Operator Control Panel

The Operator Control Panel operates in two basic modes.
v User Interaction mode - This mode is employed when a user is pushing buttons
on the Operator Control Panel.
v System Driven mode - This is the normal mode of operation. In this mode, the
Operator Control Panel displays status associated with the actions that were
caused from commands issued via the drive's internal (drive to library) serial
interface.

When an Operator Control Panel button is pressed and released, the Operator
Control Panel automatically transitions to User Interaction mode. User Interaction
mode will continue until 3 minutes after a user stops pushing buttons, or the
requested accessor action stops - whichever is longer. At which time, the Operator
Control Panel will return to System Driven mode.

If necessary, the Operator Control Panel automatically transitions to the System

Driven mode. When this occurs, the library must remember the previous function
before the display mode changed. Therefore the next button pressed only
transitions the Operator Control Panel to the User Interaction mode from the
System Driven mode.

In case of the activated user security feature, the User Interaction mode is
restricted to Login and Monitor menu items, until a user logs in with a correct
password.

Operator Control Panel Philosophy

Operator Control Panel operation must obey some basic rules. These rules of
operation constitute a philosophy.
v Any operational conflict between commands received over the host interface or
the Web User Interface and those entered via the Operator Control Panel will be
avoided with a reservation mechanism on a first-come, first-served basis. Any
reservation by the Operator Control Panel is canceled by an Operator Control
Panel logout or a timeout, which cancels the User Interaction Mode.
v Library firmware will not allow a user to select an impossible request. Those
situations will include, but are not limited to:
– Moving a cartridge from any source to a full slot
– Moving a cartridge from an empty slot
– Loading a cartridge from any source to a full drive
– Unloading a cartridge from an empty drive
v Any error detected by the library or drive controller and not recoverable through
predetermined firmware algorithms will be considered as fatal. An error code
will be displayed on the Operator Control Panel display and the error LED will

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 2-1

 become illuminated. The error code remains on the Operator Control Panel until
a push button is pressed, which causes the Operator Control Panel to return to
the Home Screen.
v Numeric error codes are only used for unrecoverable, fatal errors, otherwise text
status messages are displayed.

Power-ON Display
When the library powers ON or resets, it goes through several internally controlled
processes that allow it to get initialized and running. These processes are called
Power-On-Self-Test (POST). During the POST the Operator Control Panel displays
information that may be meaningless until POST is complete. When the POST is
finished, the library displays the Startup screen, then the Home screen.

The Startup screen is the first screen that appears after powering ON the library. It
contains the following information:
v Firmware Rev: the current level of library firmware
v Drives: the total number of drives that the library can support
v Magazines: the total number of magazines in the library
v I/O Station: the current status of the I/O Station

The Home screen example below shows that the Accessor and Drives 1 through 3
are OK as shown by the check marks in the Home Screen, but that drive 4 either
has a problem, or is missing. The exclamation mark (!), which shows that there is
something wrong with drive 4 will not go away until the drive is either fixed, or is
replaced. At that time, the explanation mark will become a check mark.

Figure 2-1. Power-ON screens

Note about the Front Panel LEDs

All LEDs are updated during power ON and reset sequences. Upon power ON or
software reset, the library illuminates all LEDs as soon as POST allows. When
initialization starts, all LEDs are extinguished and the Ready/Activity LED flashes
at a rate of approximately one second per cycle. When the mechanical initialization
is complete, the Ready/Activity LED will stop flashing and be constantly
illuminated.

2-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 If a library failure occurs, the Ready/Activity LED will turn OFF and the Error
LED illuminates. The Operator Control Panel will also display an appropriate error
code to help identify the failure.

The following are additional operational details of LEDs:

v The Ready/Activity LED is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and
functional. The Ready/Activity LED blinks whenever there is library or drive
activity. This LED will also blink when the unit is OFFLINE.
v The Clean LED is illuminated when either a cleaning requested or a cleaning
required flag has been issued by the drive. The LED is turned off after a
successful drive cleaning operation.
v The Attention LED indicates one of the following conditions.

Problem Action Required

Bad media 1. Go to Monitor → Inventory to locate the defective
cartridge.
2. Move the defective cartridge to the I/O Station.
(Operator Control Panel: Control → Move Cartridges).
3. Open the I/O Station to remove the defective
cartridge. (Operator Control Panel: Control → Open
I/O).
Drive sled issues Do one of the following:

- Install a drive sled (see “Removing/Installing/Adding

a Tape Drive Sled” on page 10-3).

- Modify or resubmit Logical Library setting (Operator

Control Panel: Configure → Logical Libraries or Web
User Interface: Configure Library → Logical Libraries).

- Restore defaults (Operator Control Panel: Configure →

Restore Defaults or Web User Interface: Configure
Library → Restore Defaults).
Redundant power supply failed Complete the following steps:

1. Replace the failed power supply (see “Replacing a

Power Supply” on page 10-11).

2. Cycle library power.

Power supply fan failure Replace the power supply.

v The Error LED is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable (i.e. hard) drive or
library failure. This will happen at the same time the hard error message is
displayed on the screen and the LED will remain lit until the error state is
resolved.

Note: From the Operator Control Panel, run Service → Library Verify. If Library
Verify runs without error, the Error LED turns off. If the error persists,
recycle power.

Input Modes
There are several ways to enter values in the different menu items. These values
are selectable predefined values, toggle values (for example, ON/OFF) and
numerical values like network addresses.

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-3

 Selecting Predefined Values
1. To set the predefined values, press the SELECT button to select the menu item.
2. Using the UP and DOWN buttons, select one of the various predefined values
for that item.
3. As soon as the Operator Control Panel display shows the correct value, press
the SELECT button to apply the value.

Toggling Values
Toggle values are used to switch between two different states like ON and OFF.
1. After navigating to the menu item, press the SELECT button to select the menu
item.
2. Using the UP and DOWN buttons, select one of the various predefined states
for that item.
3. Press the SELECT button to apply the new state.

Entering Numerical Values

Numerical values are needed for network addresses, password entries and other
configuration entries.
1. After navigating to the menu item, the current value is displayed and the
cursor highlights the first digit of the value that can be changed.
2. For each digit to be changed in the value:
a. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to increment / decrement the digit.
b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the next editable digit.
3. Press the SELECT button at the last digit to apply the complete entry, or press
the CANCEL button to cancel the whole edit process and maintain the original
value.

Power ON/OFF
Part of the Operator Control Panel is the Power ON/OFF button. If the library is
powered ON, pressing this button for 4 seconds will initiate a controlled power
down of the library (soft landing). The following operations will take place before
the library shuts down completely:
v The display indicates with an appropriate message that the shutdown is in
progress.
v The library controller finishes all ongoing library and drive activities.
v The accessor is moved to its home position.
v The library controller switches OFF the power supply's secondary side.

Note: The shutdown process may be aborted by releasing the button before 4
seconds has passed.

Web User Interface

Many of the same operations performed from the Operator Control Panel can also
be performed remotely using the Web User Interface.

The Web User Interface lets you monitor and control your library from any
terminal connected to your network or through the World Wide Web (WWW). The
Web User Interface hosts a dedicated, protected Internet site that displays a
graphical representation of your library.

2-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 For static IP Addresses only: After establishing a connection to the library, open
any HTML browser and enter the IP address of the library. To configure the Web
User Interface, you must first set the IP address using the Operator Control Panel.
Refer to "Configure: Network" on page 5-23 or "Configure Library: Network" on
page 5-45.

Login
Important: Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE. This
inactive mode can interfere with host-based application software,
causing data loss. Make sure the library is idle before attempting to
perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE.

To login, select the Role type and enter the correct password. There are four levels
of access:
v User - Normal user level. The User only has access to Monitor Library menus.
v Superuser - The Superuser has access to the Monitor Library and Manage
Library sections.
v Admin - Admin user level The Admin user has access to all menus except those
restricted to Service only.
v Service - Service personnel user level - Access to this level is for Service
personnel only. Service personnel have access to all menus.

Note: Passwords are case-sensitive.

Use the following password for logging in as an Admin user: secure

Each level affects which areas you have access to and what actions you can initiate
from those areas.

For DHCP, use the Operator Control Panel to determine the IP Address assigned to
your library. Navigate to Monitor → Library → Identity. Scroll down to IP Address
and make note of the address. Enter the IP Address in your internet browser
address field to access your library with the Web User Interface.

For IPv4 or Dual Stack IPv4 + IPv6, enter your library's static IP Address using the
0.0.0.0 format (four octets).

For IPv6, enter your library's static IP Address or Router Assigned IP Address
using the following format: http://[0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0]. To determine your Router
Assigned IP Address, navigate to Monitor → Library → Network on the Operator
Control Panel. For the IPv6 Router Assigned Addresses to be displayed on the
Operator Control Panel, the Network must be configured to IPv6 Only and the
Stateless Autoconfig on the must be set to ON.

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-5

 a77ug070
Figure 2-2. Web User Interface login page

System Status
The System Status screen is always present after login giving current status of the
library.

a77ug080

Figure 2-3. 2U library System Status screen

a77ug089

Figure 2-4. 4U library System Status screen

Status icons indicate the following conditions.

v The green check mark indicates that the library is fully operational and that no
user intervention is required.
v The yellow exclamation point indicates that user intervention is necessary, but
that the library is still capable of performing operations. This condition can be
caused by a media, library, redundant power supply, power supply fan, or a
drive sled problem. To determine which, view the System Status screen.
v The red X indicates that user intervention is required and that the library is not
capable of performing operations.

2-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present, or if a cleaning
cartridge is present, but not in a reserved slot, Auto Clean status will show Chk
Media/Rsvd Slot? and Status will show a green check mark and the words
Media Attention.

Figure 2-5. 4U library System Status screen showing media attention status

v The Power Supply Status will only appear if redundant power is being utilized
with a 4U library, and the library was manufactured after March 14, 2008. If a
redundant power supply fails, the System Status screen will appear as shown in
Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6. 4U library System Status screen showing a power supply failure

Note: If your library has -04 level redundant power supplies (see label on top of
power supply), it is normal for the one in “Standby” mode to turn its
“Green” LED off. You can test this power supply by pulling the power
connector from the other “Active” power supply. The power supply that
was in “Standby” mode will now become “Active”, and its “Green” LED
should light. If it doesn’t, replace it (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply”
on page 10-11).

If your library has -05 level redundant power supplies, the "Green" LED
will be ON on both power supplies. If both "Green" LEDs are not ON,
replace the failed power supply (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on
page 10-11).

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-7

 Web User Interface Help Pages
Each screen on the Web User Interface has an associated Help page. To access a
Help page, click on Help in the upper right corner of the screen. A new web page
will open. Using the left navigation pane, select the desired Help page. To close the
Help page, click the red X in the upper right corner of the screen.

Logging out of the Web User Interface

To log out of the Web User Interface, click Logout in the upper right corner of the
current screen.

Important: If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser
window, you will not log out of the Web User Interface.

2-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Installation Planning
Before installing your library, take time to review the following information.

Determining the Number of Logical Libraries

You can partition the library into as many logical libraries as there are drives in the
library.

Basic Guidelines
v Each logical library must contain at least one drive.
v A library configuration of exactly one logical library equals the entire physical
library.
v The library issues a warning to the user if media is moved across logical
libraries.

Library Sharing
The library's default configuration allows a single application to operate the library
through a single control path. Often, it is advantageous to be able to share a single
library between heterogeneous (dissimilar) or homogeneous (similar) applications.
Some applications (and some servers) do not allow for sharing a library between
systems. Configurations can be created that enable the library to process
commands from multiple heterogeneous applications (such as an IBM System p
application and a Windows NT® application) and multiple homogeneous
applications (for example, the same application run by several System p servers).

From the library's Web User Interface or Operator Control Panel, the following
actions can be performed:
v Configure the library so that it is partitioned into separate logical libraries that
independently communicate with separate applications through separate control
paths. This configuration requires no special capabilities from the server or
application. (For more information, see “Using Multiple Logical Libraries for
Library Sharing” on page 3-2.)
v Configure any single logical library (including the entire physical library) so that
it is shared by two or more servers that are running the same application.
Depending on the capabilities of the server and application, there are several
ways to set up this type of configuration. Three typical ways include:
– Configuring one server (host) to communicate with the library through a
single control path; all other servers send requests to that server through a
network. This configuration is used by Tivoli® Storage Manager (TSM).
– Configuring all of the servers to communicate with the library through a
single, common control path. This configuration is used in high-availability
environments such as IBM's High Availability Clustered Microprocessing
(HACMP) and Microsoft's Systems Management Server (SMS) and Clustered
Server Environments. Multi-initiator configurations are only supported by
certain adapters and independent software vendors (ISVs). Check with your
ISV.
– Configuring a single logical library to communicate with multiple servers
through multiple control paths. This configuration requires that control paths

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 3-1

 be added (see “Using Multiple Control Paths”). It is used by Backup Recovery
and Media Services (BRMS).

Library configuration is not limited to the examples given above. Many

configurations are possible, and can be designed according to your business needs.
For additional information, refer to your host application documentation.

Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library Sharing

Multiple logical libraries are an effective way for the library to simultaneously back
up and restore data from heterogeneous applications. For example, the library can
be partitioned so that it processes:
v Commands from Application A (about Department X) in Logical Library 1
v Commands from Application B (about Department Y) in Logical Library 2

In this configuration, the storage slots and drives in each logical library are
dedicated to that library and are not shared among other libraries. Commands
issued by the applications travel to the library through two unique control paths.
Thus, the data processing for:
v Department X is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 1
v Department Y is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 2

Using Multiple Control Paths

In addition to creating multiple logical libraries, any logical library can be
configured to have more than one control path. When configuring additional
control paths, additional library sharing configurations and availability options are
made possible. Access to the logical library is on a first-come, first-served basis and
each control path for a logical library can accept commands while the library is in
use by another control path. By default, only the first drive in a logical library will
be LUN-1 enabled.

Note: Microsoft Windows® 2000 and Microsoft Windows 2003 Removable Storage
Manager (RSM) does not support multiple control paths within a logical
library. It is recommended that RSM be disabled to use this feature.

For a particular logical library, you can enable as many control paths as there are
drives in that logical library.

Using Multiple Control Paths for System i, iSeries, and AS/400

Attachment
The use of control paths for the System i, iSeries, and AS/400 servers is unique. In
general, every iSeries adapter must recognize the control path that is associated
with the drives to which it is connected. For the iSeries and AS/400 servers, one to
six drives are supported by LVD and Fibre Channel adapters and the OS/400® 5.1,
OS/400 5.2, or i5/OS 5.3 operating system.

Using Multiple Control Paths for Path Failover

Command failures and timeouts are costly. You want your library to run smoothly
and efficiently. To ensure continued processing, the library offers an optional path
failover feature that enables the host device driver to resend the command to an
alternate control path for the same logical library. With control path failover
installed, the alternate control path can include another HBA, SAN, or library
control path drive. The device driver initiates error recovery and continues the

3-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 operation on the alternate control path without interrupting the application. AIX,
HP-UX, Solaris, Linux and Windows 2003 hosts are currently supported for this
feature.

| For library firmware of 8.xx or lower the 2U library does not support Control Path
| Failover and Data Path Failover. As a result, there should be no license key entry
| for "Path Failover" on the 2U library.Library firmware levels higher than 8.xx
| support Path Failover on both the 2U library and the 4U library. Path Failover is a
combination of two previous features: Control Path Failover (key entered at the
library user interface) and Data Path Failover (key entered at the device driver
interface). A single activation key entered at the library user interface now activates
both features unless the LTO-3 drive firmware level is equal to or lower than 73P5
and/or the library firmware is equal to or lower than 1.95. For either or both of
these two cases, the device driver interface Data Path Failover key activation will
| still be required. For library firmware of 8.xx or lower the Path Failover feature is
| available for select LTO 4 tape drives, and is not supported for Half High drives.
| Library firmware levels higher than 8.xx support Path Failover on LTO 5 Full High
| and Half High drives, as well as LTO 4 Full Highand Half High drives.

| The Path Failover feature can be installed by the customer. For ordering
| information, see Chapter 11, “Optional Features, Replacement Parts and Power
| Cords,” on page 11-1.

| For more information about using the path failover feature, see the IBM Ultrium
| Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide.
|
| Library Partitioning and Element Addressing
| Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 1.70 and higher, and containing at
| least 2 drives, have the ability to configure two logical libraries (create two
| partitions). This partitioning has been expanded with the new library firmware and
| half-high drive integration. Now it is possible to configure 1, 2, 3 or 4 partitions in
| the 4U library. Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two
| partitions. Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library
| (partition).

| Partitioning of 2U Libraries

| When two half high drives are installed in a 2U library, the library firmware will
| support partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two
| full high drives today. The first partition will contain the first magazine and the
| first drive. The second partition will contain the second magazine and the second
| drive. The I/O station (if configured as I/O) will be shared, as is done with the
| partitioned 4U library.

| One full high drive is "Drive 1". When using half high drives, the first half high
| drive position will be called "Drive 1", The second half high drive position will be
| called "Drive 2."

| Partitioning of 4U Libraries

| When one or more half high drives are added to a 4U library, the drive naming
| will change. Currently, the first full high drive is "Drive 1" and the second full high
| drive is "Drive 2". When you consider that each full high drive slot may contain
| one or two half high drives, there are four potential drives in the space that used
| to occupy two. As a result, the first half high drive position, or the first full-high

Chapter 3. Installation Planning 3-3

| drive position, will be called "Drive 1". The second half high drive position will be
| called "Drive 2". The third half high drive position, or the second full high drive
| position, will be called "Drive 3". The fourth half high drive position will be called
| "Drive 4".

| Important: In a 4U library a full high drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1
| (drive will occupy slot 1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy
| slot 3 and slot 4). A full high drive sled should never be installed in
| drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).

| Mixing of Drives

| The library supports a mix of full high and half high drives in the same physical
| library and the same logical library. They support a mix of Gen 3, Gen 4, and Gen
| 5 drives in the same physical library and the same logical library. They will also
support a mix of SCSI, SAS, and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and
the same logical library; however, mixing drive interface types in the same logical
library is not recommended.

Configuration of a 1 - Partition System

A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives
present in any drive positions, and it will contain all four magazines.

When configured with one logical partition, the Element Address assignments will
be as follows:
v DTE assignments will be as shown in Figure 3-1.
v STE assignments will be as shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-6.

Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 259 Drive 3 259 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
257 258
Element Address Element Address
258 258
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address
Drive 1 Drive 1 a77ug161
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 3-1. Configuration of a one - partition system

Configuration of a 2 - Partition System

A two partition system must have at least two drives installed. One drive must be
installed in either drive position 1 or drive position 2, and another drive must be
installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4. Partition 1 contains any
drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2. Partition 1 will also contain
magazine 1 and magazine 2. Partition 2 contains any drives in drive position 3 and
drive position 4. Partition 2 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4.

When configured with two logical partitions, the Element Address assignments
will be as follows: DTE assignments will be as shown in Figure 3-2 on page 3-5.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4116 (0x1014)

3-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v Logical Library 2: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4019 (0x1017)

Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 257 Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address

a77ug162
Drive 1 Drive 1
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 3-2. Configuration of a two - partition system

Configuration of a 3 - Partition System

| A three partition system must have at least three drives installed. A drive must be
| installed in drive position 1, another drive must be installed in drive position 2,
| and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4.
| Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine. Partition 2 will
| contain the second drive and the second magazine. Partition 3 will contain any
| drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 3 will also contain
| magazine 3 and magazine 4.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4119 (0x1017)

|
Drive 4
Element Address
Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address 2 4
256 Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 256 1 3
a77ug163

Drive 1 Drive 1
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

|
| Figure 3-3. Configuration of a three - partition system
|
Configuration of a 4 - Partition System

A four partition system must have four drives. Each partition contains one drive
and one magazine.

When configured with four logical partitions, the Element Address assignments
will be as follows: DTE assignments will be as shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-6.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 33 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)

Chapter 3. Installation Planning 3-5

 v Logical Library 4: Slot 34 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)

Drive 4
Element Address
256 Magazine Magazine
Drive 3 2 4
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 1 3

a77ug164
Drive 1
Element Address
256 Front side

Figure 3-4. Configuration of a four - partition system

SCSI Element Addressing

Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element
start address (default value 256). It will be incremented from the bottom to the top
slots for every drive slot. There is one exception to this addressing scheme to
accommodate libraries currently in the field. A 4U library containing only full high
drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257, thus causing
no interruptions to their operation. Drive slots will still be incremented by 1 for
each drive slot position.

Note: Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library
needing to be reconfigured.

4U Unit with only FH drives

(1 logical library)

SCSI Element Slot

4
257
3
2
256
1

4U Unit with FH and HH drives

(1 logical library)
SCSI Element Slot
4
258
3
a77ug165

257 2
256 1

Figure 3-5. Examples of SCSI element addressing

The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing. Special
handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification. Also
temporarily removed drives need to have their addresses preserved to not confuse
the attached host and host application. Generally only drives which are currently
physically available or temporarily removed are reported. Empty (unused) slots
located at the bottom or the top should not be reported, with an exception in case
of a “removed” condition. A drive slot which does not contain a drive, and has a
position between used slots, needs to be reported as a SCSI element. To signal the
host application that this slot is not usable, its ACCESS bit will be disabled.

3-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Note: When reducing the number of drives in your library, update the Logical
Library configuration. This will remove the Attention LED on the front
panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive
is missing.

Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element
addressing and drive numbering. Replacing LTO half high drives with full high
drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the
drive element addressing and drive numbering. See “Configure Library:
Save/Restore” on page 5-56.

Using Persistent Binding to Ensure SCSI ID Assignment

When a server is booted, devices are discovered and assigned SCSI target and
LUN IDs. It is possible for these SCSI assignments to change between boots. Some
operating systems do not guarantee that devices will always be allocated the same
SCSI target ID after rebooting. Also, some software depends on this association, so
you do not want it to change. The issue of SCSI ID assignment is addressed by
persistent binding.

Persistent binding is an HBA function that allows a subset of discovered targets to

be bound between a server and device. Implemented by a World Wide Node
Name (WWNN) or World Wide Port Name (WWPN), persistent binding causes a
tape drive's WWNN to be bound to a specific SCSI target ID. After a configuration
has been set, it survives reboots and any hardware configuration changes because
the information is preserved. If a drive needs to be replaced, the new drive
assumes the WWNN of the old drive because the WWNN for the drive is
location-dependent within the library. Because the WWNN does not change,
persistent binding does not need to be changed thus preventing a potential outage.

Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning

The library uses a single SCSI or Loop ID per drive and dual LUNs to control the
tape drive (LUN 0) and library accessor (LUN 1). The library requires a Host Bus
Adapter (HBA) that supports LUN scanning. If it is not enabled, your host system
will not scan beyond LUN 0 and will fail to discover the library. It will only see
the tape drive.

Important: Some HBAs, such as RAID controllers, do not support LUN scanning.

Host Interfaces
The 2U library and the 4U library can be attached to servers using the following
interfaces:
v SCSI (LVD Ultrium 160)
v Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
v Fibre Channel
Table 3-1. Host Drive Interface Support
Drive SCSI (LVD Ultra 160) SAS FC
Ultrium 3 FH X X
Ultrium 3 HH X X
Ultrium 4 FH X X* X
Ultrium 4 HH X

Chapter 3. Installation Planning 3-7

 Table 3-1. Host Drive Interface Support (continued)
Drive SCSI (LVD Ultra 160) SAS FC
| Ultrium 5 FH X X
| Ultrium 5 HH X X
Note: * = Dual Port SAS

SCSI Interface
Note: Although the LVD hardware in the library is capable of operating in
single-ended (SE) mode, SE operation is not recommended.

The library supports SCSI LVD attachments by using SCSI cables with 68-pin,
HD-connectors. SCSI adapters must be properly terminated.

Before installing the SCSI cables, inspect all cables for damage. Do not install a
cable if it is damaged. Report the damage immediately by contacting your place of
purchase.

The maximum allowable length of your bus cabling depends on the type of SCSI
bus that you use (LVD).
v For a server with an LVD SCSI bus:
– Use a maximum system-to-device cable length of 10 m (33 ft) when attaching
to the host interface board (SCSI) and one or two daisy-chained drives.
– Use a maximum system-to-device cable length of 5 m (17 ft) when attaching
to the host interface board (SCSI) and three to six daisy-chained drives.

Note: For maximum performance, it is recommended to have a maximum of

one drive per SCSI bus.
– Only use the maximum system-to-device cable length of 25 m (82 ft) when
attaching directly to one device (a point to point interconnection).

Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI

bus performance, SCSI cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.

Physical Characteristics of the SCSI Interface

The library operates as a set of SCSI-3 devices. The Ultrium Tape Drives attach to
servers using an LVD Ultra160 SCSI interface. Each SCSI drive sled uses shielded,
HD68-pin connectors, and can attach directly to a 2-byte-wide SCSI cable.

Any combination of up to two initiators (servers) and up to four targets (devices)

is allowed on a single SCSI bus if the following conditions are met:
v The SCSI bus is terminated properly at each end
v Cable restrictions are followed according to the SCSI-3 specification

Under the SCSI-3 protocol, this type of attachment allows cable lengths of up to 25
m (81 ft) with the appropriate cable and terminator. The table below gives the
maximum bus length between terminators for the LVD interface. For information
about cable connectors, see “SCSI Connectors and Adapters” on page 3-10.

3-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 3-2. Maximum bus length between terminators
Maximum Bus Length Between Terminators (in
Type of Interconnection meters)
Point-to-point (1 server and 1 drive) 25
Multi-drop/daisy-chain (1 server and
12 (LVD)
multiple drives)
Note: The maximum bus lengths stated in this table include the internal length of the bus.

For maximum performance, multiple SCSI buses may be required (see “Using
Multiple SCSI Buses”), and IBM Ultrium Tape Drives must be the only target
devices that are active on the bus.

Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus
performance, SCSI cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.

Note: For maximum performance, the quantity of tape drives that you can attach
to one SCSI bus is limited, and is based on the type of bus that you have
and the amount of data compression achieved. Ultra160 SCSI buses have a
bandwidth of 160 MB per second. The table below lists the types of SCSI
buses and gives the recommended maximum quantity of drives that you can
attach.
Table 3-3. Recommended maximum quantity of drives per SCSI bus
Type of Drive Ultra 160 SCSI Bus
LVD Ultrium 3 1 drive at 2:1 compression

Using Multiple SCSI Buses

The library has two SCSI connectors for each tape drive in the library. Each drive
can be daisy-chained using a SCSI bus jumper.

Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus
performance, SCSI cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.

Removal of any jumpers will create a SCSI bus for each drive installed in your
library for attachment to multiple servers or to multiple SCSI adapter cards on one
server. Remember that each SCSI bus must be terminated. Multiple SCSI buses
may be required for maximum performance, depending on the application and
data compression ratio. Note, however, that library (Medium Changer) control is
required on at least one SCSI bus.

The Medium Changer device is required to be addressed via LUN 1 of the

lowest-numbered drive position of each logical library. The Medium Changer
device may additionally be addressed via LUN 1 of other drives in any logical
library.

Any bus containing a Medium Changer device via LUN 1 of a drive is referred to
as a control and data path. Any other bus is referred to as a data path. For
information about control paths, see “Using Multiple Control Paths” on page 3-2.

Terminating the Bus

The SCSI bus and all of the wires in the SCSI cable must be properly terminated
according to the SCSI standard.

Chapter 3. Installation Planning 3-9

 You can plug an external terminator into one of the SCSI connectors. A terminator
must be installed on the last device on each end of a string of multiple devices. A
terminator is included with each SCSI Ultrium Tape Drive.

SCSI Connectors and Adapters

The library is supported by a wide variety of servers (hosts), operating systems,
and adapters. These attachments can change throughout the product's life cycle. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/
storage/. Or, contact your IBM Sales Representative.

SCSI Differential - LVD

IBM LVD tape devices support a bus length of 25 meters (82 ft.) point-to-point, and
12 meters (39 ft.) using multi-drop interconnection (daisy-chaining). For each
daisy-chained device, the maximum cable length must be reduced by 0.5 meters
(1.6 ft).

Important: A faster bus does not imply that an attached device will support that
data rate, but that multiple devices can operate on the bus at that
maximum speed. For a detailed table of SCSI terms and related
specifications, refer to the SCSI Trade Association Web site at
http://www.scsita.org/terms/scsiterms.html. To ensure best
performance, if possible, avoid daisy-chaining.

SAS Interface
A drive sled with a SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) interface can be linked directly to
controllers. SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS
enables multiple devices (up to 128) of different sizes and types to be connected
simultaneously with thinner and longer cables; its full-duplex signal transmission
| supports up to 6.0 Gb/s. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 5 tape
drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2 cables. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on
| the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 cables. In
addition, SAS drives can be hot-plugged.

SAS drives will auto-negotiate speed. There are no configurable topologies thus no
feature switches associated with SAS. The SAS Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 half high
drive sleds are single ported and can only be attached to one host. The Ultrium 4
| full high and Ultrium 5 full high and half high drives are dual ported, and can be
attached to a maximum of two hosts. The intention of the second port is for
redundancy; for failover rather than sharing. Sharing between these two hosts is
limited to active/passive cluster failover. LAN-free drive sharing is not supported.
Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 SAS drive sleds use the SFF-8088 connection at the drive
sled end and SFF-8088 or SFF-8470 at the host adapter end. Initially, only
point-to-point connections are supported.

Fibre Channel Interface

Fibre Channel allows for an active intelligent interconnection scheme, called a
Fabric, to connect devices. Everything between the ports on Fibre Channel is called
the Fabric. The Fabric is most often a switch or series of switches that takes the
responsibility for routing.

The library allows the selection of the following Fibre channel port behaviors:
v LN Port: (default setting) - an automatic configuration that tries arbitrated loop
first, then switched fabric
v L Port - arbitrated loop

3-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v N Port - point to point protocol in a switched fabric topology

Cables and Speeds

| Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Fibre Channel tape drives use LC duplex fiber
optics cables.

The maximum distances that the library supports on a Fibre Channel link is
determined by the link speed, the type of fiber (50-micron or 62.5-micron), and the
device to which the library is attached.

If the library attaches to an HBA (Host Bus Adapter), refer to the distances that are
supported by the HBA. If the library attaches to a switch, the supported distances
are:
| v For a multi-mode 50-micron cable:
– 1-Gbit link speed = up to 500 m (1640 ft)
– 2-Gbit link speed = up to 300 m (984 ft)
– 4-Gbit link speed = up to 175 m (574 ft)
| – 8-Gbit link speed = up to 150 m (492 ft)
| v For a multi-mode 62.5-micron cable:
| – 1-Gbit link speed = up to 300 m (984 ft)
| – 2-Gbit link speed = up to 90 m (295 ft)
| – 4-Gbit link speed = up to 50 m (164 ft)
| – 8-Gbit link speed = up to 21 m (68 ft)

| Note: Minimum distance for both 50 micron and 62.5 micron is 2 m (6 ft).

Using Zoning to Isolate Devices and Enhance Security

For security reasons, it is important to limit the devices that a server or servers can
recognize or access. Also, some performance configurations and SAN
configurations can result in a device being seen multiple times from the same
server. For example, if you have two HBAs from the same server connected to an
Ultrium Tape Drive in the library, the drive will be detected and appear as two
logical devices. That is, there will be two special files for one physical device.
Zoning can address these issues.

Zoning allows you to partition your SAN into logical groupings of devices so that
each group is isolated from the other and can only access the devices in its own
group. Two types of zoning exist: hardware zoning and software zoning. Hardware
zoning is based on physical fabric port number. Software zoning is defined with a
World Wide Node Name (WWNN) or World Wide Port Name (WWPN). While
zoning can be reconfigured without causing an outage, some zoning configurations
can become complicated. The advantage of the library's WWNN implementation is
that you can avoid the exposure of introducing zoning errors because you do not
have to change the zoning configuration if a drive needs service or replacement.

Attention: It is recommended that tape storage devices be connected on a

separate HBA from disk storage devices to avoid potential configuration
incompatibilities.

Fibre Channel Host Environment

The library is supported by a wide variety of servers (hosts), operating systems,
and adapters. These attachments can change throughout the product's life cycle. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/
storage/.

Chapter 3. Installation Planning 3-11

 Sharing on a Storage Area Network
With Storage Area Network (SAN) components, the possibilities for connecting
multiple systems and multiple drives have increased. Not all software and systems
are designed to share drives. Before you install a drive that would allow two
systems to share it, check that the systems and their software support sharing. If
your software does not support sharing, note that Fibre Channel switches have a
zoning capability to form a SAN partition. For systems that do not cooperate, use
zoning to prevent the systems from sharing the same drive. You can remove zoned
partitions as you upgrade software and system levels.

3-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration
Note: Review the information in "Installation Planning" before installing your
library.

The IBM TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a customer installed
unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and maintenance of the tape library.
Customers will be charged for service if a service contract is not in place.

To install a desktop or rack mounted 2U library or 4U library, perform the

procedures in this chapter in the order they are presented.

If installing a Driveless Library (Feature Code 9001), follow the procedures in the
Installation Instructions provided with the library. The installation instructions will
be one of the following documents:
v Installation Instructions for Installing Feature Code 9001- Driveless Library Unit,
Part Number 46X0557
v Installation Instructions for Installing the Driveless Library, Part Number
46X0558

Using the Library Configuration Form

Before beginning the installation and configuration of your library, make a copy of
the Appendix G, “Library Configuration Form,” on page G-1. Enter library
information (such as serial numbers, types of drives, etc.) and configuration
settings on the Library Configuration Form and store in a safe location for future
reference. Be sure to update this form any time changes are made to your library
hardware or configuration.

Installing Your Library

Complete these procedures to install your library hardware.
1. “Choosing a Location” on page 4-2.
2. “Unpacking the Library” on page 4-2.
3. “Verifying the Shipment” on page 4-3.
4. “Installing the Library Foot Pads (for Desktop Installation ONLY)” on page 4-3.
5. “Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock” on page 4-4.
6. “Rackmounting the Library (for Rack Installation ONLY)” on page 4-6.
7. “Connecting the Host Interface Cable” on page 4-15.
8. “Connecting a Power Cord” on page 4-17.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 4-1

 Choosing a Location
Choose a location that meets the following criteria:
Table 4-1. Location criteria
Criteria Definition
Room temperature 10° - 35° C (50° - 95° F )
Note: If the temperature in the room where the library will be installed varies by 15° C (30°
F) from the room where the library was stored, allow the library to acclimate to the
surrounding environment for at least 12 hours before unpacking it from the shipping
container.
Power source v AC power voltage: 100-127 VAC; 200-240 VAC (4 - 2 A)
Note: The 4U library requires two separate power sources to implement redundant
power.
v Line frequency: 50-60 Hz

Place the library near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is the product's main AC
disconnect device and must be easily accessible at all times. Two separate power sources
must be available for redundant power.
Air quality The library should be placed in an area with minimal sources of particulate contamination.
Avoid areas near frequently used doors and walkways, stacks of supplies that collect dust,
printers, and smoke-filled rooms. Excessive dust and debris can damage tapes and tape
drives.
Humidity 15-80 % RH non-condensing
Clearance v Back: Minimum of 15.4 cm (6 inches)
v Front: Minimum of 30.8 cm (12 inches)
v Sides: Minimum of 5.08 cm (2 inches)
Rack requirements Standard 19-inch rack with:
v 2U (88.90 mm/3.5 in.) of clearance for a 2U library
v 4U (177.8 mm/7 in.) of clearance for a 4U library

Rackmounting the library is optional.

Unpacking the Library

Note: If the temperature in the room where the library will be installed varies by
15° C (30° F) from the room where the library was stored, allow the library
to acclimate to the surrounding environment for at least 12 hours before
unpacking it from the shipping container.
1. Before you begin, clear a work surface to unpack the library.
2. Before opening and removing the library from the shipping container, inspect
the container for shipping damage. If you notice any damage, report it to the
shipping company immediately.
3. Open the shipping container and carefully remove the shipping materials from
the top of the library. Remove the accessory package and set it aside.

Important: Once the drive is unpacked, save and store the packaging materials
for future moves or shipping.
4. Lift the library out of the carton and remove the bag from the library. Remove
the foam cushion from the back of the library. Save the packaging materials for
future use.

4-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Important: Do not place the library on the front panel or the rear panel as this
may damage the library.

Verifying the Shipment

Verify that the following items are included in your library shipment:
v With every library:
– Power cord
– Foot pads (for desktop installation)
– Documentation CD:
- Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
- Translated Safety Notices
- Statement of Limited Warranty (in 29 languages)
– IBM License Agreement for Machine Code
– Installation Quick Reference
– Warranty information (in 9 languages)
– Quality Hotline card
v With every library containing a SCSI drive:
– SCSI terminator (one per SCSI drive)
– SCSI library-to-host cable (if ordered by customer)
– SCSI Wrap tool (one for each library)
v With every library containing a Fibre Channel drive:
– Fibre wrap tool (one per library)
– Fibre Channel library-to-host/switch cable (if ordered by customer)
v With every library containing a SAS drive:
– SAS library-to-host cable (if ordered by customer)
– SAS Wrap tool (one for each library)
v Optional item that is included in your shipment, if ordered:
– Rack Mount Kit

Important: If any of the contents of your shipment are damaged or missing, please
call the appropriate number listed on the Quality Hotline card.

Installing the Library Foot Pads (for Desktop Installation

ONLY)
If you intend to install your library in a rack, skip this step and proceed to
“Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock” on page 4-4.

Important: Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may damage
your library or cause it not to function properly.

Six foot pads must be installed on the bottom of the library before the library can
be used as a desktop unit.

To install the library foot pads:

1. Being very careful, lay the library on its side.
2. Peel the adhesive from the back of each foot pad.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-3

 3. Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each
foot into one of the six areas (1) as shown in the figure below.

a77ug085

Figure 4-1. Installing foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure

4. Carefully return the library to an upright position.

Important: Do not place any objects on top of the library.

Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock

Important: The shipping lock, which prevents the library accessor from moving
during shipment, must be removed before the library is powered ON.

The shipping lock is held in place with a label and is located in the top center of
the library. After the shipping lock is removed, it should be stored on the right side
of the back panel of the library for future use.

To remove and store the shipping lock:

4-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1. Remove the blue label ( 2 ) that is securing the lock ( 1 ) to the top of the
library, then remove the lock (see Figure 4-2).

a77ug018
Figure 4-2. Shipping lock and label

2. Store the lock ( 1 ) and label ( 2 ) on the rear panel of the library as shown in
Figure 4-3.

2
a77ug019

Figure 4-3. Library shipping lock and label storage location

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-5

 Rackmounting the Library (for Rack Installation ONLY)
The 2U library and the 4U library are easily installed into a standard 19-inch rack
system. The 2U library requires 2U (3.5 in.) of space. The 4U library requires 4U (7
in.) of space.

If you are not rackmounting your library, skip this procedure and go to “Attaching
the Library to a Server” on page 4-15.

Important: A 2U library weighs 15.59 kg (34.37 lbs.) with one drive and without
media. A 4U library weighs 21.32 kg (47 lbs.) with one drive and
without media.

To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the library:

1. observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for
manual material handling,
2. obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during
installation or removal, and
3. always remove all cartridges to reduce the overall weight of the
library.

To install your library in a rack, perform the following steps.

| 1. Verify which rack kit was included in your shipment. Although there are two
| different rack kits, the steps to install them are the same. After verifying which
| Rack Kit you received, see Figure 4-4 on page 4-7 for the installation steps.
| a. Rack Kit A: The following parts make up Rack Kit A.
| v Packaged in plastic material:
| – 2 rails (not shown)
| – 2 mounting brackets (1)
| v Packaged in the small bag with no label:
| – 1 Torx wrench (5)
| – 2 anchors (4)
| – 2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors (6)
| – 2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting
| brackets (7)
| – 2 large screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack (8)
| v Packaged in the small bag with "Round Hole" on the label: 9 screws to be
| used on racks with round holes. (2)
| v Packaged in the small bag with "Square Hole" on the label: 9 screws to be
| used on racks with square holes. (3)

| Note: Eight (8) screws are needed for the installation. One additional screw
| is provided for security.
|

4-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
|

a77ug275
1 5 4 6
|
| Figure 4-4. Rack Kit A mounting hardware
|
| b. Rack Kit B: The following parts make up Rack Kit B.
| v Packaged in plastic material:
| – 12 black plastic square plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library
| application
| – 12 black plastic round plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library
| application
| – 2 rails
| – 2 mounting brackets
| v Packaged in the small bag with no label:
| – 1 Torx wrench
| – 2 anchors
| – 2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting
| brackets
| – 2 large screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack
| v Packaged in the small bag 4 rail mounting screws to be used on racks
| with round or square holes.
| 2. Determine the location in your rack for your library to be installed and, using a
| pencil, mark the location on each vertical rail in your rack.

| Note: A 2U library requires 2U (3.5 in.) of rack space. A 4U library requires 4U

| (7 in.) of rack space.
|

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-7

 1 3 2

1 4 2

a77ug133
Figure 4-5. Examples of EIA units for round hole and square hole installations

||| 1 Two EIA units for round hole 3 Wide Gaps within the EIA unit
|| 2 and square hole installation 4 Narrow Gaps between EIA units
|
| 3. Using the screws for your rack type (round holes or square holes) and a #2
| Phillips screwdriver and ensuring that the flange on each rail points toward the
| other to form a shelf, secure one rail to each side of the rack in your chosen
| rack location. Secure both the front and back of each rail to the rack. The
| narrow end of each rail goes to the rear of the rack. The rails extend to fit a
| variety of rack depths. Each rail requires 2U of rack space (1 in Figure 4-6).
|

1
a77ug009

Figure 4-6. Rear view of a rack showing the narrow part of the rail

4-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
|

a77ug274
|
| Figure 4-7. Alternate rear view of a rack showing the narrow part of the rail
|
|

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-9

|

a77ug196
|

a77ug271

|
| Figure 4-8. Front view of rack showing rails installed and alternate front view of rack with rails installed
|
| Note: The rail must be fastened with the bottom of the rail parallel to floor and
| at the same level.
| 4. Using the Torx wrench included in your shipment, remove the screws (1) as
| shown in Figure 4-10 on page 4-11. Screw locations on the 4U library are
| similar.
|

4-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug270
Figure 4-9. Close-up

a77ug263

Figure 4-10. 2U library side screws to remove

| 5. Install the library rack anchors (2) as shown in Figure 4-11 on page 4-12 on
| each side of your library using the longest counter-sunk screws included in the

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-11

| rack kit.
|
1

a77ug269
Figure 4-11. 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets

| 6. Install the library mounting brackets (1) as shown on the 2U library on each
| side of the library using the screw that was removed from your library and an
| additional short, counter-sunk screw included in the rack kit. (The 4U rack
| anchors and mounting brackets are similar.)
| 7. With library rack anchors and mounting brackets installed, slide the library
| onto the rails (as shown in Figure 4-12 on page 4-13 and Figure 4-13 on page
| 4-13). When the library stops, gently push the library to lock the anchors
| installed on each side of the library to the rails and until the mounting brackets
| are flush with the vertical rack rails.
|

4-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug267
Figure 4-12. Sliding the 2U library into the rack

a77ug266

Figure 4-13. Sliding the 4U library into the rack

| 8. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, secure the library to the rack (see Figure 4-14
| on page 4-14 for a 2U library; see Figure 4-15 on page 4-14 for a 4U library) by
| placing a screw in the center hole of each mounting bracket and tightening

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-13

| them (1).
|

a77ug265
Figure 4-14. Securing the 2U library to the rack

a77ug268

Figure 4-15. Securing the 4U library to the rack

| Install either the round or the square rack holes as shown above.

4-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| Attaching the Library to a Server
| The 2U library and the 4U library can be attached to servers using the following
| interfaces:
| v SCSI (LVD Ultra 160)
| v Fibre Channel
| v Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)

| Connecting the Host Interface Cable

| To connect the host interface cables to the library:
| 1. It is recommended that you shut down and turn OFF the associated server.
| Turn OFF all attached devices. Remove the power cables from the server and
| all attached accessories.

| Important: Failure to remove the power cords from these devices before
| connecting the host interface cable could result in damage to the
| library.
| 2. For a SCSI library, attach one end of the host interface cable to one of the
| connectors on the back panel of the library (see 1 in Figure 4-16). For a Fibre
| Channel library, attach one end of the host interface cable to the connector on
| the back panel of the library (see 5 in Figure 4-17 on page 4-16). For a Serial
| Attached SCSI (SAS) connected library, attach the host end of the SAS cable to
| the SAS HBA (see 2 in Figure 4-18 on page 4-16). Full high drives will have
| dual SAS connectors. Half high drives will have one SAS connector. Unused
| SAS connectors do not need to be terminated.
|
1

a77ug017

4 3 2

Figure 4-16. Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the 2U library

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-15

 4

a77ug101
6 1 3 2 5

Figure 4-17. Attaching host interface cables to the 4U library.

|
1 2 3

a77ug134
Figure 4-18. Attaching a SAS interface cable to the 2U library

| 3. Attach the other end of the host interface cable as follows:

| v For a SCSI library, connect the host interface cable to the connector on the
| SCSI host bus adapter or to the connector on the previous device on the SCSI
| bus. Attach the terminator ( 3 in Figure 4-16 on page 4-15) to the remaining
| SCSI connector on the back panel of the library, if the library is the last or
| only device on the SCSI bus. Otherwise, attach one end of a SCSI cable to the
| remaining port and the other end to the next device on the SCSI bus. Make
| sure that the last device on the SCSI bus is properly terminated.

| Note: Only cables and terminators specified for Ultra160 or Ultra320 use or
| labeled as Multi Mode should be used.

| Note: The host bus adapter should be LVD SCSI. A single-ended (SE) SCSI
| host bus adapter will work, but will severely degrade performance,
| and limit cable length. If there are any SE devices on the same SCSI
| bus, the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE speed and severely
| degrade performance.
| v For a Fibre Channel library, connect the host interface cable to the host or to
| a switch. If an SC-to-LC interposer is required, refer to “Installing a Fibre
| Channel Interposer (Feature Code 5096)” on page 4-17.

4-16 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| v For a SAS library, connect the Host Interface Cable to the host HBA, using a
| direct SFF-8088 connection, or an interposer as required. Unused SAS
| connectors do not need termination.
| 4. Plug the network ethernet cable 2 in Figure 4-16 on page 4-15, Figure 4-17 on
| page 4-16), or 3 in Figure 4-18 on page 4-16 into the ethernet port on the back
| panel of the library. If the ethernet connection is directly attached to a server or
| laptop, a crossover ethernet cable may be required.

| Note: It is the customer's responsibility to supply the crossover cable if one is

| required.

| Installing a Fibre Channel Interposer (Feature Code 5096)

| For a list of supported adapters and required interposers, go to the Technical
| Support section on the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.

| To install the interposer, refer to the procedure below.

|

Host
Fibre
Channel
Network

11P1373

Library
Fibre
Channel

a67m0276
Drive
Connector

Figure 4-19. Interposer installation

| 1. Connect the host SC fibre cable to the matching side of the interposer.
| 2. Connect the drive LC fibre side of the interposer to the drive/library.

| Connecting a Power Cord

| Attention: This product can ONLY be used with an approved power cord for
| your specific geographic region. Use of an unapproved power cord may result in:
| v not meeting individual country specific safety requirements;
| v overheating with potential personal injury and/or property damage; and
| v a fracture resulting in the internal contacts being exposed, which potentially
| could subject the user to a shock hazard.

| For every power supply in the library, complete the following steps.
| 1. Remove the protective label from the power receptacle on your library.
|

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-17

 a77ug197
Figure 4-20. Removing the protective label from the power receptacle

| 2. Plug one end of the power cord (6 in “Connecting the Host Interface Cable”
| on page 4-15) into each power supply connector on the back panel of the
| library.
| 3. Plug the other end of each power cord into the nearest properly grounded
| power outlet. Use separate power sources for each power supply for redundant
| power.
| Attention: To disconnect all power from the library, remove the power cord
| from each outlet. The power button removes power from portions of the library
| and the drives, but the power supplies still have AC power at their inputs.
| 4. Remove the protective plastic on the exterior surfaces of the library.
| 5. Turn ON the library using the power button. Check the Operator Control Panel
| display to make sure the library is receiving power. If it is not, check the power
| connections and your power source. During the Power-On Self Test (POST), all
| four LEDs are illuminated briefly, followed by a flashing Ready LED. When the
| initialization sequence is complete, the Home screen (see “Power-ON Display”
| on page 2-2) will be displayed.
|
| Configuring Your Library
| Note: Review the information in "Installation Planning" before configuring your
| library.

| The library can be configured using the Operator Control Panel and/or the Web
| User Interface. The recommended method for configuring your library is using the
| Web User Interface.

| For complete detailed configuration information on all of the functions available on

| your library using both the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface, see
| Chapter 5, “Operations,” on page 5-1. For default library settings, see “Configure:
| Save/Restore” on page 5-27

| Choosing Your Configuration Method

| If you choose to use the factory defaults for your library configuration, go to
| “Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration” on page 4-19.

| If you choose to use the Web User Interface for configuring your library, go to
| “Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface” on page 4-19.

| If you choose to use the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library, go to
| “Configuring Your Library using the Operator Control Panel” on page 4-36.

4-18 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| Write down all library configuration settings on the Appendix G, “Library
| Configuration Form,” on page G-1 for future reference.

| Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration

| The table below shows the main default library settings. If you wish to use the
| defaults, no other changes need to be made before using your library
|| Item Default Setting
| Logical Libraries 1
| Active Slots Maximum
| I/O Slots Enabled
| DHCP Enabled
| Internet Protocol IPv4 Only
| Bar Code Label Length 8
| Library Mode Random
| AutoClean Disabled
| Encryption None
| IPv6 Stateless Autoconfig Enabled
|

| For a full list of factory defaults, see “Configure: Save/Restore” on page 5-27.

| Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface

| To configure your library using the Web User Interface, complete the following
| procedures:
| 1. “Establishing Remote Access to Your Library” on page 4-20
| 2. “Logging on to the Web User Interface” on page 4-21
| 3. “Verifying/Updating Firmware” on page 4-22
| 4. “Choosing General Library Settings” on page 4-23
| 5. “Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library” on page 4-25
| 6. “Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key” on page 4-26
| 7. “Setting Up Encryption” on page 4-27
| 8. “Choosing Drive(s) Interface Identification/Settings” on page 4-29
| 9. “Entering Library Network Settings” on page 4-30
| 10. “Entering User Access Information using the Web User Interface” on page
| 4-32
| 11. “Entering Date and Time using the Web User Interface” on page 4-33
| 12. “Configuring Logs and Traces using the Web User Interface” on page 4-33
| 13. “Entering Email Notification Information using the Web User Interface” on
| page 4-34
| 14. “Configuring SNMP Settings” on page 4-35
| 15. “Testing Encryption Configuration for Library Managed Encryption” on page
| 4-36
| 16. “Restoring Factory Default Settings using the Web User Interface” on page
| 4-36
| 17. “Logging out of the Web User Interface” on page 2-8

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-19

| 18. “Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Control
| Panel” on page 5-26

| Establishing Remote Access to Your Library

| Static library network settings must be entered using the Operator Control Panel
| before the library can be accessed remotely using the Web User Interface. If your
| system is serviced by DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server, the
| network parameters will be automatically set. Once remote access has been
| established, you can complete the configuration of your library using the Web User
| Interface.
| 1. Access the Configure menu using the Operator Control Panel.
| a. From the screen that shows the library logo (Home screen), press either the
| UP or DOWN button to get to the Main Menu.
| b. Press the DOWN button to select Configure.
| c. Press the SELECT button to display the Configure menu.
| 2. Press the DOWN button to highlight the Network menu.
| 3. Press the SELECT button to display the Network screen.
| 4. Select IP STACK, and press the SELECT button to highlight the Internet
| Protocol field.
| a. Press the DOWN or UP button to scroll through the Internet Protocol
| options.
| b. Press the SELECT button on the desired Internet Protocol.
| If you select IPv6 protocol, the Configure Network menu will include options
| for Stateless Autoconfig and Prefix length.
| v Stateless Autoconfig:
| – Press the DOWN button to highlight Stateless Autoconfig.
| – Press the SELECT button to highlight the Stateless Autoconfig option
| field.
| – Press the DOWN button to scroll through the Stateless Autoconfig
| options.
| – Press the SELECT button to apply the option.
| v Prefix Length:
| – Press the DOWN button to highlight Prefix Length.
| – Press the SELECT button to highlight the Prefix Length option field.
| – Press the UP or DOWN buttons to scroll through the Prefix Length
| digits.
| – Press the SELECT button to apply the Prefix Length digits.
| 5. If you do not want to select DHCP as your library network setting, skip this
| step and proceed to the next step. If you want to select DHCP as your library
| network setting, complete the following steps:
| a. Press the DOWN button to highlight DHCP.
| b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the DHCP field.
| c. Press the DOWN button to select ON.
| d. Press the SELECT button to apply your selection.
| e. Skip to Step 7.
| 6. Press the DOWN button to select IP Address. For IPv4 only, enter only an
| IPv4 address. For IPv6 only, enter only an IPv6 address. For IPv4 & IPv6,
| enter an IPv4 address and an IPv6 address.

4-20 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the IP Address field.
| b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit(s) in the first octet of
| your library's IP Address.
| c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit(s)in the next octet of your
| IP Address.
| d. After entering the digits for the last octet, press the SELECT button to
| apply your entries.
| 7. Press the DOWN button to select Netmask. For IPv4, enter only an IPv4
| Netmask address. For IPv6, enter only an IPv6 Netmask address. For IPv4 &
| IPv6, enter both IPv4 and IPv6 Netmask addresses.
| a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Netmask field.
| b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit(s) in the first octet of
| your library's Netmask address.
| c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit(s) in the next octet of your
| library's Netmask address.
| d. After entering the digits for the last octet of your Netmask address, press
| the SELECT button to apply your entries.
| 8. Press the DOWN button to select Gateway. For IPv4, enter only an IPv4
| Gateway address. For IPv6, enter only an IPv6 Gateway address. For IPv4 &
| IPv6, enter a Gateway address for both IPv4 and IPv6.
| a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Gateway field.
| b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit(s) in the first octet of
| your library's Gateway address.
| c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit(s) in the next octet of your
| library's Gateway address.
| d. After entering the digits for the last octet in your Gateway address, press
| the SELECT button to apply your entries.
| 9. Press the DOWN button to select Ethernet.
| a. Press the DOWN button to highlight the Ethernet field.
| b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Ethernet setting.
| c. Press the DOWN button to select a new setting.
| d. Press the SELECT button to apply the new setting.
| 10. Press the DOWN button to highlight SAVE. Press the DOWN again to
| highlight CANCEL. Continue to press the DOWN button to switch between
| SAVE and CANCEL.
| v If SAVE is highlighted, press the SELECT button to apply your new
| configuration. If changes were made to the Network settings, a pop-up
| menu will display the option to reboot the library or cancel the reboot. If
| you select CANCEL in the pop-up menu, you will need to power cycle the
| library for the network changes to be applied.
| v If CANCEL is highlighted, press the SELECT button to cancel all of your
| entries and return to the Configure menu.

| Logging on to the Web User Interface

| To complete the configuration of your library using the Web User Interface, follow
| the steps below.
| 1. On your host computer, open an Internet browser.
| 2. In the browser address field, enter your library's IP Address.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-21

| a. For DHCP and/or Stateless Autoconfig, use the Operator Control Panel to
| determine the IP Address assigned to your library. Navigate to Monitor →
| Library → Network. Scroll down to the library address information and
| make note of the address. Enter the IP Address in your internet browser
| address field to access your library with the Web User Interface. The library
| address information may include one or more of the following address
| types:
| v IP Address (IPv4 static or DHCP)
| v Static IPv6 Address
| v Link Local IPv6 Address
| v Assigned IPv6 address (DHCP or Stateless Autoconfig)
| b. For IPv4, enter your library's IP Address using the 0.0.0.0 format (four
| octets).
| c. For IPv6, enter your library's IP Address using the following format:
| http://[0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0].
| d. For Dual Stack IPv4 + IPv6, enter your library's IP Address for either IPv4
| or IPv6.
| 3. When the login screen appears,
| a. Select admin for a User ID.
| b. Enter secure for a Password.
|

a77ug070

Figure 4-21. Log in screen on the Web User Interface

| Verifying/Updating Firmware
| It is important to run the latest level of firmware. To ensure that you are running
| the latest levels of library firmware, drive firmware, and SNMP MIB (Management
| Information Base) file, complete this procedure.
| 1. Verify the SNMP MIB file currently installed on your SNMP server. Verify the
| levels of library and drive firmware currently installed on your library by
| completing the following steps:
| a. Expand Monitor Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User
| Interface.
| b. Click Library Identity and make note of the Firmware revision.
| c. Click Drive Identity and make note of the Firmware revision.
| d. Log out of the Web User Interface.
| 2. Download the latest library firmware, drive firmware, and SNMP MIB
| (Management Information Base) file from the IBM web site.
| a. Enter http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/ in your internet browser
| address field and press Enter on your keyboard.

4-22 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| b. Select Tape Systems from the Product Family list, then select TS3100 Tape
| Library or TS3200 Tape Library from the Product list.
| c. Click the Download tab, then click Firmware.
| d. Click TS3100 Tape Library Firmware or TS3200 Tape Library Firmware.
| e. Compare the firmware level available on the web to those that you made
| note of in step 1. If you are running the latest levels of library and drive
| firmware, proceed to the next step. If you are not running the latest levels
| of library and drive firmware, download the firmware that needs to be
| updated to your library host.
| 3. Update library and drive firmware on your library, if necessary.
| a. Enter the IP Address of your library in your internet browser address field
| and press Enter on your keyboard.
| b. Log in to your library's Web User Interface.
| c. Expand Service Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User
| Interface.
| d. Click Upgrade Firmware.
| e. Browse to the new firmware level on your host, then click Update. Do this
| for both library and drive firmware, if necessary.
| 4. Install the MIB file on your SNMP server. Refer to your server application
| documentation for instructions.

| Choosing General Library Settings

| If your library contains only one drive or logical library, both general and specific
| settings will be combined into one table (see Figure 4-22 on page 4-24).
| 1. Expand Configure Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User
| Interface.
| 2. Click General and enter the following:
| v Library Name - Enter a name for your library.
| v Library Mode (select one of the following per logical library):
| – Random: In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's)
| application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
| – Sequential: In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the
| selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the
| library to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the I/O
| Station through the last slot in your library) for loading into the drive.

| Important: If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than

| one drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library will be
| utilized.
| - Autoload: Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first
| available cartridge (slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a
| cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive.
| - Loop: Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
| lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot
| has been filled and sent back to its home slot. This allows endless
| backup operations without user interaction.
| v Active Slots - Select the number of active slots you would like to assign in
| your library. This item will affect the number of Res. (Reserved) Slots in
| your library. For more information refer to “Configuring I/O Stations and
| Reserving Slots” on page 5-65.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-23

| Note: Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host. It may be
| necessary to reserve slots in order to match the number of available
| slots to the ISV software licensing. Slots will be reserved starting with
| the highest element address. If your library does not have a dedicated
| cleaning cartridge slot, and you desire to enable Auto Clean, you must
| designate a reserved slot which can be used to hold the cleaning
| cartridge.
| v I/O Station Enabled - If checked, the I/O Station is enabled. If not, the first 3
| slots (in a 4U library or the 1st slot in a 2U library) are configured as storage.
| See “Configure Library: General” on page 5-43.
| v Auto Clean Enabled - Automatically cleans drive when drive requests
| cleaning and cleaning cartridge is present in a reserved slot or a dedicated
| cleaning slot. All cleaning cartridges must have CLN as part of the bar code.
| The Universal Cleaning Cartridge has the bar code label CLNUxxLx.
| v Bar Code Label Length Reported to Host - Choose between 6 and 8. With 6,
| the first six characters of the cartridge VOLSER (Volume Serial Numbers)
| will be reported to the host. With 8, All characters in the VOLSER (first six
| characters plus the two character media type identifier) will be reported to
| the host. For more information on bar code labels, see “Bar Code Label” on
| page 6-5.
| v Click one of the following:
| – Refresh - Click this button to update the current screen.
| – Apply Selections - Click this button to submit the changes made to the
| screen.
|

Figure 4-22. The 2U library Configure Library: General screen

4-24 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Figure 4-23. Example: The 4U library Configure Library: General screen

| 3. If your library has more than one drive, proceed to “Choosing the Number of
| Logical Libraries for Your Library.” If your library has one drive, proceed to
| “Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key” on page 4-26.

| Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library

| Note: Review the information in “Determining the Number of Logical Libraries”
| on page 3-1 before completing the procedure in this section.

| If you have a 2U or 4U library with only one drive, or do not wish to partition
| your library, proceed to the next section, “Entering Path Failover Feature
| Activation Key” on page 4-26.

| One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries. If you partition
| a multi-drive library, each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library
| on a magazine boundary. The entire magazine must be part of one logical library
| only.

| Note: If you have a 2U library with two drives, you have the capability to have
| two logical libraries.

| In a fully populated 4U library with four half high drives and four logical libraries,
| resource assignments will be as follows:
| v Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazine.
| v Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazine.
| v Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine.
| v Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine.

| Note: For more information about various configurations, see “Library

| Partitioning and Element Addressing” on page 3-3.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-25

| The I/O Station and slots reserved for cleaning cartridges, if any, are shared among
| all logical libraries.
| 1. Click Configure Library → Logical Libraries in the left navigation pane.
|

a77ug098
Figure 4-24. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical Libraries page

| 2. Select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in your library.
| 3. Click Submit to create the logical libraries.

| Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key

| Path Failover is a combination of two previous features: Control Path Failover (key
| entered at the library user interface) and Data Path Failover (key entered at the
| device driver interface).
| 1. Click Configure Library → Path Failover in the left navigation pane.
|

a77ug117
Figure 4-25. The Configure Library: Path Failover Feature Activation screen

| 2. Enter the Control Path Failover 12-digit feature key in the spaces provided.

| Note: A single activation key (available by purchasing Feature Code 1682)

| entered at the library user interface now activates both features unless
| the LTO-3 drive firmware level is equal to or lower than 73P5 and/or the
| library firmware is equal to or lower than 1.95. For either or both of
| these two cases, the device driver interface Data Path Failover key
| activation will still be required.
| 3. Click Activate to save the feature key. The following screen will display if you
| have correctly entered the feature key.
|

Figure 4-26. Feature Key verification screen

4-26 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| Setting Up Encryption
| Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a key. Library
| Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME) require
| a license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5900.

| Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption:

| v SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive (Full High or Half High)
| v Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge
| v Library firmware level 4.0 or higher
| v Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher
| v Encryption Key Manager application

| Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption and System Managed

| Encryption:
v Feature Code 5900 (Transparent LTO Encryption)
v SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive (Full High or Half High)
v Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge
v Library firmware level 4.0 or higher
v Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher
v Encryption Key Manager application

Setting a Drive's Method of Encryption

1. Click Configure Library → Encryption in the left navigation pane.

a77ug199

Figure 4-27. Feature Activation Key screen

2. On the Encryption screen, enter the Feature Activation Key to make available
the library managed and the system managed encryption options.
3. Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption
settings.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-27

Figure 4-28. Configure Library: Encryption Activation screen

4. Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the Encryption
Key Manager application.
5. Select an Encryption method for each logical library.
v Without an encryption license key, select None or Application Managed
Encryption.
v With an encryption license key, select Library Managed Encryption or
System Managed Encryption.
6. Select an Encryption policy for each logical library.
v Encrypt All: This is the default policy. It encrypts all cartridges using the
default data keys specified in the EKM. This setting applies to all drives in
a 3573 logical library.
v Internal Label - Selective Encryption: This policy is based on the internal
volume label information. Currently, the only application that supports this
option is Symantec NetBackup. It only encrypts cartridges with pool
identifiers between 1500 and 9999 (inclusive), using keys specific to each
pool. Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive based on the
pool identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_1505 would be generated for
a cartridge in pool 1505.
v Internal Label - Encrypt All: This policy is based on the internal volume
label information. Currently, the only application that supports this option
is Symantec NetBackup. It encrypts all cartridges. Cartridges with pool
identifiers between 2000 and 65535 (inclusive) are encrypted with keys
specific to each pool. Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive
based on the pool identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_2505 would be
generated for a cartridge in pool 2505.
7. A primary and secondary EKM server can be set for each logical library. Each
partition has its own Encryption and EKM settings. Maintaining primary and

4-28 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 secondary EKM servers is desired for maximum availability of encrypted
backup and recovery. These settings are required for Library Managed
Encryption only. Enter the EKM Server Setting information.
v Primary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the primary
EKM server.
v Primary TCP port: After entering the Primary IP address, the library will
automatically set the value of the Primary TCP port.
v Secondary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the secondary
EKM server.
v Secondary TCP port: After entering the Secondary IP address, the library
will automatically set the value of the Secondary TCP port.

Note: The Default Port for TCP (SSL disabled) is 3801. The Default Port for
SSL is 443. These values are the default values set by the library.
They can be changed depending on the user configuration but the
user has to make sure they match the EKM properties file.

Important: The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering

| Support only. Ensure the Advanced Encryption Settings fields
| are set to their default value of "No Advanced Setting".
8. Click Activate to apply the changes.
9. Record the Feature Activation Key (or apply one of the labels) on the
Appendix G, “Library Configuration Form,” on page G-1 for future reference.
It is important to save your extra Feature Activation Key labels in a secure
location for future reference.
10. Install the Encryption Key Manager (EKM) application on your host. Refer to
the EKM documentation for detailed instructions (refer to the EKM documents
listed in "Related Publications").

Choosing Drive(s) Interface Identification/Settings

1. Click Configure Library → Drives in the left navigation pane.

Topology

FC-AL Loop ID
a77ug095

Figure 4-29. The Configure Library: Drive screen

2. Select the desired settings for each drive listed (either SCSI, SAS, or Fibre
Channel). See Figure 4-29.
3. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to update the current screen

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-29

 v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen

Note: If you have a Fiber Channel Drive connected to an AS/400 Host, direct
attached to the Fiber HBA, set the Port Type to L-Port.

Entering Library Network Settings

This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a pop-up box
confirms the request.
1. Click Configure Library → Network in the left navigation pane, to display the
Network page.

a77ug074

Figure 4-30. Configure Library: Network Page

Important: Do not click the Submit button until all changes have been made
to the Network page. Once the Submit button has been clicked, no
other changes can be made until after the library has applied the
current changes.

After the Submit button has been clicked, depending on the

changes made, you will either be disconnected and need to login
again or reboot the library.

Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the page and any changes
made will not be retained.

4-30 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2. Select a Protocol Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or Dual Stack IPv4 &
IPv6.
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both
IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses. The sections below will gray out depending on
the choices made here.
3. Enter the Host Name.
4. Enter the Domain Name.
5. DNS Primary - Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server.
6. DNS Secondary - Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server.
7. Enable SSL for Web - If you desire to have SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
enabled, place a check in this box.

Note: If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User
Interface, you can install the certificate or allow an exception
(depending on the internet browser you are using). SSL is enabled
when the URL begins with https:// and some browsers will show a
lock.
8. Ethernet Settings - Ethernet Settings choices are: Auto (the default), 10
Mbit/Half, 10 Mbit/Full, 100 Mbit/Half, 100 Mbit/Full.
9. Enter IPv4 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library
automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv4 address. The format of an IPv4 IP
address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by
periods.
c. Network Mask - Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask.
d. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address. This address
allows access outside the local network.
10. Enter IPv6 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library
automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Enable Stateless Auto Config - Click this item ON to have the IP Address
of your library automatically set by the network router.
c. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv6 address. The format of an IPv6 IP
address is a 128-bit numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers
separated by colons.
d. Prefix length - The default prefix length is set to 64, but can be set to any
length, depending upon the address used.
e. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address. This address
allows access outside the local network.
11. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Note: Depending on the changes made, you will either be disconnected and
need to login again, or reboot the library. If a reboot is required, the
following Warning message will appear after the Submit button is
clicked.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-31

Figure 4-31. Warning Screen

The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place.

Entering User Access Information using the Web User Interface

The Configure Library → User Access page is only accessible to the Admin and
Service login. Access is denied to User and Superuser logins.

The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library →
Advance Diagnostics.

The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library →
Advance Diagnostics.
1. Click Configure Library → User Access in the left navigation pane.

Figure 4-32. The Configure Library: User Access screen

2. Check the Disable Superuser checkbox to disable the Superuser role for this
library. Check the Disable User checkbox to disable the User role for this
library. Uncheck these boxes to allow these roles access to your library.
3. Choose a Role.

Note: Admin can select User, Superuser, and Admin roles. Service can select
User, Superuser, Admin, and Service roles.
v User (if enabled)
v Superuser (if enabled)
v Admin
v Service

Note: Only one password can be set for each Role.

4. Enter the New Password (up to 10 alphanumeric characters).
5. In Repeat Password, enter the new password again.
6. In Support Name, enter the name of the person that will be able to offer the
user help with the library.

4-32 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Note: Only one support person can be configured for the entire tape library.
The support person may or may not be one of the user, superuser, or
admin account holders.
7. In Support Phone, enter the phone number of the person that will be able to
offer the user help with the library.
8. In Support Email, enter the email address of the person that will be able to
offer the user help with the library.
9. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to update the current screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Entering Date and Time using the Web User Interface

1. Click Configure Library → Date & Time in the left navigation pane.

a77ug061
Figure 4-33. The Configure Library: Date and Time screen

2. Enter the current Time using the HH:MM:SS 24-hour format.

3. Enter the current Date using the MMDDYYYY format.
4. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configuring Logs and Traces using the Web User Interface

This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel.
1. Click Configure Library → Logs & Traces in the left navigation pane.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-33

Figure 4-34. The Configure Library: Logs and Traces screen

2. For Error Log Mode, select Continuous so all information for logs and traces
will be captured.
3. Trace Level and Trace Filter options can be changed by Service personnel only.
4. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Entering Email Notification Information using the Web User

Interface
This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel.

Use this menu item to set up email notification of library errors and warnings.
1. Click Configure Library → Email Notification in the left navigation pane.
a77ug065

Figure 4-35. The Configure Library: Email Notification screen

2. If you would like to be notified when an error occurs, select Notify Errors.
3. If you would like to be notified when a warning occurs, select Notify
Warnings.
4. In To Email Address, enter the email address to which the information will be
sent.

4-34 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 5. In SMTP Server Address (IPv4 or IPv6), enter the IP Address of the SMTP
server associated with the email address.
6. Enter the Domain Name for your library. This field cannot be blank when
using event notification.

Note: If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name, a warning
message will appear. It will say If you are using Event Notification then
a value is required for the Domain Name.
7. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configuring SNMP Settings

This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a pop-up box
checks to confirm the changes.
1. Click SNMP in the left navigation pane, to display the SNMP page.

a77ug278
Figure 4-36. Configure Library: SNMP Page

2. Enter SNMP settings.

Note: For more information on SNMP, refer to “SNMP Messaging” on page 1-6
and Appendix F, “SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps,” on page F-1.
a. Enabled - Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to a SNMP Management
console(s).
b. Target 1-IP Address - If SNMP traps are enabled, enter an IP address where
SNMP traps are to be sent.
c. Target 2-IP Address - Enter an optional 2nd IP address where SNMP traps
are to be sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
d. Target 3-IP Address - Enter an optional 3rd IP address where SNMP traps
are to be sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
e. Version - The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol; v1, v2 and
v3. Select a version for each Target IP Address.
f. Community Name - An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as
a password to authenticate messages sent between the SNMP remote
management application and the library. Enter your preferred name, or leave
as “public”.
| g. Audit Logging - If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled, the
| library will send SNMP traps to an SNMP Management console(s) when the
| library or tape drive configuration has changed.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-35

| Note: This option is only available if the library firmware is 9.00 or higher,
| and the latest library MIB file has been added to the SNMP
| Management console.
3. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Testing Encryption Configuration for Library Managed

Encryption
If you have purchased an encryption activation key (Feature Code 5900:
Transparent LTO Encryption) and any LTO 4 Fibre Channel or SAS drives in your
library are configured for library managed encryption, run the Key Path Diagnostic
to ensure that your encryption configuration is correct.

Important: Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before
running the Key Path Diagnostic. Library firmware level must be
greater than 6.xx. See “Verifying/Updating Firmware” on page 4-22.

For information on running the diagnostic, refer to “Service Library: Key Path
Diagnostics” on page 5-61.

Restoring Factory Default Settings using the Web User Interface

If you would like to erase your current configuration and restore factory default
settings, do so by selecting Restore Factory Defaults in the Configure Library →
Save/Restore menu. See “Configure Library: Save/Restore” on page 5-56.

The factory default settings are listed in Table 5-4 on page 5-27.

Logging out of the Web User Interface

To log out of the Web User Interface, click Logout in the upper right corner of the
current screen.

Important: If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser
window, you will not log out of the Web User Interface.

Configuring Your Library using the Operator Control Panel

If you choose to use the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library, go to
“Configure Menu” on page 5-18 for information on configuring the following
items:
v Logical Libraries
v Library Settings
v Drive(s)
v Network
v Set Access PIN
v Set Date and Time
v Path Failover

To complete the configuration of your library, the following items will have to be
accessed from the Web User Interface:
v Encryption (see “Configure Library: Encryption” on page 5-46)
v User Access Information (see “Configure Library: User Access” on page 5-52)

4-36 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v Logs and Traces (see “Configure Library: Logs & Traces” on page 5-54)
v Event Notification Information (see “Configure Library: Email Notification” on
page 5-55)
v Key Path Diagnostic (see “Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics” on page 5-61)
v Updating Firmware (see “Service Library: Upgrade Firmware” on page 5-62)

Preparing the Host

Follow these general guidelines:
1. Make sure that your backup application supports the SCSI, SAS, or Fibre
Channel host bus adapter (HBA).
2. If the host server is connected to a network, check with the system
administrator before turning host power OFF.
3. Install a suitably rated HBA. Remember that if there are any single-ended (SE)
devices on the same SCSI bus, the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE
speed and severely degrade performance and limit cable length.
4. Make sure that LUN scanning is enabled on the SCSI host adapter.
5. Make sure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the Fibre Channel
HBA if installing a library with a Fibre Channel drive.
6. Make sure that SAS support is enabled on the SAS HBA if installing a library
with a SAS drive.

Verifying the Connection

1. Depending on the server configuration, you may need to change the SCSI ID,
SAS, or Fibre Channel Loop ID of the library, if the current ID is the same as
another device on the bus.
2. When the host server is powered ON, install the software and/or driver(s) that
are compatible with the library. Backup software packages may require
additional software or licensing to communicate with the library accessor.
3. If this is a SCSI attachment, ensure the library is properly terminated. If the
library is the only SCSI device, other than the SCSI host adapter on the selected
SCSI bus, it must be terminated. Likewise, if the library is physically the last
SCSI device on the SCSI bus, it must be terminated. Only the devices physically
located at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus should be terminated.
4. Confirm that the host server operating system recognized the library. In
Microsoft® Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or in Windows 2000 you can
verify this by going to: Settings → Control Panel → System → Hardware →
Device Manager → Tape Drive and/or Medium Changer .

For more information on verifying the connection of SCSI devices, consult the
operating system documentation.

Cartridge Magazines
The library has removable magazines. Magazine access is password protected. For
safety reasons, the accessor motion is stopped when a magazine is removed.

The magazines can be released using the Operator Control Panel or the Web User
Interface. In case the Operator Control Panel or Web User Interface initiated
process has failed or the library no longer has power, a manual emergency release
is available.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-37

 Important: To manually release a magazine, see “Releasing the Magazines
Manually” on page 9-1. This manual process should only be used if the
magazine cannot be released using the Operator Control Panel or the
Web User Interface.

2U Library Cartridge Magazines

The 2U library has two cartridge magazines. The left cartridge magazine (see
Figure 4-37) has eleven storage slots and houses the elective 1-slot I/O Station. The
right magazine (see Figure 4-38 on page 4-39) has twelve storage slots. For
information about Element Addressing, see “2U Library I/O Slot, Storage Slots and
Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations” on page B-1.

Note: On some 2U Libraries prior to Library Microcode Level 1.9, slot 11 may be
labelled a "Not Used" slot which contained a "Slot Blocker". With Library
Microcode level 1.9 or higher, there is an option to remove the "Slot Blocker"
and place that slot into use. See “Removing the Slot Blocker - 2U Library”
on page 10-10.

a77ug020

Figure 4-37. 2U library left magazine

4-38 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug021
Figure 4-38. 2U library right magazine

2U Library I/O Station

The I/O (Input/Output) Station (see Figure 4-39) in a 2U library is part of the left
magazine. To open the I/O Station, select Control → Open I/O Station. The I/O
Station will pop open. To close the I/O Station, gently push it back into the left
magazine.

a77ug022

Figure 4-39. 2U library I/O Station in the left magazine

4U Library Cartridge Magazines

The 4U library has four cartridge magazines, two on each side (see Figure 4-40 on
page 4-40 and Figure 4-41 on page 4-40). The upper left magazine has twelve

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-39

 storage slots. The lower left magazine has nine storage slots and houses the
elective 3-slot I/O Station (1 in Figure 4-40). The upper right magazine has
twelve storage slots. The lower right magazine has twelve storage slots. For
information on Element Addressing, see “4U Library I/O Slots, Storage Slots, and
Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations” on page B-2.

a77ug105
Figure 4-40. 4U library left magazines

a77ug106
Figure 4-41. 4U library right magazines

4U Library I/O Station

The I/O Station in a 4U library (see Figure 4-42 on page 4-41) is part of the lower
left magazine. To open the I/O Station, select Control → Open I/O Station. The
I/O Station will pop open. To close the I/O Station, gently push it back into the
lower left magazine.

4-40 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug103
Figure 4-42. 4U library I/O Station in the lower left magazine

There are finger holes on the back side of the I/O Station (see 1 in Figure 4-43)
that allow the user to push the cartridges out of the I/O station.

a77ug104

Figure 4-43. Finger Holes on back side of 4U Library I/O Station

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-41

 Populating the Library with Data Cartridges
Important: Cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar
code labels. For additional information, see Chapter 6, “Using Ultrium
Media,” on page 6-1.

For information on working with the cartridge magazines, see “Cartridge

Magazines” on page 4-37.
1. Properly label the data cartridges. Refer to Chapter 6, “Using Ultrium Media,”
on page 6-1.
2. Unlock the cartridge magazines.
v Using the Operator Control Panel: Control → Magazines select Left or Right.
v Using the Web User Interface: Manage Library → Release Magazine select
Left or Right.

Note: The magazines will relock after 15 seconds if they have not been
removed.
3. Remove the selected magazines from the library.
4. Insert cartridges in the magazine(s). Do not store cartridges in the I/O Station
or in the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot. See “2U Library I/O Slot, Storage
Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations” on page B-1 or
“4U Library I/O Slots, Storage Slots, and Drive Slots Element Addresses and
Physical Locations” on page B-2 for determining slot location.
5. Put magazines back into the library. The library will automatically start up and
perform an inventory check.

Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge

Important: Cleaning cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the
correct bar code labels. For additional information, see Chapter 6,
“Using Ultrium Media,” on page 6-1.

Note: Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot

(DCS). This DCS can be retained and is supported by future library
firmware updates. However, library firmware later than 1.95 will allow
removal of the DCS, thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot.
Once the DCS is removed, the Auto Clean cleaning cartridge slot must be
configured as described below. If the DCS has been removed, it can only be
reinstated by restoring factory default settings. To remove the DCS, perform
the following procedure using the Operator Control Panel (OCP):
OCP->Configure->Library Settings->General->Remove
DCS->No/Yes->Save.
The following criteria must be followed for Auto Clean to function:
1. A storage slot must be reserved (Res or RSVD).
v Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any
particular logical library. A reserved slot (or slots) is always the last slot in
the last magazine of any particular logical library. A cleaning cartridge that is
in a reserved slot is available to any logical library drive even if the reserved
slot is not in that particular logical library. If the library contains multiple
logical libraries, typically, the last logical library is chosen to be the reserved
slot containing the cleaning cartridge. As with a library with a single logical
library, this slot is the last physical slot in the library (top right magazine,
uppermost rear slot).

4-42 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2. The Auto Clean function must be Enabled.
v Operator Control Panel: Configure->Library Settings->Auto Clean: Enabled
v Web User Interface: Configure Library->General->Auto Clean
Enabled->check box

Note: Enabling Auto Clean without first reserving a slot for the cleaning
cartridge will result in the library System Status screen (web UI)
reporting the following attention conditions:
v Media Attention
v Chk Media/Rsvd Slot
3. To install a cleaning cartridge in the 2U or 4U library:
a. Properly label the cleaning cartridge (CLNxxxLx). Refer to Chapter 6,
“Using Ultrium Media,” on page 6-1.
b. Place the cleaning cartridge in the library using the same procedure
described in “Populating the Library with Data Cartridges” on page 4-42.
Ensure the cleaning cartridge is placed in a reserved slot or the DCS (if one
exists, 4U only).
c. If the cleaning cartridge is not in a reserved slot, use the Operator Control
Panel: Control → Move Cartridge or the Web User Interface: Manage
Library → Move Media to move the cleaning cartridge into the reserved slot
or the DCS (if one exists, 4U only).
4. Replace the cleaning cartridge, if needed.
v A cleaning cartridge must be replaced after 50 uses. To determine the
number of cleaning uses remaining, click on the Web User Interface, Monitor
Library->Inventory .
v Click on the (+) located under that magazine presentation to expand the
detail of resident cartridges.
v Cleaning cartridges are labeled as CLNxxxLx. Observe the information
displayed for the slots containing a cleaning cartridge. The number of Media
Loads represent how many times the cleaning cartridge has been used. The
number 50, minus that Media Load number represents the number of uses
remaining.

Registering for My Notification

My Notification registration provides email notification when firmware levels have
been updated and are available for download and installation.

To register for My Notification:

1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/us/.
2. Click Get Support.
3. Click My support.

Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released
together. When updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed
components such as tape drive(s), and library are at the latest levels
noted on the Support web site. Mixing different levels of library and tape
drive firmware is not supported and may cause unpredictable results.

Chapter 4. Installation and Configuration 4-43

4-44 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Operations
The following table lists menu navigation shortcuts to activities that can be
performed via the Operator Control Panel and/or the Web User Interface.

Before using the Operator Control Panel or the Web user Interface, please review
the information in Chapter 3: User Interfaces.
Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Accessor, number Monitor → Library → Status → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
of cartridge Cycles Library” on Status Library Status” on
moves page 5-10 page 5-36
Auto Clean, Configure → Library Settings → “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
enable Auto Clean Library” on General Library: General”
page 5-20 on page 5-43
Cartridge, Monitor → Library → Status → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
currently Act. Cart Library” on Status Library Status” on
active/moving page 5-10 page 5-36
Cartridge, Not available with this interface Monitor Library → “Monitor Library:
determine Inventory Inventory” on
encryption page 5-39
Cartridge, Monitor → Inventory → “Monitor: Manage Library → Perform “Manage Library:
Inventory Magazines Inventory” on Inventory Perform
page 5-14 Inventory” on
page 5-42
Cartridge, Move Control → Move Cartridges “Control: Manage Library → Move “Manage Library:
Move Media Move Media” on
Cartridges” on page 5-41
page 5-16
Cartridge Monitor → Inventory → Drive “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
currently in drive (n) Inventory” on Status Drive Status” on
(n), Cartridge page 5-14 page 5-37
label and slot
source
Cartridge in Monitor → Drive → Status → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
drive (n), Drive (n) Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
cartridge slot page 5-12 page 5-37
source
Configuration, Configure → Save/Restore “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
save and restore* Save/Restore” Save/Restore Library:
on page 5-27 Save/Restore” on
page 5-56
* Note: From this location, you can not only save and restore your library configuration, but you
can also restore factory defaults.
Control path, Configure → Drive → Control “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
enable Path Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 5-23 on page 5-48

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 5-1

Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Date and time, Monitor → Library → Status → “Monitor: Current date and time “System Status”
current setting Date/Time Library” on displayed in System Status on page 2-6
page 5-10 screen.
Date and time, Configure → Set Date and Time “Configure: Configure Library → Date “Configure
set Set Date and & Time Library: Date &
Time” on page Time” on page
5-29 5-54
Dedicated Configure → Library Settings “Configure: Not available with this
Cleaning slot, Library” on interface
removing, page 5-20
reinstating
Note: Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS) only available on earlier versions of the 4U library. Refer to
“Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge” on page 4-42.
DHCP, current Monitor → Library → Network → “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
status DHCP Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-24 on page 5-50
DHCP, modify Configure → Network → DHCP “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-24 on page 5-50
Diagnostics, run Service → Service → Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive Head test Tests” on page interface
5-30
Diagnostics, run Service → Service → Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive Media test Tests” on page interface
5-30
Diagnostics, run Service → Service → Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive Normal Tests” on page interface
Read/Write test 5-30
Diagnostics, run Service → Service → Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive POST Tests” on page interface
5-30
Diagnostics, run Service → Service → Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive wrap test Tests” on page interface
5-30
Diagnostics, run Not available with this interface Service Library → Key “Service Library:
Key Path Path Diagnostics Key Path
diagnostics Diagnostics” on
page 5-61
Diagnostics, run Service → Library Verify “Service: Not available with this
Library Verify Library interface.
test Verify” on
page 5-30
Diagnostics, run Service → Run Tests “Service: Run Service Library → Perform “Service Library:
Slot to Slot test Tests” on page Diagnostics Perform
5-30 Diagnostics” on
page 5-60
Diagnostics, run Service → Run Tests “Service: Run Service Library → Perform “Service Library:
System Test Tests” on page Diagnostics Perform
5-30 Diagnostics” on
page 5-60

5-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Display Contrast Service → Display Contrast “Service: Not available with this
Display interface.
Contrast” on
page 5-31
DNS, modify Not available with this Configure Library → “Configure
settings interface. Network Library: Network”
on page 5-50
Drive, change Configure → Drive → Drive “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
interface Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
configuration page 5-23 on page 5-48
Drive, change Configure → Drive → Drive “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
SCSI/Loop ID Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 5-23 on page 5-48
Drive, clean Service → Service → Clean “Service: Service Library → Clean “Service Library:
Drive Service Drive Clean Drive” on
(Drives)” on page 5-57
page 5-31
Drive, current Monitor → Drive → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
SCSI/Loop ID Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 5-12 page 5-34
Drive, current Monitor → Drive → Status “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
status Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 5-12 page 5-37
Drive, data Not available with this Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
compression interface. Identity → Data Drive Identity” on
status Compression page 5-34
Drive, Fibre, Monitor → Drive → Identity → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
Worldwide Node Drive (n)/WWNN Drive” on Identity Drive Status” on
Name page 5-12 page 5-37
Drive, Hashed Not available with this Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
SAS Address interface. Status Drive Status” on
page 5-37
Drive, Interface Configure → Drive → Drive “Configure: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
type Interface Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 5-23 page 5-34
Drive, SCSI Monitor → Drive → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
Inquiry string Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 5-12 page 5-34
Drive, turn Service → Service → Drive “Service: Configure Library → Drive “Configure
power ON/OFF Power Service Library: Drives”
(Drives)” on on page 5-48
page 5-31
Drive activity, Monitor → Drive → Status → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
current Drive (n)/Activity Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 5-12 page 5-37
Drive fan, status Not available with this interface Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
Status Drive Status” on
page 5-37

Chapter 5. Operations 5-3

Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Drive Dump, Not available with this Service Library → Save “Service Library:
save interface. Drive Dump Save Drive
Dump” on page
5-60
Encryption, Not available with this Configure Library → “Configure
activate interface. Encryption Library:
Encryption” on
page 5-46
Encryption, Not available with this Configure Library → “Configure
configure interface. Encryption Library:
Encryption” on
page 5-46
Encryption, Not available with this Service Library → Key “Service Library:
testing interface. Path Diagnostics Key Path
configuration Diagnostics” on
page 5-61
Encryption, Not available with this Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
determine interface. Status Drive Status” on
method, current page 5-37
method
Ethernet settings Monitor → Library → Network “Monitor: Configure Library → “Configure
Library” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-10 on page 5-50
Email Not available with this Configure Library → Email “Configure
notifications: add, interface. Notification Library: Email
modify, and Notification” on
delete page 5-55
Error log, view Monitor → Library → Error log “Monitor: Service Library → View “Service Library:
Library” on logs View Logs” on
page 5-10 page 5-58
Error logs and Not available with this interface Configure Library → Logs “Configure
traces, set mode & Traces Library: Logs &
Traces” on page
5-54
Factory Default Configure → Save/Restore “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
settings, restore Save/Restore” Save/Restore Library:
on page 5-27 Save/Restore” on
page 5-56
Fibre Channel, Monitor → Drive → Status → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
speed Drive (n) Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 5-12 page 5-37
Fibre Channel Configure → Drives → Drive “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
speed, change Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 5-23 on page 5-48
Fibre Channel, Monitor → Drive → Status → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
topology Drive (n) Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 5-12 page 5-37
Fibre Channel Configure → Drives → Drive “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
topology, change Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 5-23 on page 5-48

5-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Fibre Channel Monitor → Drive → Status → “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
link, status Drive (n)/Link Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 5-12 page 5-37
Firmware, drive, Monitor → Drive → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
current level Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 5-12 page 5-34
Firmware, library, Monitor → Library → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
identify current Library” on Identity Library Identity”
level page 5-10 on page 5-33
Firmware, library Not available with this Service Library → Upgrade “Service Library:
or drive update interface. Firmware Upgrade
Firmware” on
page 5-62
Gateway, current Monitor → Library → Network → “Monitor: Configure Library → “Configure
address Gateway Library” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-10 on page 5-50
Gateway Configure → Network → “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
Address, modify Gateway Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-24 on page 5-50
Inventory, Control → Re-Inventory “Control: Manage Library → Perform “Manage Library:
perform Re-Inventory” Inventory Perform
on page 5-18 Inventory” on
page 5-42
I/O Station, Configure → Library Settings → “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
configuring I/O Station Library” on General Library: General”
page 5-20 on page 5-43
I/O Station, Monitor → Library → Status “Monitor: System Status screen
current status Library” on
page 5-10
I/O Station, open Control → Open I/O Station “Control: Not available with this
Open I/O interface
Station” on
page 5-16
IP Address, Monitor → Library → Network “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
current Library” on Identity Library Identity”
page 5-10 on page 5-33
IP Address, Configure → Network → IP “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
modify Address Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-24 on page 5-50
Library, current Monitor → Library → Status “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
status Library” on Status Library Status” on
page 5-10 page 5-36
Logical libraries, Configure → Logical Libraries “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
configure Logical Logical Libraries Library: Logical
Libraries” on Libraries” on page
page 5-18 5-44
Logs, library, Monitor → Library → Error Log “Monitor: Service Library → View “Service Library:
view Library” on Logs View Logs” on
page 5-10 page 5-58

Chapter 5. Operations 5-5

Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Magazines, Monitor → Inventory → “Monitor: Monitor Library → “Monitor Library:
graphical Magazines Inventory” on Inventory Inventory” on
representation page 5-14 page 5-39
Magazines, Control → Magazines “Control: Manage Library → Release “Manage Library:
Unlock Magazine” on Magazine Release
page 5-17 Magazine” on
page 5-42
Mode, library, Configure → Library Settings → “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
change Mode Library” on General Library: General”
page 5-20 on page 5-43
Mode, library, Monitor → Library → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
current Library” on Identity Library Identity”
page 5-10 on page 5-33
Netmask, current Monitor → Library → Network “Monitor: Configure Library → “Configure
address Library” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-10 on page 5-50
Netmask Configure → Network → “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
Address, modify Netmask Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 5-24 on page 5-50
Network Configure → Network “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
configuration, Network” on Network Library: Network”
change page 5-24 on page 5-50
Network Monitor → Library → Network “Monitor: Configure Library → “Configure
configuration, Library” on Network Library: Network”
view page 5-10 on page 5-50
Path Failover, Configure → Control Path “Configure: Configure Library → Path “Configure
enter activation Failover Path Failover” Failover Library: Path
key on page 5-29 Failover” on page
5-45
Restart, library, Not available with this Service Library → Reboot “Service Library:
interface. Reboot” on page
5-63
SCSI Inquiry Monitor → Drive → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
string, drive Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 5-12 page 5-34
Serial Number, Monitor → Drive → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Drive “Monitor Library:
drive Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 5-12 page 5-34
Serial Number, Monitor → Library → Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
library Library” on Identity Library Identity”
page 5-10 on page 5-33
Slots, number Monitor → Library → Identity “Monitor: System Status screen
active Library” on
page 5-10
Slots, number Monitor → Library → Status “Monitor: System Status screen
empty Library” on
page 5-10

5-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Slots, reassign Note: Varies according to the “Configure: Configure Library → “Configure
number of active, number logical libraries. Library” on General Library: General”
reserving page 5-20 on page 5-43
Single partition: Configure →
Logical Library Settings

Multiple partitions: Configure →

Logical Library Settings →
Logical Library (n)
SNMP, modify Not available with this Configure Library → “Configure
settings interface. SNMP Library: SNMP”
on page 5-55
Telnet Service Service → Telnet Service Port “Service: Not available with this
Port, activate Telnet Service interface.
Port” on page
5-32
Time elapsed Monitor → Library → Status “Monitor: Monitor Library → Library “Monitor Library:
since power ON Library” on Status Library Status” on
page 5-10 page 5-36
Operator Control Configure → Set Access PIN “Configure: Not available with this
Panel, access Set Access interface.
PIN, PIN” on page
enable/disable 5-25
Web User Not available with this Configure Library → User “Configure
Interface, user interface. Access Library: User
access, create or Access” on page
modify 5-52

Operator Control Panel Navigation

The four control keys on the front of a 2U or 4U library enable the user to navigate
through the library settings and make changes as needed to configure the library.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-7

 1 2

a77ug159
4 3

Figure 5-1. 2U Library Control Keys

1 2

a77ug160

4 3

Figure 5-2. 4U Library Control Keys

Table 5-2. Library Control Keys

Control Description
Keys
1 UP (+) - Upper-left button

Used to scroll upward through menu items.

2 CANCEL - Upper-right button

Used to cancel a user action and return to the previous menu screen.
3 SELECT - Lower-right button

Used to display a sub-menu or force an accessor action.

5-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table 5-2. Library Control Keys (continued)
Control Description
Keys
4 DOWN (-) - Lower-left button

Used to scroll downward through menu items.

1. Press the UP (1) or DOWN(4) keys to enter Interaction Mode. The Main
Selection Menu will appear. The Main Selection screen shows Monitor, Control,
Configure, and Service.
2. Scroll to your selection, then press the SELECT (3) key. The sub-menu for the
selected menu item will appear.
3. Use the UP (1) or DOWN(4) and SELECT (3) keys to scroll until you get
to the area/screen you wish to configure.
4. Use the CANCEL (2) key if you wish to move backwards through the menu
selections.

Operator Control Panel Menu Tree

The Operator Control Panel Main menu is made up of the following items:
v Monitor
v Control
v Configure
v Service

The table below shows each Main menu item and the associated sub menu items.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-9

 Monitor Control Configure Service

Logical
Library Open I/O Station Library Verify
Libraries

Drive Move Cartridges Library Run Tests

Settings

Inventory Magazines Drive Service (Drives)

Re-Inventory Network Display Contrast

Set Access PIN Telnet Service

Port

Save/Restore

Set Date and

Time

a77ug050
Control
Path Failover

Figure 5-3. Operator Control Panel Menu Tree

Note: Depending on the version of library firmware, there may be differences

between the Menu Tree description in this document and the OCP Menu
Tree on your library.

Monitor Menu
The Monitor menu contains information about the following sub menu items:
v Library
v Drive
v Inventory

Monitor: Library
This menu item displays current library information and settings.

5-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Monitor

Library

Status Identity Error Log Network

Status Serial Number IP Stack

Act. Cart. Version

DHCP-OFF DHCP-OFF
DHCP-ON (IPv4 & IPv4+IPv6) (IPv6)

On Time Vendor ID
IP Address Stateless
autoconfig

Slots Empty Product ID

Netmask Prefix Length

Cycles Active Slots

Static IPv6
Address

I/O Station WWNN

Link Local IPv6
Gateway Address

Date/Time Library Mode

Assigned IPv6
Ethernet Address
Note: This will display
when Stateless Auto
Config is enabled

Gateway
a77ug051

Ethernet

Figure 5-4. Monitor: Library menu

Under Monitor → Library are the following items:

v Status

Chapter 5. Operations 5-11

 v Identity
v Error Log
v Network

Under Monitor → Library → Status are the following items:

v Status - current status of the library
v Act. Cart - the serial number of the cartridge currently active in the library
v On Time - the amount of time the library has been powered ON
v Slots Empty - the number of empty slots in the library/total number of active
slots in the library
v Cycles - the total number of cartridge moves carried out by the library accessor
v I/O Station - indicates whether the I/O Station is open or closed
v Date/Time - gives the current date and time set in the library

Under Monitor → Library → Identity are the following items:

v Serial Number - the serial number of the library
v Version - the current level of library firmware installed
v Vendor ID - IBM
v Product ID - library inquiry string
v Active Slots - number of active slots in each logical library
v WWNN - World Wide Node Name of the library
v Library Mode - current library mode (Random or Sequential)

Under Monitor → Library → Error Log, you will have a list of errors logged by the
library. The errors will be displayed beginning with the most recent error.

Under Monitor → Library → Network are the following items:

v IP Stack - the internet protocol currently being used by the library
v DHCP - (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - records whether DHCP is ON
or OFF
v IP Addresses - the internet addresses of the library
v Netmask - the Network Mask Address of the library
v Gateway - the Gateway Address of the library
v Ethernet - the speed of the ethernet interface
v Stateless auto configuration - indicates whether or not stateless auto
configuration is enabled
v Prefix Length - the length of the IP Address prefix
v Static IPv6 Address - the static IPv6 address of the library
v Link Local IPv6 Address - local link-only IPv6 address of the library
v Router assigned IPv6 Address - IPv6 address(es) discovered by the network
router

Monitor: Drive
This menu item displays drive information and settings.

5-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Monitor

Drive

Status Identity

Drive (n) Drive (n)

Status Firmware Rev

Activity Vendor ID

Source Product ID

Encryption Serial Number

Topology Port A
(A) Status PID
WWNN (A) SCSI ID

SCSI Drive
Speed Speed
(A) (A) Topology PID
(A) (B)

SAS Drive
Loop ID Hashed Speed
(A) Address (A) (A)
Fibre Channel Drive
Port B
Loop ID
Status
(A)

Fibre Channel Drive

Speed (B)

Hashed
Address (B)
a77ug035

SAS Drive

Figure 5-5. Monitor: Drive menu

Under Status and Drive (n) are the following items:

v Status - the current status of the drive

Chapter 5. Operations 5-13

 v Activity - the current action being performed by the drive
v Source - the serial number of the cartridge currently in the drive
v Encryption - indicates the type of data encryption currently set for the selected
drive
v Topology - the topology chosen for a fibre library (see “Fibre Channel Interface”
on page 3-10)
v Speed - indicates the speed of the fibre channel (fibre library)
v Link - indicates the status of the fibre channel (fibre library)
v Hashed Address - an address calculated from the WWID

Under Identity and Drive (n) are the following items:

v Firmware Rev - the current level of drive firmware
v Vendor ID - IBM
v Product ID - drive inquiry string
v Serial Number - the drive serial number
v SCSI ID - the unique identifier assigned to a SCSI drive
v WWNN - the fibre channel drive's World Wide Node Name
v Topology - the topology chosen for the fibre channel drive
v Speed - indicates the speed of the fibre channel tape drive
v Loop ID - unique identifier assigned to a fibre channel tape drive
v PID - port identification (SAS only)

Monitor: Inventory
This menu item displays the current library inventory of a 4U library.

5-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Monitor

Inventory

Magazines Drive (n)

(Drive
status)
Upper Left Upper Right

Lower Left Lower Right

a77ug036
(Graphic of left (Graphic of right
magazine) magazine)

Figure 5-6. Example of a 4U Monitor: Inventory menu

Note: 2U has a single right side magazine.

Under Magazine choose one of the following to see a graphical representation of

the cartridge magazine(s). Slots containing cartridges will be highlighted.

Magazines > Lower Left

I/O 3 7 8 9
I/O 2 4 5 6
I/O 1 1 2 3
a77ug166

Idle Rand
Figure 5-7. Overview of inventoried cartridges: Lower Left Magazine of a 4U Library

Note: Left magazine of a 2U Library has a 1-slot I/O Station

The black boxes are inventoried cartridges. Press the up and down keys to scroll.
Note that this magazine has a 3-slot I/O Station. These slots can be changed to
storage slots if needed. See “Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots” on
page 5-65.

Press SELECT to display all empty slots and cartridge serial numbers in the
associated magazine.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-15

Figure 5-8. Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine

Table 5-3. Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine

1 Magazine slot number 3 Media type (generation of cartridge)
2 Cartridge volume serial number 4 Encryption abbreviation for LTO4 cartridges:
or “Empty” (meaning no v EC - encryption capable (The LTO 4 cartridge does not
cartridge currently residing in contain encrypted data).
slot)
v ED- encrypted data (The LTO 4 cartridge does contain
encrypted data).

Control Menu
The Control Menu contains the following items:
v Open I/O Station
v Move Cartridges
v Magazine
v Re-Inventory

Control: Open I/O Station

Use this menu item to open the I/O Station.

Control
a77ug052

Open I/O Station

Figure 5-9. Control: I/O Station menu

Attention: After closing the I/O Station, you must wait for the library to complete
its inventory before proceeding with normal library operations.

Control: Move Cartridges

Use this menu item to move cartridges in the library.

5-16 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Control

Move Cartridges

a77ug053
Source Source Volume Destination Destination
Type Serial Type

Figure 5-10. Control: Move Cartridges menu

To move a cartridge from point A to point B, you must make the following choices:
v Source Type - Drive, I/O station, magazine. Only the source type(s) that contain
cartridges will be listed.
v Source - the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then
advances through all available choices.

Note: If the Attention LED is ON due to a suspect cartridge, that cartridge will
be identified by an exclamation point (!) when scrolling through the
source cartridges.
v Volume Serial - the serial number of the cartridge
v Dest Type - the destination Drive, I/O station, magazine
v Dest - the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then
advances through all available choices.

Control: Magazine
Use this menu item to unlock the cartridge magazines.

Control

Magazine

Left Right
a77ug054

"Left magazine "Right magazine

unlocking" unlocking"

Figure 5-11. Control: Magazine menu

Choose "Left" or "Right" to unlock the corresponding cartridge magazine(s). The

magazines can now be removed from the library by gently pulling each magazine

Chapter 5. Operations 5-17

 out of the library. To replace a magazine, insert the back of the magazine into the
front of the library and gently push the magazine into the library. The magazine
will lock when inserted into the library.

Attention: After inserting the magazines into the library, you must wait for the
library to complete its inventory before proceeding with normal library operations.

If the magazines are not pulled out of the library within 15 seconds after they are
unlocked, the command will cancel and you will have to repeat the process to
unlock the magazines.

Control: Re-Inventory
Use this menu item to initiate a scan of the cartridges currently in the library.

Control

a77ug055
Re-Inventory

Figure 5-12. Control: Re-Inventory menu

Note: It may take up to five minutes to complete the library inventory.

Configure Menu
The Configure Menu is used during the initial setup of your library and when
changes need to be made to your library's configuration. This menu contains the
following items:
v Logical Libraries
v Library Settings
v Drive
v Network
v Set Access PIN
v Save/Restore
v Set Date and Time

Configure: Logical Libraries

Use this menu item to select the number of logical libraries. The Currently
Configured - x section shows the number of logical libraries currently configured.

5-18 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Figure 5-13. Configure: Logical Libraries menu

Note: The maximum number of Logical Libraries in a 2U is two.

Note: This menu is only available on libraries with multiple drives.

Note: Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being

swapped with different form factors (i.e. HH to FH or FH to HH), a library
configuration change is needed. Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the
amount of logical libraries will clear this issue.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-19

 Configure: Library

Configure

If 1 Logical If 2 or more
Library Logical Libraries

Library Logical
Settings Lib Settings

Mode

General

1 2 3 4

Random Sequential Auto Clean

I/O Station(s) Mode

Autoload
enabled

Loop Remove
DCS No
Random Sequential

Active Slots
Autoload

Auto Clean
Loop

I/O Station(s)
enabled
Active Slots

Host Label
a77ug056

Length
Host Label
Length

Figure 5-14. Configure: Library menu

Note: The Remove DCS No is only available on libraries with the DCS feature.

The following library configuration items are in this menu:

v Mode:

5-20 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 – Random: In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's) application
software to select any data cartridge in any order.
– Sequential: In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the selection
of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library to select
the first available cartridge found (counting from the I/O Station through slot
23) for loading into the drive.

Important: If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than one

drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized.
- Autoload: Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first
available cartridge (slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a
cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive.
- Loop: Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot has
been filled and sent back to its home slot. This allows endless backup
operations without user interaction.
- Starting Sequential Mode
v Autoload Option:
– If the Autoload option is set to ON (Configure → Library Settings →
Autoload), the accessor will load the first cartridge (cartridge located
in the slot with the lowest numeric value) found in the storage
inventory area into the drive upon power ON of the library. If the
library powers on with a cartridge already in the drive, sequential
mode will start with that cartridge unless the host issues a rewind and
unload command to the drive. In that case, the next cartridge in
sequence will be loaded into the drive.
– If the Autoload Option if OFF, sequential mode must be started by
selecting the Move Cartridges option (Control → Move Cartridges) to
load the first cartridge (or any cartridge) into the drive. Whatever
cartridge is loaded into the drive, that is where the sequence starts
from. For example, if a cartridge from the fifth lowest numeric storage
slot containing a cartridge is loaded using the Move Cartridges
option, after the host issues a rewind/unload command, the next
cartridge loaded will be the cartridge from the next higher numeric
slot. Cartridges need not be in contiguous slots.
v Loop Option:
If the Loop option is set to ON (Configure → Library Settings → → Loop),
when the last cartridge (cartridge in the highest numeric slot) is
unloaded and placed back into storage, the accessor will immediately
start over again loading the first cartridge into the drive.
- Stopping Sequential Mode: To stop sequential mode, use the Move
Cartridges option from the Control menu (Control → Move Cartridges) to
unload the drive. the next sequential cartridge will NOT be loaded. To
restart sequential mode, use the same Control menu command to load a
cartridge. The loading sequence will resume from that numeric slot in the
cartridge inventory.
v Active Slots - the number of active slots in each logical library.

Note: Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host. It may be
necessary to set the number of Active Slots to match the number of slots
that are available to the ISV software. Reserved slots are created by
reducing the number of active slots.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-21

 v Auto Clean - Use this menu item to enable the Auto Clean function. All cleaning
cartridges must have "CLNxxxLx" as part of the bar code.
With Auto Clean disabled, the cleaning tape can be stored in any data slot if you
wish to manually clean the drives. This is not recommended.
With Auto Clean disabled, the cleaning tape can be stored in any data slot if it
was put there under Backup Application control. In other words, the Backup
Application is controlling the cleaning of the tape drives and the cleaning tape
would be imported into this library under its control.

Note: The universal cleaning cartridge has a bar code CLNUxxLx. This cleaning
cartridge is used to clean all LTO generation tape drives.
For Auto Clean to function, the following criteria must be met:
– On 4U libraries with library firmware of 1.95 or lower that still contain a
Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS), or 4U libraries with library firmware higher
than 1.95 that chose to retain the DCS in their library, a CLN cartridge must
be present in that slot.
– On libraries that don't have a DCS, a storage slot must be reserved (RSVD) by
reducing the active slot count by one.
– A cleaning cartridge (CLNxxxLx) must be placed or moved to the reserved
slot.
– Auto Clean must be enabled.

Note: Cleaning cartridges must be replaced after 50 cleanings. The Web User
Interface inventory screen will show the number of times the media has
been loaded, not the number of cleaning sessions remaining. Subtract this
number from 50 to determine the number of cleanings remaining.
v I/O Station(s) enabled - The I/O Station(s) can be enabled (the default), or
disabled so the stations can be utilized as storage slots.
v Remove DCS - If the DCS has been removed, it cannot be reinstated. This
option will no longer appear in the Operator Control Panel.
v Host Label Length - The Host Label Length is related to the Bar Code Labels
appearing on the media being used. The default value is 8, but 6 can also be
chosen.

5-22 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Configure: Drive

Configure

Drive

Drive Interface Control Path

SAS drives SCSI ID A Speed

do not
require user
configuration
A Type

A Address
Mode

A Loop ID

a77ug042
Fibre Channel Drive

Figure 5-15. Configure: Drive menu

The following items are in this menu:

v Drive Interface - use this to assign a SCSI ID to a SCSI drive or to assign a Port
Speed, Port Type, and Loop ID to a Fibre Channel drive. SAS drives do not
require user configuration. For more information on drive interfaces, refer to
“Host Interfaces” on page 3-7.
v Control Paths - use this to enable the drive as a control path drive. Each logical
library must have a control path drive; however, all drives in a logical library
can be designated as control path drives.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-23

 Configure: Network

Configure

Network

IP Stack

DHCP-OFF DHCP-OFF
DHCP-ON (IPv4 & IPv4+IPv6) (IPv6)

IP Address Stateless
autoconfig

Netmask Prefix Length

Static IPv6
Address

Link Local IPv6

Gateway Address

Assigned IPv6
Ethernet Address
Note: This will display
when Stateless Auto
Config is enabled

Gateway
a77ug043

Ethernet

Figure 5-16. Configure: Network menu

Use these menu items to change the current network settings which allow you to
access the library remotely via a web browser.
v IP Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or IPv4 & IPv6.
v IPv6 Only and Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6 - Choose Enable Stateless Auto Config
Address (Web User Interface) or Stateless Autoconfig (Operator Control Panel) if

5-24 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 assigned IPv6 IP addresses are desired. To view the assigned IPv6 addresses
after enabling Stateless Auto Config Address, do the following:
– Operator Control Panel (IPv6 Only): Monitor → Library → Network
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both IPv4
and IPv6 IP addresses.
v DHCP - (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) If this is enabled, your library
host will negotiate the connection with the library. If DHCP is disabled, the
following information is necessary to establish the remote access.
v IP Address - the IP address of the library
v Netmask - the Network Mask address of the library
v IP Stack - the IP Stack manages static IP addresses
v Stateless autoconfig - allows IPv6 hosts to be configured automatically when
connected to a routed IPv6 network
v Prefix length - the length of the IP address prefix
v Static IPv6 address - a static IPv6 address that has been assigned to the library
v Link Local IPv6 address - an IPv6 address having link-only scope that can be
used to reach neighboring nodes attached to the same link
v Assigned IPv6 address - an IPv6 address assigned by a router
v Gateway - the Gateway address of the library
v Ethernet - the current speed setting of the ethernet interface
v DNS Server 1 - the first DNS server address
v DNS Server 2 - the second DNS server address

Note: If a host and domain name are entered instead of an address, the IPv4 or
IPv6 address will be resolved from the DNS using that name. That address
will be stored in the library rather than the name. Therefore, if the address
changes, the name or a new address will have to be entered.

Configure: Set Access PIN

Use this menu item to enable/disable, set or change the Access PIN (personal
identification number) which is used to restrict access to the Control, Configure,
and Service menus.

Note: Record the Access PIN and store this in a secure location for future
reference. Library configuration files, saved with the Save Library Config
menu, do not include the Access PIN.

Figure 5-17. Configure: Set Access PIN menu

Chapter 5. Operations 5-25

 Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Control
Panel:
1. Navigate to Configure → Set Access PIN.
2. Press the SELECT button to highlight the first digit of the 4-digit Access PIN.
3. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to select each digit.
4. Press the SELECT button to move to the next digit.
5. Repeat these steps for repeating the Access PIN.
6. After entering the final digit, press the DOWN button and select one of the
following:
v Save - to apply your settings.
v Cancel - to delete your settings.

Note: In Figure 5-18, menus with the pound sign (#) are the only menus
accessible when the Access PIN is enabled, but entered incorrectly or
before it is entered. To gain access to all menus, disable the Access PIN
or enter the correct PIN number when requested.

Figure 5-18. Pound sign (#) shows accessible menus when access PIN is enabled but before it is entered

5-26 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Configure: Save/Restore
Use this menu item to restore the factory default settings.

Configure

Save/Restore

a77ug045
Restore Passwords Restore All Restore Library Config. Save Library Config.

Figure 5-19. Configure: Save/Restore menu

v Restore Passwords - This menu item restores the factory default RMU Admin
user access password.
v Restore all - This menu item restores all factory default settings (refer to
Table 5-4).
v Restore Library Config - This menu item restores your saved library
configuration from a USB device. If you have more than one saved configuration
file (.dbb) on your USB device, press Select, then use the up and down keys to
move between the different files. When the correct configuration file is
displayed, press Select again.
v Save Library Config - This menu item saves your library configuration to a USB
device.

Note: Ensure the USB device is formatted for FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 and does
not use autorun files.

Note: Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be
compatible with other versions of firmware. It is recommended to save a
configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded. Restore the
library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of
firmware currently installed in the library.

Important: Restoring factory defaults will wipe out all the previous configuration
data.
Table 5-4. Factory Default Settings
Restored Item Default Setting* Comments
Autoclean Disabled
Logical Libraries 1
Active Slots Maximum number of slots in library
minus I/O Station
I/O Station Enabled 2U library has 1-slot I/O Station.4U
library has 3-slot I/O Station.
Encryption None License Key is protected, if
previously entered.
Ethernet Setting Auto

Chapter 5. Operations 5-27

Table 5-4. Factory Default Settings (continued)
Restored Item Default Setting* Comments
DHCP Enabled Note: DNS server addresses, if
available, will be automatically
assigned. If the DHCP server does
not find any DNS server, the DNS
fields will be set to "0.0.0.0".
Network IP Mode IPv4 Only
Bar Code Label Length Reported to 8
Host
SNMP Disabled
Email Notifications Disabled
User Access Restore from Operator Control Panel
or Web User Interface
Admin secure (default)
Library Mode Random
Library Name (Blank)
Host Name (Depends on MAC Address)
Logs & Traces Error Log Mode Continuous
Path Failover Key No change License Key is protected, if
previously entered.
OCP Access PIN Disabled If OCP Access PIN has been enabled
Note: The initial Factory Default the default PIN is "1234".
setting is disabled. If the OCP Access
PIN setting is changed, executing
"Restore Defaults" will not change the
setting.
SSL for Web Disabled
Drives
Power Power On (All drives)
Drive 1 SCSI-ID 4 SCSI Drives
Drive 2 SCSI-ID 5 SCSI Drives
Drive 3 SCSI-ID 6 SCSI Drives
Drive 4 SCSI-ID 8 SCSI Drives
Drive 1 Loop-ID 4 FC Drives Arbitrated Loop
Drive 2 Loop-ID 5 FC Drives Arbitrated Loop
Control Path Drive Drive 1 only
Speed Auto FC Drives (all)
Topology LN-Port FC Drives (all)
IPv6 Stateless Autoconfig Enabled
Note: * = all settings at library firmware level 4.xx and greater

In some cases, (such as Library Mode), the entry of one option precludes any other
options from being selected. In such cases, the details of the non-applicable options
are not shown.

5-28 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Configure: Set Date and Time
Use this menu item to set the current date and time in your library.

Configure

a77ug046
Set Date
and Time

Figure 5-20. Configure: Set Date and Time menu

Configure: Path Failover

| Use this menu item to enter the Path Failover Feature Activation key (Supported
| on 4U library only for library firmware levels at or below 8.xx. Supported on both
| the 2U and 4U libraries with library firmware levels above 8.xx).

Configure

a77ug119
Path Failover

Figure 5-21. Configure: Path Failover

Path Failover is a combination of two previous features: Control Path Failover (key
entered at the library user interface) and Data Path Failover (key entered at the
device driver interface). A single activation key entered at the library user interface
now activates both features unless the LTO-3 drive firmware level is equal to or
lower than 73P5 and/or the library firmware is equal to or lower than 1.95. For
either or both of these two cases, the device driver interface Data Path Failover key
| activation will still be required. For library firmware levels below 8.xx the Path
Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives, and Path Failover is not
| supported for Half High drives. Library firmware levels higher than 8.xx support
| Path Failover on LTO 5 Full High and Half High drives, as well as LTO 4 Full
| High and Half High drives.

Service Menu
The 2U/4U library is always online, except for when the user enters the Service
Library area. A warning message appears stating that the library should be taken
offline from the host before performing any Service functions. It is up to the
operator to ensure that it is taken offline by phoning the host operator or other
means of communication. Before performing any service functions, ensure the host
is not performing any data writing or retrieval.

The Service Menu contains the following items:

v Library Verify - an overall library diagnostic
v Run Tests - other library diagnostics
v Service - diagnostics and procedures for servicing the drive
v Display Contrast - setting the display from light to dark
v Telnet Service Port

Chapter 5. Operations 5-29

 Service: Library Verify
This is an overall diagnostic that exercises all library components. To run the
Library Verify test, complete the following procedure.

Service

a77ug047
Library Verify

Figure 5-22. Service: Library Verify menu

1. On the Operator Control Panel, navigate to Service → Library Verify and start
diagnostic.
v Push the Select key to highlight the drive field. Use the Up/Down keys to
select the drive. Push the Select key to complete the selection.
v Push the Down key to highlight <Run>.
v Push the Select key to execute Library Verify.
2. When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O Station
opens, insert a blank or scratch data cartridge.
3. Close the I/O Station by pushing it back into the library.
4. While the test is running, the Operator Control Panel will display library status.
v If the test PASSES, resume normal library operations.
v If the test FAILS, an error code will be displayed. Make note of the error,
then refer to Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting,” on page 7-1.
5. When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O Station
opens, remove the cartridge used in the test.
6. Close the I/O Station by pushing it back into the library.
7. Use the Up/Down keys to highlight <Cancel>. Press the Select key to exit the
Library Verify screen.

Service: Run Tests

Service
a77ug048

Run Tests

Figure 5-23. Service: Run Tests menu

The following library diagnostics are available in this menu:

v System Test - this test exercises library components by moving customer data
cartridges from slots to drives and back to slots. No data is written or read from
the customer tapes. To run this test successfully, the library must contain at least
one data cartridge for every drive present in the library.
v Slot to Slot Test - The Slot To Slot test will move each resident data cartridge
from one slot to another, for each test cycle requested. When completing the Slot

5-30 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 To Slot test, you will need to Inventory your library before placing it back
online, since this test scrambles the cartridge slot locations.

Note: After running the System Test or the Slot to Slot Test, the library will need
to be re-inventoried.

Service: Service (Drives)

Service

Service

a77ug058
Clean Drive Drive Tests Drive Power

Figure 5-24. Service: Service menu

The following drive diagnostics and service procedures are available in this menu:
v Clean Drive - The accessor takes the cleaning cartridge from the dedicated
cleaning cartridge slot (DCS), or previously reserved slot if no DCS is available,
and inserts it into the drive. After the cleaning is complete, the accessor removes
the cleaning cartridge from the drive and returns it to the dedicated cleaning
cartridge slot or reserved slot.
v Drive Tests - Power On Self Test (POST), Wrap Test, Normal Read/Write Test,
Head Test, Media Test

Note: The Operator Control Panel will display "Wrap Test" for libraries
containing SCSI and Fibre Channel tape drives. "Wrap A Test" and "Wrap
B Test" will be displayed for libraries containing SAS tape drives. Run
both wrap tests (A & B) on SAS full high tape drives to test both SAS
ports. Run Wrap A test only on SAS half high tape drives as they only
have one SAS port.
1. Navigate to the desired test (Service → Service → Drive Tests). Choose the
drive if more than one is installed.
2. Follow the instructions displayed on the Operator Control Panel, and, if
required, insert a blank or scratch cartridge into the I/O Station when
requested. All wrap tests require a wrap tool to perform the diagnostic.
3. The test will execute.
– If the test PASSES, resume normal library operations.
– If the test FAILS, an error will be displayed. Make note of the error, then
refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 7-10.
4. Remove the cartridge from the I/O Station, if needed, then close the I/O
Station.
5. Press Cancel to exit the screen.
v Drive Power - use this item to turn drive power ON and OFF

Service: Display Contrast

Chapter 5. Operations 5-31

 Service

a77ug170
Display Contrast

Figure 5-25. Service: Display Contrast menu

The following display contrast settings are available in this menu:

v The numbers 1 through 10 will display, with 10 being the lightest shade and 1
being the brightest.

Service: Telnet Service Port

The Telnet Service Port menu item is to be used under the direction of the IBM
Support Center. Refer to “Accessing the Library using Telnet” on page A-25.

Web User Interface Menus

Note: Depending on the version of library firmware, there may be differences
between the Menu description in this document and the web user interface
menus on your library.

The following menus are available on the Web User Interface.

Table 5-5. Web User Interface Menus
-Monitor Library
Library Identity
Drives Identity
Library Status
Drives Status
Inventory
-Manage Library
Move Media
Perform Inventory
Release Magazine
-Configure Library
General
Logical Libraries
Path Failover
Encryption
Drives
Network
User Access
Date & Time
Logs & Traces
Email Notification

5-32 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table 5-5. Web User Interface Menus (continued)
SNMP
Save/Restore
-Service Library
Clean Drive
Advanced Diagnostics (for Service Personnel only)
View Logs
View Drive Logs
Save Drive Dump
Perform Diagnostics
Key Path Diagnostics
Upgrade Firmware
Reboot

Monitor Library Menu

The Monitor Library menu contains the following sub-menu items.
v “Monitor Library: Library Identity”
v “Monitor Library: Drive Identity” on page 5-34
v “Monitor Library: Library Status” on page 5-36
v “Monitor Library: Drive Status” on page 5-37
v “Monitor Library: Inventory” on page 5-39

Monitor Library: Library Identity

This page provides access to the static information about the library. No changes
can be made from this page. Table 5-6 lists all available elements on the Library
Identity page. An "X" indicates that the element displays for the specified library
type.
Table 5-6. Library Identity page elements
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Serial Number This is the unique identification number assigned by the manufacturer. X X
Product ID This is the SCSI inquiry string of the library X X
Currently This is the current level of firmware installed on the library. To ensure X X
Installed Library you are running the latest version of firmware, visit http://www.ibm.com.
Firmware For information on updating your firmware, refer to “Service Library:
Upgrade Firmware” on page 5-62.
Bootcode This is the level of bootcode firmware currently installed on the library. X X
Firmware Bootcode is the firmware that allows the library to begin initialization
Revision when it is powered ON.
| Barcode Reader This is the version of barcode reader in the library. X X
IPv4 Address This is the Internet Protocol v4 Address assigned to your library. X X
Link local IPv6 This is the local IPv6 address assigned to your library. X X
address
IPv6 static This is your library's IPv6 static assigned address. X X
assigned address
Router discovery This is the IPv6 router discovery address assigned to your library. X X
IPv6 address

Chapter 5. Operations 5-33

Table 5-6. Library Identity page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
MAC Address This is the machine's access code assigned to your library. X X
WWide Node This is the Worldwide Node Name assigned to your library. X X
Name
Logical Library x The Extended Logical Libraries Information table displays information X X
Library Mode about the logical libraries currently assigned in your library. For each
logical library in your library, either Random or Sequential Loop
Autoload will be displayed.

Figure 5-26. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library Identity page

This view is correct for a library with multiple logical partitions. The Library
Identify screen will be different for a library with a single logical partition.

Monitor Library: Drive Identity

This page provides the following detailed information about the drive. No changes
can be made from this page. The displayed information will vary depending on
the library model and drive type (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel). Table 5-7 lists all
available elements on the Drive Identity page. An "X" indicates that the element
displays for the specified drive type.
Table 5-7. Drive Identity page elements
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Vendor ID This identifies the manufacturer of the tape drive. X X X X X X
Product ID This is the SCSI inquiry string of the tape drive. X X X X X X
Serial This is the unique identification number of the tape X X X X X X
Number drive that was assigned by the manufacturer.

5-34 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 5-7. Drive Identity page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Firmware This is the current level of firmware installed on the X X X X X X
Revision drive. To ensure you are running the latest version of
firmware, visit http://www.ibm.com. For information on
updating your firmware, refer to “Service Library:
Upgrade Firmware” on page 5-62.
SCSI ID This is the unique identifier assigned to the SCSI drive X X
to enable it to receive communications from the host
computer.
Element This is the unique identifier assigned to the drive that X X X X X X
Address allows the host to recognize and communicate with the
drive.
Control Path If the drive communicates all messages from the host to X X X X X X
Drive the library, then it is considered the control path drive.
If the drive is the control path drive, this element
displays "Yes." If not, this element displays "No." All
drives in a logical library may be a control path drive.
Data If the drive is compressing data, this element displays X X X X X X
Compression "Yes." If not, this element displays "No."
Interface This identifies the drive host interface. X X X X X X
Type
Node Name This is the Worldwide node Name assigned to a Fibre X X
drive.
Worldwide This is the Worldwide ID assigned to a SAS drive. X X
ID (Ports A and B)
Port A This provides information about Port A. X X X X
Port Name This is the name assigned to a Fibre channel port that is X X
"enabled".
Topology This is the type of connection to the host. X X
FC-AL Loop This is the Fibre Channel - Arbitrated Loop ID of the X X
ID drive.
Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive. Choices X X
are Auto (where the drive will automatically negotiate
the speed of the drive to match that of the server),
1Gb/s, 2Gb/s or 4 Gb/s.
Port B This provides information about Port B. X X

Chapter 5. Operations 5-35

 a77ug091

Figure 5-27. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive Identity page showing one SAS (#1), one SCSI drive (#2), and one
Fibre Channel drive (#3)

Monitor Library: Library Status

This page displays the dynamic information about the library, such as the current
status of the components. No changes can be made from this page. Table 5-8 lists
all available elements on the Library Identity page. An "X" indicates that the
element displays for the specified library type.
Table 5-8. Library Status page elements
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Status Library status is displayed using icons with text. A checkmark with the X X
word "Ready" indicates the library is functioning properly. An
exclamation point with the word "Caution" indicates the library can
function, but is experiencing a problems. An X with the word "Error"
indicates the library is not functioning because of a serious problem.
Cartridge in This identifies a cartridge that is currently being moved by the accessor. X X
Transport "None" is displayed if no cartridge is being moved.

5-36 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 5-8. Library Status page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Number of Moves This is the number of times the accessor has moved a cartridge from X X
Point A to Point B (for example, from a storage slot to a drive).
Total Power On This is the total amount of time that the library has been powered ON. X X
Time
Accessor Status This is the current status of the accessor. X X
Left Magazine This displays whether the left magazine is "Present" or "Not Present". X
Right Magazine This displays whether the right magazine is "Present" or "Not Present". X
1. Left Magazine This displays whether the lower left magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".
1. Right Magazine This displays whether the lower right magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".
2. Left Magazine This displays whether the upper left magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".
2. Right Magazine This displays whether the upper right magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".

Figure 5-28. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library Status page

Monitor Library: Drive Status

This page provides the following detailed dynamic information about the drive in
the library. No changes can be made from this page. The displayed information
will vary depending on the library model and drive type (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre
Channel). Table 5-9 lists all available elements on the Drive Status page. An "X"
indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type.
Table 5-9. Drive Status page elements
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Status This is the current status of the drive. A X X X X X X
checkmark indicates that the drive is operating
properly. An exclamation point indicates that the
drive is operating but has a problem. An X
indicates that the drive is not operational because
of a serious problem.
Cartridge in This is the serial number of the cartridge X X X X X X
Drive currently in the drive. If the drive does not
contain a cartridge, "None" is displayed.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-37

Table 5-9. Drive Status page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Drive Error If the drive has generated an error code, it is X X X X X X
Code displayed here. If the drive has not generated an
error, "No Error" will be displayed.
Cooling Fan This displays whether the drive's cooling fan is X X X X X X
Active ON (checked) or OFF.
Drive This indicates whether or not the drive is X X X X X X
Activity operating.
Port A This indicates whether Port A is logged on or out. X X X X
Status
Port B This indicates whether Port B is logged on or out. X X X X
Status
Port Name This is the name assigned to the Port on the X X
drive.
Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive. X X X X
Choices are Auto (where the drive will
automatically negotiate the speed of the drive to
match that of the server), 1Gb/s, 2Gb/s, or
4Gb/s.
Topology This is the type of connection to the host. N-Port X X
ID
Hashed SAS The Hashed SAS address is a value which is X X
Address calculated from the WWID for use on the SAS
interface
Encryption This shows the status of any encryption that is X X X X
Status enabled on the drive.
Encryption This is the type of encryption that is enabled on X X X X
method the drive.
Key path This is the path used for transferring an X X X X
encryption key. This setting is dependent upon
the encryption method selected.
BOP policy This indicates whether the Beginning of Partition X X X X
(BOP) policy is enabled or disabled.
Density This setting determines whether the drive shows X X X X
reporting or masks encryption.

5-38 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug093
Figure 5-29. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive Status page

Monitor Library: Inventory

This page provides detailed information about the tape inventory in the library. A
summary of each magazine is shown. To get detailed information about the
cartridges that reside in a magazine, click on the + button. This will expand the
display for the magazine. To determine whether a cartridge is encrypted, refer to
the Comments column in the Cartridge Details screen. See Figure 5-31 on page
5-41.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-39

 Inventory As Of 14:02:04 Library Time
Drive Inventory
Drive Status Label Source
1 Empty -------------

Magazine Inventory
8 9 10 11 +

4 5 6 7
IO-Station 1 2 3

22 21 20 +
23
19 18 17 16
15 14 13 12

a77ug067
Refresh

Figure 5-30. The 2U library Monitor Library: Inventory page

Note: On some 2U Libraries prior to Library Microcode Level 1.90, slot 11 may be
labelled a "Not Used" slot which contained a "Slot Blocker". With Library
Microcode level 1.9 or higher, there is an option to remove the "Slot Blocker"
and place that slot into use. See “Removing the Slot Blocker - 2U Library”
on page 10-10.

5-40 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug099
*Res*

Figure 5-31. The 4U library Monitor Library: Inventory page

Manage Library Menu

Manage Library: Move Media
This page allows the user to move tape cartridges within the library. The source
and destination are selected and then the MOVE button in the center of the screen
is clicked to activate the move.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-41

 a77ug072
Figure 5-32. Manage Library: Move Media page

The following elements appear in the Source and Destination screens.

Element
In the Source screen, this identifies the library element that contains a
cartridge. In the Destination screen, this identifies the library element that
is empty and can receive a cartridge.
Volume Serial
In the Source screen, this element displays the serial number of the
cartridge. In the Destination screen, this element contains no information.

Manage Library: Perform Inventory

This page allows the library to be re-scanned to determine the current media
inventory.

a77ug076

Figure 5-33. Manage Library: Perform Inventory page

Manage Library: Release Magazine

This page allows the user to release the right or left magazine from the library.
a77ug078

Figure 5-34. Manage Library: Release Magazine page

Note: To manually release a magazine, see “Releasing the Magazines Manually”

on page 9-1. However, this manual process should only be used if the
magazine cannot be released using the Operator Control Panel or the Web
User Interface.
5-42 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Configure Library Menu
The Configure Library menu contains the following submenu items:
v “Configure Library: General”
v “Configure Library: Logical Libraries” on page 5-44
v “Configure Library: Path Failover” on page 5-45
v “Configure Library: Encryption” on page 5-46
v “Configure Library: Drives” on page 5-48
v “Configure Library: Network” on page 5-50
v “Configure Library: User Access” on page 5-52
v “Configure Library: Date & Time” on page 5-54
v “Configure Library: Logs & Traces” on page 5-54
v “Configure Library: Email Notification” on page 5-55
v “Configure Library: SNMP” on page 5-55
v “Configure Library: Save/Restore” on page 5-56

Configure Library: General

This page allows you to make changes to general library configuration elements.
As changes are made, they will only be applied after the Apply Selections or the
Submit button is selected. After making the selection, a warning page will inform
you of the impact of the proposed change. In some cases a pop-up screen will ask
for confirmation. Many changes will also require a library reboot.
Table 5-10. Configure Library: General page elements
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Library Name Enter the name of the library. X X
I/O Station The I/O Station defaults to I/O Station Enabled. Choosing Disabled (no X X
Enabled checkmark) adds one more storage slot to the 2U library, and 3 more
storage slots to the 4U library. When the I/O Station is disabled,
removing or adding media to the library must be performed by releasing
the left and/or right magazine(s).
Auto Clean Auto Clean defaults to Disabled. For Auto Clean to function, a cleaning X X
Enabled cartridge (CLNxxxLx) must be resident in a reserved library slot and
Auto Clean must be enabled (turned on).
Note: If Auto Clean is enabled, and a cleaning cartridge is not resident in
a reserved slot, the Auto Clean Status field in the web System Status
screen will post a "Chk Media/Rsvd Slot" message.
Bar Code Label The default bar code label length is 8, but can be set to 6. The bar code X X
Length Reported label length is a "reported" length. This setting will cause the host
To Host computer to only see the first 6 characters of the label or all 8 characters.
This setting does not affect the bar code label that is shown on any of the
library user interfaces (always shows all 8 characters).

Table 5-11. Configure Library: Specific page elements

Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Library Mode Choices are Random and Sequential. If you choose Sequential, you may X X
also activate Autoload and/or Loop. If there is more than one logical
library, there is a Library Mode entry for each logical library.
Important: If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than
one drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-43

Table 5-11. Configure Library: Specific page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Active Slots It may be necessary to modify the number of active slots to agree with X X
the number of slots allowed by your host software. To modify the
number of active slots in your library, click on the drop down list and
select the number of slots you want active in your library. Also, the Auto
Clean function requires the cleaning cartridge to be in a DCS or reserved
slot. Reserved slots are created by reducing the number of active slots.

Figure 5-35. The 4U library Configure Library: General and Extended page

Configure Library: Logical Libraries

To partition your multi-drive library, select the number of logical libraries you
would like to create in your library, then click Submit.

One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries. If you partition
a multi-drive library, each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library
on a magazine boundary. The entire magazine must be part of one logical library
only. In a fully populated 4U library with four logical libraries, resource
assignments will be as follows:
v Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazines.
v Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazines.
v Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine.

The I/O Station and the reserved slot (or dedicated cleaning slot (DCS) if one is
assigned) are shared among all logical libraries.

5-44 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Note: When reducing the number of drives in your library, update the Logical
Library configuration. This will remove the Attention LED on the front
panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive
is missing.

Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element
addressing and drive numbering. Replacing LTO half high drives with full high
drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the
drive element addressing and drive numbering. See “Configure Library:
Save/Restore” on page 5-56.

a77ug098
Figure 5-36. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical Libraries page

Configure Library: Path Failover

This page allows the user to enter the Path Failover feature activation key
| (Supported on 4U library only for library firmware levels at or below 8.xx.
| Supported on both the 2U and 4U libraries with library firmware levels above 8.xx)
Path Failover is a combination of two previous features: Control Path Failover (key
entered at the library user interface) and Data Path Failover (key entered at the
device driver interface). A single activation key entered at the library user interface
now activates both features unless the LTO-3 drive firmware level is equal to or
lower than 73P5 and/or the library firmware is equal to or lower than 1.95. For
either or both of these two cases, the device driver interface Data Path Failover key
| activation will still be required. For library firmware levels below 8.xx the Path
Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives, and Path Failover is not
| supported for Half High drives. Library firmware levels higher than 8.xx support
| Path Failover on LTO 5 Full High and Half High drives, as well as LTO 4 Full
| High and Half High drives.
a77ug117

Figure 5-37. The 4U library Configure Library: Path Failover page

Enter the Feature Activation key and click Activate. This page will display if you
have entered the feature key correctly.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-45

Figure 5-38. Path Failover license verification page

Configure Library: Encryption

Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a license key.
Library Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME)
require a license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5900.In
addition to the feature license key, SME and LME require the
implementation of an external Encryption Key Manager (EKM), to provide
and manage encryption keys. With AME, encryption key management is
handled by the application.

Important: The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support use
only. These fields should always be set to "No Advanced Setting".

Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption:

v SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive (Full High or Half High)
v Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge
v Library firmware level 4.0 or higher
v Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher
v Application capable of managing encryption keys.

Note: At the publication of this manual, the only application with this capability
is Tivoli Storage Manager.

Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption and System Managed Encryption

v Feature Code 5900 (Transparent LTO Encryption)
v SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive (Full High or Half High)
v Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge
v Library firmware level 4.0 or higher
v Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher
v Encryption Key Manager application
EKM applications include the following:
– Encryption Key Manager (EKM)
– Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager (TKLM)
Unless specifically stated otherwise, this manual will use the term "EKM" to
infer the Encryption Key Manager or the Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager.

Setting or Changing a Drive's Method of Encryption

5-46 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1. Enter your library's IP Address in an internet browser address field and press
ENTER.
2. Log in to the Web User Interface. Refer to “Login” on page 2-5.
3. Expand Configure Library in the left navigation pane.
4. Click Encryption.

a77ug199
Figure 5-39. Feature Activation Key screen

5. On the Encryption screen, enter the Feature Activation Key to enable the
library managed and the system managed encryption options.
6. Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption
settings.

Figure 5-40. Configure Library: Encryption Feature configuration screen

7. Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the Encryption
Key Manager application.
8. Select an Encryption method, from the pull down menu, for each logical
library.
v Without an encryption license key, select None or Application Managed
Encryption.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-47

 v With an encryption license key, select Library Managed Encryption or
System Managed Encryption.
9. Select an Encryption policy, from the pull down menu, for each logical
library.
v Encrypt All: This is the default policy. It encrypts all cartridges using the
default data keys specified in the EKM. This setting applies to all drives in
the 3573 logical library.
v Internal Label - Selective Encryption: This policy is based on the internal
volume label information. Currently, the only application that supports this
option is Symantec NetBackup. Only encrypts cartridges with pool
identifiers between 1500 and 9999 (inclusive), using keys specific to each
pool. Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive based on the
pool identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_1505 would be generated for
a cartridge in pool 1505.
v Internal Label - Encrypt All: This policy is based on the internal volume
label information. Currently, the only application that supports this option
is Symantec NetBackup. Encrypts all cartridges. Cartridges with pool
identifiers between 2000 and 65535 (inclusive) are encrypted with keys
specific to each pool. Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive
based on the pool identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_2505 would be
generated for a cartridge in pool 2505.
10. A primary and secondary EKM server can be set for each logical library. Each
partition has its own Encryption and EKM settings. Maintaining primary and
secondary EKM servers is desired for maximum availability of encrypted
backup and recovery. These settings are required for Library Managed
Encryption only. Enter the EKM Server Setting information.
v Primary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the primary
EKM server.
v Primary TCP port: After entering the Primary IP address, the library will
automatically set the value of the Primary TCP port.
v Secondary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the secondary
EKM server.
v Secondary TCP port: After entering the Secondary IP address, the library
will automatically set the value of the Secondary TCP port.

Note: The Default Port for TCP (SSL disabled) is 3801. The Default Port for
SSL is 443. These values are the default values set by the library.
They can be changed depending on the user configuration but the
user has to make sure they match the EKM properties file.

Note: The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support only.
11. Click Submit to apply the changes.
12. Record the Feature Activation Key (or apply one of the labels) on the
Appendix G, “Library Configuration Form,” on page G-1 for future reference.
It is important to save your extra Feature Activation Key labels in a secure
location for future reference.
13. Install the Encryption Key Manager (EKM) application on your host. Refer to
the EKM documentation for detailed instructions (refer to the EKM documents
listed in "Related Publications").

Configure Library: Drives

This page allows you to modify the current ID assigned to a SCSI or Fibre Channel
drive. This page allows any drive in the library to be powered off by de-selecting

5-48 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 the check mark in the Power On box. The displayed information will vary
depending on the library model and drive type (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel).
Table 5-12 lists all available elements on this page. An "X" indicates that the
element displays for the specified drive type.
Table 5-12. Drive Identity page elements
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
SCSI ID For each SCSI drive, click on the drop down list X X
and select the number of the slot in which the
drive is located.
Power On For each drive, click in the box to power ON the X X X X X X
selected drive.
Control Path The control path drive communicates messages X X X X X X
from the host to the library. Select this option for
each drive that you want to be a control path
drive. At least one drive in each logical library
must be designated as a control path drive.
Port A Configuration:
Speed For each Fibre Channel drive, click on the drop X X
down list and select Automatic, 1Gb/s, 2Gb/s, 4
| Gb/s, or 8 Gb/s. Selecting Automatic will allow
library speed to automatically negotiate to the
current server speed.
Topology For each Fibre Channel drive, click LN-Port, X X
L-Port, or N-Port.
FC-AL Loop This is the loop position number if the drive is in X X
ID an arbitrated loop configuration.
Port B Configuration:
Port B is supported for SAS full high drives only. X X

a77ug064

Figure 5-41. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 2U library

Chapter 5. Operations 5-49

 Topology

FC-AL Loop ID

a77ug095
Figure 5-42. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 4U library

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configure Library: Network

This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a pop-up box
checks confirms the request.
1. Click Network in the left navigation pane, to display the Network page.

5-50 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug074
Figure 5-43. Configure Library: Network Page

Important: Do not click the Submit button until all changes have been made
to the Network page. Once the Submit button has been clicked, no
other changes can be made until after the library has applied the
current changes.

After the Submit button has been clicked, depending on the

changes made, you will either be disconnected and need to login
again or reboot the library.

Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the page and any changes
made will not be retained.
2. Select a Protocol Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or Dual Stack IPv4 &
IPv6.
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both
IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses. The sections below will gray out depending on
the choices made here.
3. Enter the Host Name.
4. Enter the Domain Name.
5. DNS Primary - Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server.
6. DNS Secondary - Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server.
7. Enable SSL for Web - If you desire to have SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
enabled, place a check in this box.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-51

 Note: If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User
Interface, you can install the certificate or allow an exception
(depending on the internet browser you are using). SSL is enabled
when the URL begins with https:// and some browsers will show a
lock.
8. Ethernet Settings - Ethernet Settings choices are: Auto (the default), 10
Mbit/Half, 10 Mbit/Full, 100 Mbit/Half, 100 Mbit/Full.
9. Enter IPv4 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library
automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv4 address. The format of an IPv4 IP
address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by
periods.
c. Network Mask - Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask.
d. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address. This address
allows access outside the local network.
10. Enter IPv6 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library
automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Enable Stateless Auto Config - Click this item ON to have the IP Address
of your library automatically set by the network router.
c. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv6 address. The format of an IPv6 IP
address is a 128-bit numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers
separated by colons.
d. Prefix length - The default prefix length is set to 64, but can be set to any
length, depending upon the address used.
e. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address. This address
allows access outside the local network.
11. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Note: Depending on the changes made, you will either be disconnected and
need to login again, or reboot the library. If a reboot is required, the
following Warning message will appear after the Submit button is
clicked.

Figure 5-44. Warning Screen

The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place.

Configure Library: User Access

This page allows the user to add and modify user accounts. See “Login” on page
2-5 for information on user types.

The Configure Library → User Access page is only accessible to the Admin and
Service login. Access is denied to User and Superuser logins.

5-52 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library →
Advance Diagnostics.

The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library →
Advance Diagnostics.

Figure 5-45. Configure Library: User Access page

The following elements are displayed on the User Access page.

Role The name associated with the chosen Access Level.

Note: Admin can select User, Superuser, and Admin roles. Service can
select User, Superuser, Admin, and Service roles.
Check the Disable Superuser checkbox if you do not want Superuser to
be listed on the Role listbox (i.e. prohibits Superuser login). Check the
Disable User checkbox if you do not want User to be listed on the Role
listbox (i.e. prohibits User login). Uncheck the checkbox(es) to allow
Superuser or User login.
New Password
The password must be a maximum of ten characters .
Repeat Password
Enter the New Password again.
Support name
The name of the individual within your company to contact for Web User
Interface or library support.

Note: Only one support person can be configured for the entire tape
library. The support person may or may not be one of the user,
superuser, or admin account holders.
Support phone
The phone number of the individual within your company to contact for
Web User Interface or library support.
Support email
The email address of the individual within your company to contact for
Web User Interface or library support.

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.
Chapter 5. Operations 5-53
 Configure Library: Date & Time
This page allows the user to set the time and date, and how it will be displayed.

a77ug061
Figure 5-46. The Configure Library: Date & Time page

Time (24H)
Using a 24-hour format, enter the current hour, minutes, and seconds.
Date Enter the current month, day, and year.

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configure Library: Logs & Traces

This page allows service personnel to set the error log mode to Continuous or to
Stop trace at first error.

Figure 5-47. Configure Library: Logs & Traces page

It is recommended that you select Continuous for the Error Log Mode so that all
information for logs and traces will be captured.

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Note: The trace level and trace filter selection options are only changeable by
Service personnel.

5-54 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Configure Library: Email Notification
This page allows the user to enter information for email notification. When set up
correctly, Email Notification allows the library to send an email to a designated
individual when the library is experiencing a problem.

a77ug065
Figure 5-48. Configure Library: Email Notification page

The following elements are displayed on the Email Notification page.

Notify Errors
Select this item to be notified of library errors via email.
Notify Warnings
Select this item to be notified of library warnings via email.
To Email Address
Enter the email address of the individual you would like to receive the
errors and/or warnings.
SMTP Server Address (IPv4 or IPv6)
Enter the address of the email server of the individual you would like to
receive the errors and/or warnings. This can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address,
or a host name and domain. If a host name and domain is listed, the IPv4
or IPv6 address will be resolved from the DNS using that name, and the
address will be stored rather than the name. If the address changes, a new
name or a new address will need to be entered.
Domain Name
Enter the Domain Name for your library. This field cannot be blank when
using email notification.

Note: If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name, a
warning message will appear. It will say If you are using Email
Notification then a value is required for the Domain Name.

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configure Library: SNMP

This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a pop-up box
checks to confirm the changes.
1. Click SNMP in the left navigation pane, to display the SNMP page.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-55

 a77ug278
Figure 5-49. Configure Library: SNMP Page

2. Enter SNMP settings.

Note: For more information on SNMP, refer to “SNMP Messaging” on page 1-6
and Appendix F, “SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps,” on page F-1.
a. Enabled - Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to a SNMP Management
console(s).
b. Target 1-IP Address - If SNMP traps are enabled, enter an IP address where
SNMP traps are to be sent.
c. Target 2-IP Address - Enter an optional 2nd IP address where SNMP traps
are to be sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
d. Target 3-IP Address - Enter an optional 3rd IP address where SNMP traps
are to be sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
e. Version - The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol; v1, v2 and
v3. Select a version for each Target IP Address.
f. Community Name - An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as
a password to authenticate messages sent between the SNMP remote
management application and the library. Enter your preferred name, or leave
as “public”.
| g. Audit Logging - If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled, the
| library will send SNMP traps to an SNMP Management console(s) when the
| library or tape drive configuration has changed.

| Note: This option is only available if the library firmware is 9.00 or higher,
| and the latest library MIB file has been added to the SNMP
| Management console.
3. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configure Library: Save/Restore

This page allows the library configuration to be reset to the factory defaults.

For information on factory default settings, see “Configure: Save/Restore” on page

5-27. Be aware that when you restore your library to factory defaults, all
configuration data in the library will be lost and will need to be reestablished.
Feature Activation Keys will be retained.

5-56 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Saving and restoring configuration data can be done using the Remote
Management Unit (RMU) and/or the Operator Control Panel (OCP). The feature
has been implemented on the RMU and on the OCP, but with slightly different
functionality.

Note: Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be
compatible with other versions of firmware. It is recommended to save a
configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded. Restore the
library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of
firmware currently installed in the library.

Since the RMU can be accessed remotely, its implementation will save/restore the
configuration data to/from a file on the host site. When entering commands on the
OCP, the unit is accessed directly. For this reason the OCP implementation will
save/restore the configuration data to/from a USB memory stick that is inserted
into the USB connector on the library controller.

a77ug079
Figure 5-50. Configure Library: Save/Restore page

Service Library Menu

Some Service Library functions will post a warning message stating that the library
should be taken offline from the host before performing any Service functions. It is
up to the operator to ensure that it is taken offline at the host. Before performing
any service functions, ensure the host is not performing any data writing or
retrieval.

Service Library: Clean Drive

If the library is not configured for Auto Clean, this page allows the user to
manually clean the tape drive.

A drive cleaning should only be performed after the library/drive has posted a
status message indicating Cleaning Required

To manually perform a drive cleaning, perform the following steps:

1. Select a cleaning cartridge listed in the Slot # field.
2. Select a drive listed in the Drive field.
3. Click the Clean button. See Figure 5-53 on page 5-58.

Drives that do not require a cleaning are labeled with No Cleaning Required. See
Figure 5-51 on page 5-58.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-57

 a77ug259
Figure 5-51. No Cleaning Required

If there is no cleaning cartridge in the library, the Clean button can not be selected
and the Slot # will display N.A.. See Figure 5-52

a77ug260
Figure 5-52. No Cleaning Cartridge in Library

Note: If the library is configured for Auto Clean, and a cleaning cartridge is
resident in a reserved slot, the library will automatically load the drive with
a cleaning cartridge. The drive will perform a cleaning and the library will
return the cleaning cartridge to the reserved slot. If Auto Clean is enabled
and a cleaning cartridge is not present in a reserved slot, Auto Clean status
on the Web User Interface Status screen will show Chk Media/Rsvd Slot.

a77ug122
Figure 5-53. Service Library: Clean Drive page

Service Library: Advanced Diagnostics (for Service Personnel

Only)
This menu is for use by IBM Authorized Service Personnel only. Refer to “Before
You Begin” on page A-2.

Service Library: View Logs

This page allows the library logs to be viewed after entering the following:
v Log Type
– Error Trace: Logs all the error messages
– Informational Trace: Logs all the informational messages created as the
library operates
– Warning Trace: Logs all warning messages created by the library. Warning
messages will not stop a library's operation but does remind the user of
issues that may become a problem. Example: Invalid Media.
– Configuration Change Trace: Logs any configuration changes made, such as
changing/adding partitions, changing SCSI addresses, removing a DCS, etc.
– Standard Trace: Logs all library operations

Note: Ensure that all the pop-up facilities on the web browser are set to enable
pop-up boxes to appear. For example, on Microsoft Internet Explorer,
under Tools, ensure that the Pop-up Blocker is turned OFF and Internet

5-58 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Options → Security → Custom Level → Downloads → Automatic
Promptingfor file Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled.
v Total Number of Entries
v Start Entry
v Number of Entries per Page
v View
v Clear Log - Clears the log you are viewing
v Dump Log - Dumps the log you are viewing
v Save Service Dump - Creates a DPA (Dump All) log output that can be viewed
or saved to a file

<Prev | Next> buttons appear if the number of logs entries exceeds the number of
entries per page. Click <Prev | Next> to index through the log entries. The 'Next'
button will not be displayed if the log has more fewer entries than the '# of entries
per page' setting. After clicking the 'Next' button, the 'Prev' button will be
displayed. If the log entries fit on a single page the <Prev | Next> buttons do not
appear.

a77ug120
Figure 5-54. Service Library: View Logs page

Service Library: View Drive Logs

This page allows the drive logs to be viewed after selecting the following:
v Log Type
– Error: Logs drive error code information.
– SCSI: Logs ASC/ASCQ and FSC information.
v Additional Sense Code (ASC)
v Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
v Fault Symptom Code (FSC)

Chapter 5. Operations 5-59

 a77ug096
Figure 5-55. Service Library: View Drive Logs screen

Service Library: Save Drive Dump

This menu item allows a drive dump to be saved to the host computer. Select the
drive. Then click Save Drive Dump. Once the Save Drive Dump button is clicked,
the user will have the option of saving the drive dump to their hard drive. The
progress status for the drive dump is shown on the System Status screen to the
right of the main Web User Interface screen.

Note: Ensure that all the pop-up facilities on the web browser are set to enable
pop-up boxes to appear. For example on the Microsoft Internet Explorer,
under Tools, ensure that the Pop-up Blocker is turned OFF and Internet
Options -> Security -> Custom Level -> Downloads -> Automatic
Prompting for file Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled.
Once saved on the hard drive, it can be e-mailed to Tech Support for analysis, if
needed.

Note: The dump may take as long as 20 minutes to complete. The System Status
portion of the screen shows "Drive Dump in Progress" with the number of
KBs transferred.

Figure 5-56. Service: Save Drive Dump

Service Library: Perform Diagnostics

Note: When running the "System Test", the library must contain at least the same
number of data cartridges as there are drives in that library. For example, if
your library has 4 drives installed, you must have 4 or more data cartridges
in the library prior to the start of the test. If there are fewer data cartridges
than drives in the library, an error message "Slot Empty" will occur, and the
test will not complete successfully. The media type must be compatible with
the drive type. Otherwise, an error message "Incompatible Media" will occur
and the test will fail.

5-60 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 This page provides the system administrator with general tests to verify the
usability and reliability of the library. The "System Test" will use resident data
cartridges to test the load and unload capability of the drives, and ensure that the
library mechanics are working satisfactorily. No data will be written to the
cartridges and the cartridges will be returned to their normal slot location. The
"Slot To Slot" test will move each resident data cartridge from one slot to another,
for each test cycle requested. When completing the "Slot To Slot" test, you will
need to Inventory your library before placing it back online, since this test
scrambles the cartridge slot locations.

The user selects the number of test cycles before starting the test from the
EXECUTE button. To cancel the test before it completes the cycles, select the STOP
button.

Note: The Web User Interface System Status screen will indicate progress and
completion of the activity.

a77ug075
Figure 5-57. Service Library: Perform Diagnostics page

The first field can be modified to set the number of cycles. The second field
displays the cycles completed.

Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics

Important: Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before
running the Key Path Diagnostic. Library firmware level must be
greater than 6.xx. See “Verifying/Updating Firmware” on page 4-22.

The key path diagnostics test provides the ability to perform diagnostics on the
encryption key path. Only drives that are set up for library managed encryption
will be tested. Only encryption capable drives in logical libraries that are
configured for Library Managed Encryption will be tested. To configure the library
for encryption, refer to “Configure Library: Encryption” on page 5-46.

The test consists of four parts:

v Drive Test: The library performs a drive communication test to confirm
communication with the drive.
v Ethernet Test: For each EKM IP address, the library performs a ping test and
records the results.
v EKM Path Test: For each EKM IP address that passed the ping test, the library
performs an EKM communication test.
v EKM Config Test: This test confirms that a drive is correctly configured in the
EKM to service key requests.

To run the Key Path Diagnostic, complete the following procedure.

1. Log on to the Web User Interface. Refer to “Login” on page 2-5.
2. Quiesce all drives, then unload all drives.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-61

 3. Click Service Library, then Key Path Diagnostics.

a77ug193
Figure 5-58. Service Library: Perform Key Path Diagnostics page

4. Click Start Tests.

Note: If you have just enabled encryption on your library, wait for all LME
drives to be displayed in the table and the Start Tests button to become
active.

Each test will show a result of "Passed" or "Failed". If a test fails the remaining
tests will not be executed, and the test will show a result of "N/A". The IP Address
may show "N/A" for the following reasons:
1. Drive is not encryption capable.
2. EKM Server Settings, on the Configure Library → Encryption page, are not
configured correctly.
Test results will clear:
v When the test is rerun
v When the library is rebooted
The time and date of the last test will appear below the Key Path Diagnostics
screen. If any of the tests fail, refer to Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting,” on page 7-1 for
additional information.

Service Library: Upgrade Firmware

Note: The IBM System Storage™ TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a
customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and
maintenance of the tape library. The customer will be charged for service if a
service contract is not in place.

Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together.
When updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed components
such as tape drive(s), and library are at the latest levels noted on the
Support web site. Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware
is not supported and may cause unpredictable results.

This page displays the current library and drive firmware versions. Firmware can
be downloaded to the host then uploaded to the drive or library by using this
page.

Click Browse... to choose the firmware file you have downloaded from the web
site (the web site is http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/) for the library or drive
you want to update. (You can update only one device at a time). Be sure you

5-62 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 choose the correct firmware for the library or drive type. Click the Update button
to initiate the file transfer and firmware update.

Note: During the update no host drive action is possible. The drive update takes
approximately 5 minutes. The system status panel (in the right of the
browser window) will change from "update" to "ready".

If incompatible firmware is transferred to the library or drive the Update function

| will terminate with a message indicating incompatible firmware. If the library has
| a BCR (Barcode Reader) that requires 9.00 or greater firmware, the Update function
| will terminate with a message indicating the library requires firmware 9.00 or
| higher.

a77ug081
Figure 5-59. The 2U library Service Library: Upgrade Firmware page

a77ug097

Figure 5-60. The 4U library Service Library: Upgrade Firmware page

Service Library: Reboot

Important: Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE. This
inactive mode can interfere with host-based application software,
Chapter 5. Operations 5-63
 causing data loss. Ensure that the library is idle before attempting to
perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE.

This page is used to perform a library reboot. There is a default time delay when
the Web User Interface page refreshes itself. This time should be sufficient to
reload the page. However, during a reboot, the connection to the library may be
lost. If the connection is lost, the user will have to reload the page manually.

Click the Reboot button to initiate the reboot.

a77ug077
Figure 5-61. Service Library: Reboot page

Import and Export Media during Normal Library Operation

Import Media

Data cartridges can be inserted and taken out of a magazine while the library is in
operation. If the library contains an I/O Station, and you wish to import media,
follow these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control → Open I/O Station. The I/O Station
will unlock itself.
2. Pull out the magazine and insert a data cartridge(s) into the I/O Station. On a
2U library, only 1 cartridge can be inserted at a time. On the 4U library, 3
cartridges can be inserted at one time.
3. Close the door of the I/O Station. The library will automatically start an
inventory. The cartridges in the I/O Station will be counted but unassigned
until they are moved into storage slots.
4. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control → Move Cartridges and move the
data cartridges into the desired data slots. See “Control: Move Cartridges” on
page 5-16 or “Manage Library: Move Media” on page 5-41 for more
information.

If the library does not have an I/O Station (all slots are assigned to storage), and
you wish to import media, you will need to release a magazine and insert the
cartridges manually following these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control → Magazine. Choose the desired
magazine to unlock/remove.
2. Pull out the magazine and insert a data cartridge(s) into the empty slots.
3. Push the magazine back into the library. The library will automatically start an
inventory.
4. To move cartridges in the magazine once they are inserted, from the OCP Main
Menu, select Control → Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the
desired slots. See “Control: Move Cartridges” on page 5-16 or “Manage Library:
Move Media” on page 5-41 for more information.

Note: If you run a library configuration backup program on your host

computer, use the program to run an audit of the library after new
cartridges have been added to update the backup program.

5-64 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Export Media

To remove cartridges from your library using your I/O Station, follow these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control → Move Cartridges and move the
data cartridges into the I/O Station. See “Control: Move Cartridges” on page
5-16 or “Manage Library: Move Media” on page 5-41 for more information.
2. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control → Open I/O Station. The I/O Station
will unlock itself
3. Pull out the magazine and take the data cartridge(s) out of the I/O Station
4. Push the magazine back into the library. The library will automatically start an
inventory of the I/O station.

If you do not have an I/O Station (all slots are assigned to storage), and wish to
export media, you will need to release a magazine and take out the cartridges
manually following these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control → Magazine. Choose the magazine
you wish to unlock/remove.
2. Pull out the magazine and remove the desired data cartridge(s).
3. Push the magazine back into the library. The library will automatically start an
inventory.

Note: If you run a library configuration backup program on your host

computer, use the program to run an audit of the library after cartridges
have been removed to update the backup program.

Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots

2U libraries usually have 1 slot for an I/O Station, while 4U libraries have 3 slots
assigned as an I/O Station. These slots can be configured as storage if needed.

To configure the I/O Station using the Web User Interface, follow these steps.
v Go to Configure Library->General.
v To enable the I/O Station, place a check mark in the I/O Station Enabled box. If
it is checked as enabled, the first 3 physical slots in the lower left magazine in a
4U or the first physical slot in the left magazine in a 2U is configured as an I/O
station. If the I/O Station Enabled box is not checked, the slots are configured as
storage.

Note: The number of I/O Station slots and storage are automatically assigned
when the I/O Station Enabled box is checked or unchecked.

Dedicated Cleaning Slot

Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS). This
DCS can be retained and is supported by future library firmware updates. Library
firmware after 1.95 will allow removal of the DCS, thus enabling this slot to be
used as a storage slot.

To remove the DCS, perform the following procedures using the Operator Control
Panel (OCP).
1. Navigate to the Library Settings (Logical Library Settings) screen Configure >
Library Settings (or Logical Library Settings.
2. Select General.

Chapter 5. Operations 5-65

 3. Scroll down to Remove DCS.
4. Select No or Yes.
5. Select Save then press the Enter button.

Attention: If your library originally contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot and was
removed, it can only be reinstated by restoring factory default settings.

To enable automatic cleaning of the drives when needed, a slot must be reserved, a
cleaning cartridge must be present in the reserved slot, and Auto Clean must be
enabled.

Reserving Slots

Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any

particular logical library. Slots are reserved beginning with the last available slot in
the last magazine of the library. A cleaning cartridge in a reserved slot is available
to any logical library drive even if the reserved slot is not in that logical library.
Typically, if the library contains multiple logical libraries, the last logical library is
chosen for the reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge. As with a library
with a single logical library, this slot is the last physical slot in the library (top
right magazine, uppermost rear slot).

Note: Configure the required number of reserved slots prior to enabling Auto
Clean.

To reserve a cleaning slot, follow these steps.

v To reserve slots in your library, go to the Web User Interface at “Choosing
General Library Settings” on page 4-23 or the Operator Control Panel at
“Configure: Library” on page 5-20 to get directions on reducing the Active slot
count.

5-66 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media
To ensure that your IBM Ultrium Tape Drive conforms to IBM's specifications for
reliability, use only IBM LTO Ultrium tape cartridges. You may use other
LTO-certified data cartridges, but they may not meet the standards of reliability
| that are established by IBM. The IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge cannot
be interchanged with the media used in other IBM non-LTO Ultrium tape
products.

| Figure 6-1 shows the IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge and its
components.

1 LTO cartridge memory 4 Write-protect Switch

2 Cartridge door 5 Label area
3 Leader Pin 6 Insertion guide

| Figure 6-1. The IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge

| Note: The same components are on all the other IBM LTO Ultrium Data
| Cartridges.

Data Cartridges
The different generations of IBM Ultrium data cartridges can be identified by color:

Type Color
| Ultrium 5 Burgundy
| Ultrium 5 WORM Burgundy and Silvery gray
Ultrium 4 Green
Ultrium 4 WORM Green and Silvery gray
Ultrium 3 Slate Blue
Ultrium 3 WORM Slate Blue and Silvery gray
Ultrium 2 Purple

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 6-1

 Type Color
Ultrium 1 Black

All generations contain 1/2-inch, dual-coat, metal-particle tape.

You can order tape cartridges with the bar code labels included, or you can order
custom labels. To obtain tape cartridges and bar code labels, see “Ordering Media
Supplies” on page 6-19.

When processing tape in the cartridges, Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear,
serpentine recording format. The native data capacity and recording format of
Ultrium data cartridges is as follows:

Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format

| Ultrium 5 1500 GB (3000 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 1280
compression) tracks, sixteen tracks at a time
Ultrium 4 800 GB (1600 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 896
compression) tracks, sixteen tracks at a time.
Ultrium 3 400 GB (800 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 704
compression) tracks, sixteen tracks at a time
Ultrium 2 200 GB (400 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 512
compression) tracks, eight tracks at a time
Ultrium 1 100 GB (200 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 384
compression) tracks, eight tracks at a time

| The first set of tracks (sixteen for Ultrium 5, 4 and 3) is written from near the
beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape. The head then repositions to the
next set of tracks for the return pass. This process continues until all tracks are
written and the cartridge is full, or until all data is written.

The cartridge door 2 protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge is
out of the drive. The tape is attached to a leader pin 3, behind the door. When
the cartridge is inserted into the drive, a threading mechanism pulls the pin (and
tape) out of the cartridge, across the drive head, and onto a non-removable take-up
reel. The head can then read or write data from or to the tape.

The write-protect switch 4 prevents data from being written to the tape
cartridge. For more information, see “Write-Protect Switch” on page 6-7.

The label area 5 provides a location to place a label. For more information, see
“Bar Code Label” on page 6-5.

The insertion guide 6 is a large, notched area that prevents the cartridge from
being inserted incorrectly.
| Table 6-1. Nominal Cartridge Life: Load/Unload Cycles
| Type Load/Unload Cycles
| Ultrium 5 20,000 (20k)
| Ultrium 4 20,000 (20k)
| Ultrium 3 20,000 (20k)
| Ultrium 2 10,000 (10k)
| Ultrium 1 5000 (5k)

6-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
|

Cartridge Compatibility
Table 6-2. Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive
IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges
IBM Ultrium
| Tape Drive 1500 GB 800 GB 400 GB 200GB 100GB
| (Ultrium 5) (Ultrium 4) (Ultrium 3) (Ultrium 2) (Ultrium 1)
| Ultrium 5 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 4 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 3 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 2 Read/Write Read/Write
Ultrium 1 Read/Write

Capacity Scaling
To control the capacity of the cartridge (for example, to obtain a faster seek time)
issue the SCSI command SET CAPACITY. For information about this command,
refer to the IBM TotalStorage® Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

WORM (Write Once, Read Many)

Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once, Read
| Many (WORM) method for storing data on tape. The LTO Ultrium 5 drive enables
WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive.

WORM Media
Because standard read/write media are incompatible with the WORM feature, a
specially formatted WORM tape cartridge (see Figure 6-2) is required. Each WORM
cartridge has a unique, worldwide cartridge identifier (WWCID), which comprises
the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media serial number.
| Ultrium 5 WORM cartridges are two-tone burgundy and silvery-gray. See
“Ordering Media Supplies” on page 6-19 for information on how to choose and
purchase the appropriate WORM tape cartridges for your library.

|
a67b0024

|
| Figure 6-2. Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges
|
Data Security on WORM Media
Certain built-in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM
cartridge does not become compromised, for example:

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-3

 v The format of an Ultrium 4 800 GB or Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge
is unlike that of standard read/write media. This unique format prevents a drive
that lacks WORM-capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge.
v When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing
or altering of user data already written on the tape. The firmware keeps track of
the last appendable point on the tape.

WORM Media Errors

The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:
v Information in the servo manufacturer's word (SMW) on the tape must match
information from the cartridge memory (CM) module in the cartridge. If it does
not match, a media Error Code 7 will post on the drive's single-character display
(SCD). An error will also be displayed on the Operator Control Panel.
v Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not WORM capable causes
the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drive will report a
media Error Code 7. Upgrading the drive firmware to the correct code level will
resolve the problem.

Requirements for WORM Capability

| To add WORM capability to your LTO Ultrium 5 drive(s), you need to have the
| drive firmware to the correct code level, and use either Ultrium 5 1500 GB WORM
| tape cartridges or Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM tape cartridges (see “Ordering Media
| Supplies” on page 6-19).

Cleaning Cartridge
With each library, a specially labeled IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge is
supplied to clean the drive head. The drive itself determines when a head needs to
be cleaned. It alerts you by lighting the "Clean Drive" (amber LED) above the
library Operator Control Panel. To clean the head manually, insert a cleaning
cartridge into the tape load compartment (see “Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge”
on page 4-42). The drive performs the cleaning automatically. When the cleaning is
finished, the drive ejects the cartridge, and the library turns the "Clean Drive" LED
off. Some libraries have an Auto Clean function which, when enabled, will prompt
the library to retrieve the cleaning cartridge that resides in the library, insert it in
the drive that needs cleaning, clean the drive, then return the cleaning cartridge to
its home slot.

Note: The drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge.

The IBM Cleaning Cartridges are valid for 50 uses. The cartridge's LTO-CM chip
tracks the number of times that the cartridge is used.

Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM)

All generations of the IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges include a Linear
Tape-Open Cartridge Memory (LTO-CM) chip (1 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1), that
contains information about the cartridge and the tape (such as the name of the
manufacturer that created the tape), as well as statistical information about the
cartridge's use. The LTO-CM enhances the efficiency of the cartridge. For example,
the LTO-CM stores the end-of-data location which, when the next time this
cartridge is inserted and the Write command is issued, enables the drive to quickly
locate the recording area and begin recording. The LTO-CM also aids in
determining the reliability of the cartridge by storing data about its age, how many

6-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 times it has been loaded, and how many errors it has accumulated. Whenever a
tape cartridge is unloaded, the tape drive writes any pertinent information to the
cartridge memory.

| The storage capacity of the LTO Generation 4 and 5 LTO-CM is 8160 bytes. LTO
Generations 1, 2, and 3 have an LTO-CM capacity of 4096 bytes.

Bar Code Label

A bar code label contains:
v A volume serial number (VOLSER) that is human-readable
v A bar code that the library can read

| Note: The IBM LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Drive does not require bar code labels, but
| you may choose to use labels for tape cartridge identification purposes.
| Table 6-3. Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries
| Ultrium Tape Drive/Library Bar Code Label Requirements
| 3573 Required
| 3576 Required
| 3580 Not required
| 3581 Required with optional Bar Code Reader
| 3582 Required
| 3583 Required
| 3584 Required
|

When read by a library's bar code reader, the bar code identifies the cartridge's
VOLSER to the library. The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a
data cartridge or cleaning cartridge. In addition, the bar code includes the
| two-character media-type identifier Lx, where x equals 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. L identifies
the cartridge as an LTO cartridge and the number represents the generation of
cartridge for that cartridge type. Figure 6-3 on page 6-6 shows a sample bar code
label for the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge.

Tape cartridges can be ordered with the labels included or with custom labels. To
order tape cartridges and bar code labels, see “Ordering Media Supplies” on page
6-19. The bar code for usage in LTO tape libraries must meet predefined
specifications. They include (but are not limited to):
v Six or eight (the default) uppercase alphanumeric characters, where the last two
| characters must be L5, L4, L3, L2, or L1.
v Label and printing to be non-glossy
v Nominal narrow line or space width of 0.423 mm (0.017 in.)
v Wide to narrow ratio of 2.75:1
v Minimum bar length of 11.1 mm (0.44 in.)
| Table 6-4. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium Tape Drives
| Cartridges VOLSER
| Ultrium 5 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL5
| Ultrium 5 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLV
| Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL4

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-5

| Table 6-4. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium Tape Drives (continued)
| Cartridges VOLSER
| Ultrium 4 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLU
| Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL3
| Ultrium 3 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLT
| Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL2
| Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge (READ ONLY) xxxxxxL1
| IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge CLNxxxLx
| *An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to be
| compatible with the WORM cartridge.
|
To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label,
visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto, (select LTO Support), or contact
your IBM Sales Representative.

When attaching a bar code label to a tape cartridge, place the label only in the
recessed label area (see 4 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1). A label that extends outside
of the recessed area can cause loading problems in the drive.

Attention: Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the
bar code. A mark in this area may prevent the library from reading the label.

L T O 1 2 3 L5

a69i0349

Figure 6-3. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge. The volume serial number (LTO123) and bar
code are printed on the label.

Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels

Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels:
v Use only IBM-approved bar code labels on cartridges to be used in an IBM tape
library.
v Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label.
v Before you apply a new label, remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a
right angle to the cartridge case.
v Use peel-clean labels that do not leave a residue after being removed. If there is
glue residue on the cartridge, remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger.
Do not use a sharp object, water, or a chemical to clean the label area.
v Examine the label before applying it to the cartridge. Do not use the label if it
has voids or smears in the printed characters or bar code (a library's inventory
operation will take much longer if the bar code label is not readable).

6-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v Remove the label from the label sheet carefully. Do not stretch the label or cause
the edges to curl.
v Position the label within the recessed label area (see 5 in Figure 6-1 on page
6-1).
v With light finger pressure, smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist
on its surface.
v Verify that the label is smooth and parallel, and has no roll-up or roll-over. The
label must be flat to within 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) over the length of the label and
have no folds, missing pieces, or smudges.
v Do not place other machine-readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge.
They may interfere with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge.

Write-Protect Switch
The position of the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge (see 1) determines
whether you can write to the tape. If the switch is set to:

v The locked position (solid red), data cannot be written to the tape.
v The unlocked position (black void), data can be written to the tape.

If possible, use your server's application software to write-protect your cartridges

(rather than manually setting the write-protect switch). This allows the server's
software to identify a cartridge that no longer contains current data and is eligible
to become a scratch (blank) data cartridge. Do not write-protect scratch (blank)
cartridges; the tape drive will not be able to write new data to them.

If you must manually set the write-protect switch, slide it left or right to the
desired position.

A67E0026

Figure 6-4. Setting the write-protect switch

Table 6-5. Location of the write-protect switch

1 Write-Protect Switch

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-7

Handling the Cartridges
Attention: Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive. A damaged
cartridge can interfere with the reliability of a drive and may void the warranties
of the drive and the cartridge. Before inserting a tape cartridge, inspect the
cartridge case, cartridge door, and write-protect switch for breaks.

Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their

magnetic tape. To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the
continued high reliability of your IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drives, use the following
guidelines:

Provide Training
v Post procedures that describe proper media handling in places where people
gather.
v Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and
shipping procedures. This includes operators, users, programmers, archival
services, and shipping personnel.
v Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are
properly trained in media-handling procedures.
v Include media-handling procedures as part of any services contract.
v Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures.

Ensure Proper Packaging

v When shipping a cartridge, use the original or better packaging.
v Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case.
v Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in
its jewel case during transportation. Ultrium Turtlecases (by Perm-A-Store) have
been tested and found to be satisfactory (see Figure 6-5). They are available at
http://www.turtlecase.com.

Figure 6-5. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase

6-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope. Always place it in a
box or package.
v If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material, ensure
the following:
– Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from
dust, moisture, and other contaminants.
– Pack the cartridge snugly; do not allow it to move around.
– Double-box the cartridge (place it inside a box, then place that box inside the
shipping box) and add padding between the two boxes (see Figure 6-6).

Figure 6-6. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping

Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions

v Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will
vary, depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was
exposed).
v Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it.
v Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
v Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater
than 100 oersteds (for example, terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray
equipment, or fields that exist near high-current cables or power supplies). Such
exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge
unusable.
v Maintain the conditions that are described in “Environmental and Shipping
Specifications for Tape Cartridges” on page 6-17.

Perform a Thorough Inspection

After purchasing a cartridge and before using it, perform the following steps:
v Inspect the cartridge's packaging to determine potential rough handling.
v When inspecting a cartridge, open only the cartridge door. Do not open any
other part of the cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held
together with screws; separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
v Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it.

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-9

 v Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that loads first into the tape load
compartment) and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge
case (see 1 in Figure 6-7 and 4 in Figure 6-9 on page 6-12). If there are gaps
in the seam (see Figure 6-7), the leader pin may be dislodged. Go to
“Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 6-11.

Figure 6-7. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge

v Check that the leader pin is properly seated (see 2 in Figure 6-8 on page 6-12).
v If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable,
copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery.
Discard the mishandled cartridge.
v Review handling and shipping procedures.

Handle the Cartridge Carefully

v Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back
and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin-retaining spring clips
(see 2 in Figure 6-8 on page 6-12). If the leader pin has become dislodged, go
to “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 6-11.
v Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage
the tape's surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write reliability.
Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake
mechanism in the cartridge.
v Do not stack more than six cartridges.
v Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape
unusable.

Examples of Cartridge Problems

Example: Split Cartridge Case (see Figure 6-7)

The cartridge's case is damaged. There is a high possibility of media damage and
potential loss. Perform the following steps:

6-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1. Look for cartridge mishandling.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly
seat the pin (see “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin”). Then,
immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss.
3. Review media-handling procedures.

Example: Improper Placement of Leader Pin (see Figure 6-8 on page 6-12)

The leader pin is misaligned. Perform the following steps:

1. Look for cartridge damage.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly
seat the pin (see “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin”). Then,
immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss.

Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin

Attention: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to
another cartridge. Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties
of the drive and the cartridge.

If the leader pin in your cartridge becomes dislodged from its pin-retaining spring
clips or detaches from the tape, you must use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment
Kit (part number 08L9129) to reposition or reattach it. (Do not reattach the pin if
you must remove more than seven meters (23 feet) of leader tape.) The sections
that follow describe each procedure.

Attention: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to
another cartridge. Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties
of the drive and the cartridge.

Repositioning a Leader Pin

A leader pin that is improperly seated inside a cartridge can interfere with the
operation of the drive. Figure 6-8 on page 6-12 shows a leader pin in the incorrect
1 and correct 2 positions.

To place the leader pin in its proper position, you will need the following tools:
v Plastic or blunt-end tweezers
v Cartridge manual rewind tool (from Leader Pin Reattachment Kit, part number
08L9129)

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-11

Figure 6-8. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions. The cartridge door is open and the leader pin is visible
inside the cartridge.

To reposition the leader pin, perform the following steps.

1. Slide open the cartridge door (1 in Figure 6-9) and locate the leader pin 2
(you may need to shake the cartridge gently to roll the pin toward the door).
2. With plastic or blunt-end tweezers, grasp the leader pin and position it in the
pin-retaining spring clips 3.
3. Press the leader pin gently into the clips until it snaps into place and is firmly
seated.
4. Close the cartridge door.

Figure 6-9. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position. The cartridge door is open to show the leader
pin.

6-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 5. To rewind the tape, insert the cartridge manual rewind tool (1 in Figure 6-10)
into the cartridge's hub 2 and turn it clockwise until the tape becomes taut.

Figure 6-10. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge

6. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge.

7. If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears useable,
copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery.
Discard the mishandled cartridge.

Reattaching a Leader Pin

The first meter of tape in a cartridge is leader tape. Once the leader tape has been
removed there is a possibility of tape breakage. After reattaching the leader pin,
transfer data from the defective tape cartridge. Do not reuse the defective tape
cartridge.

The Leader Pin Reattachment Kit contains three parts:

v Leader pin attach tool (see 1 in Figure 6-11 on page 6-14). A plastic brace that
holds the cartridge door open.
v Cartridge manual rewind tool (see 2 in Figure 6-11 on page 6-14). A device
that fits into the cartridge's hub and lets you wind the tape into and out of the
cartridge.
v Pin supplies (see 3 in Figure 6-11 on page 6-14). Leader pins and C-clips.

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-13

 Attention:
v Use only the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit to reattach the leader pin to the
tape. Other methods of reattaching the pin will damage the tape, the drive, or
both.
v Use this procedure on your tape cartridge only when the leader pin detaches
from the magnetic tape and you must copy the cartridge's data onto another
cartridge. Destroy the damaged cartridge after you copy the data. This
procedure may affect the performance of the leader pin during threading and
unloading operations.
v Touch only the end of the tape. Touching the tape in an area other than the end
can damage the tape's surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write
reliability.

Figure 6-11. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit A67E0042

The following procedure describes how to reattach a leader pin.

To reattach a leader pin by using the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit:
1. Attach the leader pin attach tool (1 in Figure 6-12 on page 6-15) to the
cartridge 2 so that the tool's hook 3 latches into the cartridge's door 4.
Pull the tool back to hold the door open, then slide the tool onto the cartridge.
Open the tool's pivot arm 5.

6-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Figure 6-12. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge. To hold the cartridge door open, hook the tool into the
door and pull the tool back.

2. To find the end of the tape inside the cartridge, attach the cartridge manual
rewind tool (1 in Figure 6-13 on page 6-16) to the cartridge's hub 2 by
fitting the tool's teeth between the teeth of the hub. Turn the tool clockwise
until you see the end of the tape inside the cartridge. Then, slowly turn the
rewind tool counterclockwise to bring the tape edge toward the cartridge door
3.
3. Continue to turn the rewind tool counterclockwise until approximately 13 cm
(5 in.) of tape hangs from the cartridge door. If necessary, grasp the tape and
pull gently to unwind it from the cartridge.
4. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge. Set the tool
and the cartridge aside.

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-15

Figure 6-13. Winding the tape out of the cartridge. Turn the cartridge manual rewind tool clockwise to see the end of
the tape, then turn it counterclockwise to bring the tape to the cartridge door.

5. On the leader pin (1 in Figure 6-14), locate the open side of the C-clip 2.
The C-clip is a small black part that secures the tape 3 to the pin.
6. Remove the C-clip from the leader pin by using your fingers to push the clip
away from the pin. Set the pin aside and discard the clip.

3
1
A67E0036

Figure 6-14. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin. Use your fingers to push the C-clip from the leader pin.

7. Position the tape in the alignment groove of the leader pin attach tool (see 1
in Figure 6-15 on page 6-17).
8. Place a new C-clip into the retention groove 2 (Figure 6-15 on page 6-17) on
the leader pin attachment tool and make sure that the clip's open side faces
up.
9. Place the leader pin (from step 6) into the cavity 3 (Figure 6-15 on page
6-17) of the leader pin attach tool.
Attention: To prevent the leader pin from rolling into the cartridge, in the
following step use care when folding the tape over the pin.
10. Fold the tape over the leader pin and hold it with your fingers (see
Figure 6-15 on page 6-17).

Note: Use care to ensure that the tape is centered over the leader pin. Failure
to properly center the tape on the pin will cause the repaired cartridge
to fail. When the tape is properly centered, a 0.25-mm (0.01-in.) gap

6-16 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 exists on both sides of the pin.

1
4

A67E0037
Figure 6-15. Attaching the leader pin to the tape

11. Close the pivot arm 4 of the leader pin attach tool by swinging it over the
leader pin so that the C-clip snaps onto the pin and the tape.
12. Swing the pivot arm open and trim the excess tape 5 so that it is flush with
the reattached leader pin 6.
13. Use your fingers to remove the leader pin from the cavity 3 in the leader
pin attach tool.
14. Use the cartridge manual rewind tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge
(wind the tape clockwise). Ensure that the leader pin is latched by the
pin-retaining spring clips on each end of the leader pin.
15. Remove the rewind tool.
16. Remove the leader pin attach tool by lifting its end up and away from the
cartridge.

Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges

Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will
vary, depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was
exposed).

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-17

 The best storage container for the cartridges (until they are opened) is the original
shipping container. The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the
cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes.

When you ship a cartridge, place it in its jewel case or in a sealed, moisture-proof
bag to protect it from moisture, contaminants, and physical damage. Ship the
cartridge in a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the
cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container.

Table 6-6 gives the environment for operating, storing, and shipping LTO Ultrium
Tape Cartridges.
Table 6-6. Environment for operating, storing, and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge
Environmental Specifications
Environmental Factor Operating Operational Storage1 Archival Storage2 Shipping
10 to 45°C(50 to -23 to 49°C(-9 to
Temperature 16 to 32°C(61 to 90°F) 16 to 25°C(61 to 77°F)
113°F) 120°F)
Relative humidity
10 to 80% 20 to 80% 20 to 50% 5 to 80%
(non-condensing)
Maximum wet bulb
26°C(79°F) 26°C(79°F) 26°C(79°F) 26°C(79°F)
temperature
Note:
1. The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six months.
2. The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten years.

Disposing of Tape Cartridges

Under the current rules of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
regulation 40CFR261, the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge is classified as
non-hazardous waste. As such, it may be disposed of in the same way as normal
office trash. These regulations are amended from time to time, and you should
review them at the time of disposal.

If your local, state, country (non-U.S.A.), or regional regulations are more

restrictive than EPA 40CFR261, you must review them before you dispose of a
cartridge. Contact your account representative for information about the materials
that are in the cartridge.

If a tape cartridge must be disposed of in a secure manner, you can erase the data
on the cartridge by using a high-energy ac degausser (use a minimum of 4000
oersted peak field over the entire space that the cartridge occupies). The tape
should make two passes through the field at 90 degree orientation change for each
pass to achieve complete erasure. Some commercial degaussers have two magnetic
field regions offset 90 degrees from each other to accomplish complete erasure in
one pass for higher throughput. Degaussing makes the cartridge unusable.

If you burn the cartridge and tape, ensure that the incineration complies with all
applicable regulations.

6-18 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Ordering Media Supplies
Table 6-7 lists the cartridges and media supplies that you can order for the drive.
Table 6-7. Media supplies
Supply Item Methods of Ordering
| 20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
| (with attached labels) any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
| Type 3589 Model 014. Specify the VOLSER characters that
you want.

| Order as part number 46X1951 (color label) or 46X1953

| (black and white label) through an IBM-authorized
| distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.
| 20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
| (without attached labels) any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
| Type 3589 Model 015.

| Order as part number 46X1960 through an IBM-authorized

distributor.
| 5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge Order as part number 46C2084 through an IBM-authorized
distributor.
| 20-PACK IBM Ultrium 1500 GB WORM Tape Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
| Cartridge (with attached labels) any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
| Type 3589 Model 034.

| Order as part number 46X1963 (color label) or 46X1965

| (black and white label) through an IBM-authorized
| distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.
| 20-PACK IBM Ultrium 1500 GB WORM Tape Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
| Cartridge (without attached labels) any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
| Type 3589 Model 035.

| Order as part number 46X1972 through an IBM-authorized

| distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.
Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
(with attached labels) Type 3589 Model 010. Specify the VOLSER characters that
you want.

Order as part number 95P4443 (color label) or 95P4445

(black and white label) through an IBM-authorized
distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.

20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
(without attached labels) any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Type 3589 Model 011.

Order as part number 95P4447 through an IBM-authorized

distributor.
Order as part number 95P4278 through an IBM-authorized
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge distributor.

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-19

Table 6-7. Media supplies (continued)
Supply Item Methods of Ordering
Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
20-PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Tape any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Cartridge (with attached labels) Type 3589 Model 032.

Order as part number 95P4457 (color label) or 95P4459

(black and white label) through an IBM-authorized
distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.
Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
20-PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Tape any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Cartridge (without attached labels) Type 3589 Model 033.

Order as part number 95P4461 through an IBM-authorized

distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.

IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Bar code labels are pre-applied to cartridges. Type 3589 Model 008. Specify the VOLSER characters that
you want.

Order as part number 96Pxxxx (color label) or 96Pxxxx

(black and white label) through an IBM-authorized
distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.

IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Order VOLSER labels separately. Type 3589 Model 009.

Order as part number 24Rxxxx through an IBM-authorized

distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.
Order as part number 95P2020 through an IBM-authorized
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge distributor. Specify the VOLSER characters that you want.
Order by Machine Type/Model and Feature Code through
IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge (with an IBM-authorized distributor.
attached labels)

IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 028/Feature Code 2820

is a 20-pack of WORM cartridges labeled with starting
volume serial information and, optionally, packed in
individual jewel cases. Attached labels have been
preprinted with a Bar Code that ends with LT, where
L stands for LTO, and T identifies the cartridge as a
WORM cartridge. This media can be used with LTO 3
drives (read/write).
Order by Machine Type/Model and Feature Code through
IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge an IBM-authorized distributor.
(without attached labels)

IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 029/Feature Code 2920

is a 20-pack of WORM cartridges packed in individual
jewel cases with unattached blank labels. This media
can be used with LTO 3 drives (read/write).
Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Type 3589 Model 006. Specify VOLSER characters you want.
Bar code labels are pre-applied to cartridges.

6-20 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 6-7. Media supplies (continued)
Supply Item Methods of Ordering
Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Type 3589 Model 007.
Order VOLSER labels separately (see “Ordering Bar
Code Labels”).
IBM LTO Ultrium 100 GB Data Cartridge Order as part number 08L9120 through an IBM-authorized
distributor.
Order VOLSER labels separately (see “Ordering Bar
Code Labels”).
IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge (universal Order as part number 35L2086 through an IBM-authorized
cleaning cartridge for use with Ultrium 1, Ultrium 2, distributor.
and Ultrium 3 drives)

VOLSER labels are included.

Leader Pin Reattachment Kit Order as part number 08L9129 through an IBM-authorized
distributor.
Manual Rewind Tool Order as part number 08L9130 through an IBM-authorized
distributor.

To find the closest IBM-authorized distributor, visit the web at

http://www.ibm.com/storage/media) or call 1-888-IBM-MEDIA.

Ordering Bar Code Labels

The LTO Ultrium 3 and 4 Tape Drives do not require cartridge bar code labels.
However, if you use your data cartridges or cleaning cartridges in an IBM tape
library product, you may need cartridge bar code labels if your tape library
product requires them (see Table 6-3 on page 6-5). You can order these labels
separately from the IBM Data Cartridges and Cleaning Cartridges.

You can order bar code labels directly from the authorized label suppliers in
Table 6-8.
Table 6-8. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels
In America In Europe and Asia

EDP/Tri-Optic EDP Europe, Ltd.

6800 West 117th Avenue 43 Redhills Road
Broomfield, CO 80020 South Woodham Ferrers
U. S. A. Chelmsford, Essex CM3 5UL
Telephone: 888-438-8362 U. K.
http://www.tri-optic.com/ Telephone: 44 (0) 1245-322380
http://www.tri-optic.com/

Dataware Dataware Labels Europe

P.O. Box 740947 Heubergstrasse 9
Houston, TX 77274 D-83052 Bruckmuhl-Gotting
U. S. A. Germany
Telephone: 800-426-4844 Telephone: 49 8062-9455
http://www.datawarelabels.com/ http://www.datawarelabels.com/

Chapter 6. Using Ultrium Media 6-21

Table 6-8. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels (continued)
In America In Europe and Asia

NetC NetC Europe Ltd

P. O. Box 1067 Town Farm Bungalow
Fairfield, CT 06825 The Pavement
U. S. A. North Curry
Telephone: 203-372-6382 TA3 6LX
http://www.netcllc.com/ Somerset
U. K.
Telephone: 44 (0) 1823 49 1439
http://www.netclabels.co.uk

NetC Asia Pacific Pty Ltd

Locked Bag 1
Kenthurst
NSW 2156
Australia
Telephone: 61 (0) 2 4573 6556
http://www.netclabels.com.uk

6-22 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting
v The library consists of the following CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units):
– Control Card (electronics, processor, memory, etc.)
– Power Supply
– Drive Sled (drive plus drive-to-library connectivity)
– Library Enclosure (accessor, Operator Control Panel display, etc.)
– Cartridge Magazines
v Other possible Replacement Parts are:
– Data Cartridges
– Cables/Terminator

Important: Before replacing any CRU and after finding the problem and
performing any listed actions listed in the Troubleshooting Table below,
be sure to review the “Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems” on
page 7-8 to help confirm the failing CRU.

The following table is the starting point for all service issues. Find the reason
which closest resembles the problem you are experiencing and perform the listed
action. If you are unable to correct the problem, create a prioritized list of
replacement parts required. Select only one CRU at a time starting with the most
likely based on the “Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems” on page 7-8 and/or
the error code listing. After exhausting all troubleshooting efforts, refer to
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 9-5.

After correcting the problem, run Library Verify (Operator Control Panel: Service →
Library Verify) to ensure that all library components are functioning properly
before resuming normal library operations.
Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table
Problem Solution
INSTALLATION/CONFIGURATION
Unable to configure 3 logical The 2 half high drives must be in drive positions 1 and 2 (the lowest drive
libraries with 3 drives (2 half positions in the library) and the full high drive must be in the remaining drive
high drives and 1 full high position. For additional information, refer to Appendix B, “SCSI Element Types,
drive) installed. SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations,” on page B-1.
Installation and Configuration 1. Refer to “Installation Problems” on page 7-6.
POWER
Library does not power ON 1. Perform “Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page 7-8.
The Operator Control Panel is 1. Power cycle the library.
blank or frozen
2. If possible, log on to the Web User Interface and check the error log (Service
Library → View Logs). Look up the error code and try to resolve (see
Chapter 8, “Error Codes,” on page 8-1).
3. Upgrade/reinstall the latest library firmware. To download the latest library
firmware, visit http://www.ibm.com/support.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify before resuming normal
library operations. Refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 5-30.
v If the problem persists, refer to “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page
9-5.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 7-1

Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
ENCRYPTION
Encryption Error: Displayed 1. Check the host application to ensure the Encryption Key Manager (EKM)
when the drive detects an error application is providing the correct encryption key.
associated with an encryption
v Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and Users Guide and the
operation - if the problem
“Drive Sense Data” on page D-6 returned for an encryption operation.
occurred while the tape drive
was writing data to, or reading v Retry the encryption operation after the EKM application problems have
data from, tape been resolved.
2. Check the operation of the tape drive by resetting the drive (Operator Control
Panel: Service → Service → Drive Power) and running POST.
v Refer to the error code displayed on the Operator Control Panel if the drive
resets and POST fails.
v Retry the encryption operation if the drive reset and POST complete without
errors.
3. Check the media.
v Ensure the correct media is being used. Data encryption is supported with
LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges only.
v Retry the encryption operation with the tape cartridge in another encryption
enabled drive. Replace the media if the problem repeats with the same tape
cartridge in multiple drives. If the problem occurred while the tape drive
was running POST or diagnostics, replace the drive. The error code clears
with the first attempted write/read after the encryption key is changed, or
when the drive is placed in maintenance mode.
Encryption-related error is Check the EKM application's error logs, device driver logs, tape library error logs,
posted and tape drive error logs for entries that are related to encryption. See “Service
Library: View Logs” on page 5-58, “Service Library: View Drive Logs” on page
5-59, Chapter 8, “Error Codes,” on page 8-1, and “Drive Sense Data” on page D-6.
Connection problem with the If you are using library-managed encryption, perform the Key Path Diagnostic
Encryption Key Manager (EKM) (see “Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics” on page 5-61) . If the test fails, a
problem could exist with the IP address, the Ethernet cable, or the EKM server.
Perform the following:
1. Check the Ethernet connection between the library and the EKM server.
2. Check the TCP/IP configuration of the library and the server.
3. Check that the EKM is correctly installed and configured, and that the EKM
application is properly started (refer to your EKM documentation).
4. Ensure that the tape drive is registered in the EKM (refer to your EKM
documentation).
5. Ensure that a default key label is defined in the EKM (refer to your EKM
documentation).

If you are using application-managed encryption or system-managed encryption,

check your key proxy server's documentation for a similar test.
Lost Encryption Feature Refer to “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 9-5.
Activation Key
Changed drive type or position
in library Use the web user interface to resubmit encryption settings under Configure
LME capable drive does not Library → Encryption even if the settings do not change.
exercise Key Path Diagnostics
ERROR CODES

7-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
There is an error code in the Most library or drive errors will result in an error code or error message on the
error log. Operator Control Panel display. An error code history is maintained in the library
or drive error log. See “Service Library: View Drive Logs” on page 5-59 for how to
get the error log over the Operator Control Panel and “Service Library: View
Logs” on page 5-58 to view logs using the Web User Interface.

Look up the error code and try to resolve (see Chapter 8, “Error Codes,” on page
8-1 and/or Appendix D, “Sense Data,” on page D-1).
FRONT PANEL LEDs
Attention LED To determine why the Attention LED is turned ON, log in to the Web User
Interface and select Service Library → View Logs → Warning Trace.

Drive Sled Issues:

v Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 7-10.
v Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being
swapped with different form factors (i.e. HH to FH or FH to HH), a library
configuration change is needed. Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the
amount of logical libraries will clear this issue. Navigate to the Web User
Interface Configure Library → Logical Libraries or to the Operator Control
Panel's Configure → Logical Libraries section and reassign the logical libraries.
If you do not want to change your logical library configuration, resubmit your
current settings.
v Restore factory defaults (Operator Control Panel: Configure → Save/Restore and
select Restore All, or Web User Interface: Configure Library → Save/Restore
and select Restore).

Media Issues:
v Avoid contamination by ensuring that the library is installed in a clean,
contamination-free environment. Continue cleaning the tape drive as needed.
Refer to “Choosing a Location” on page 4-2.
v A cartridge should be acclimated for at least 24 hours before being used,
particularly if it has been stored at a substantially different temperature or level
of humidity than the library. Refer to “Provide Proper Acclimation and
Environmental Conditions” on page 6-9.
v Any cartridge that is suspected of being defective or contaminated should NOT
be reused, in any drive.

Power Supply or Fan Issues:

Check the power supply (or redundant power supply) for failure, and also check
any power supply fans. Replace any defective units. Refer to “System Status” on
page 2-6 for a redundant power supply failure on a 4U library and“Isolating a
Power Supply Problem” on page 7-8.
Clean Drive LED v Ensure that you are using an Ultrium universal cleaning cartridge (see
“Cleaning Cartridge” on page 6-4).
v Ensure that the cleaning cartridge has not expired. A drive will automatically
eject an expired cleaning cartridge. A cleaning cartridge is good for 50 cleans. If
your cleaning cartridge has expired, refer to “Ordering Media Supplies” on
page 6-19 for information on ordering a new cleaning cartridge.
v If the problem still exists, refer to “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page
9-5.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 7-3

Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
Error LED If the Error LED remains ON after completing any user action listed for the error
code in Chapter 8, “Error Codes,” on page 8-1, run Library verify (Operator
Control Panel: Service → Library Verify).
v If the test passes, the Error LED will turn OFF.
v If the test fails, cycle library power to turn the Error LED OFF.
To check the library error log, log on to the Web User Interface and click Service
Library, then View Logs.If the Operator Control Panel displays WARNING: Unit
Busy, click OK to turn the error LED OFF.
FIRMWARE
Determining current firmware Many problems can be resolved by a firmware upgrade. Ensure that both the
levels library and drive firmware are at the latest levels available. Compare the firmware
levels on the Operator Control Panel with the latest levels on the web site
http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
v Library firmware: Monitor → Library → Identity → Version
v Drive firmware: Monitor → Drives → Identity (select a drive) → Firmware Rev
Update library firmware Refer to “Service Library: Upgrade Firmware” on page 5-62.
Update drive firmware Refer to “Service: Service (Drives)” on page 5-31 or “Service Library: Upgrade
Firmware” on page 5-62.
CARTRIDGE MOVEMENT PROBLEMS
Cartridge placement problems Magazine slot prism fiducials NOT seated properly can result in gripper or slider
error codes due to the fiducial interfering with the back edge of the cartridge.
Release and pull magazines out of the library for inspection. To release the
magazines using the Operator Control Panel, navigate to Control → Magazine and
select Left or Right. To release the magazines using the Web User Interface,
navigate to Manage Library → Release Magazines.

Inspect the light pipe fiducials on each slot of the magazine for proper seating.
See “Replacing Magazine Fiducials” on page 10-14.
Cartridge will not eject from 1. Power cycle the library, allow it to complete initialization, which can take up
drive to 1 hour depending on the type of cartridge (LTO 4, LTO 3, etc.) and how
much of the tape has been spooled out of the cartridge. Retry unloading the
cartridge using the library Operator Control Panel. Refer to “Control: Move
Cartridges” on page 5-16.
2. Allow the drive to complete all operations. This may take as long as 1 hour if
you reset or cycle power on the library while the cartridge is positioned at the
physical end of the media.
3. Ensure that the backup software is not reserving the slot or preventing the
drive from ejecting the cartridge. The backup software needs to cancel the
reservation and any hold it has on the drive. Temporarily disconnecting the
library from the host server and power cycling eliminates the host and its
software as a problem source.
4. If the problem still exists, refer to “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page
9-5.
Cartridge can not be removed See “Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots” on page 9-1.
from storage slot

7-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
Extended library recovery time 1. Release both left and right magazines (Operator Control Panel: Control →
Magazine and select Left or Right; Web User Interface: Manage Library →
Release Magazine and select Left or Right) and inspect for both the presence
and conditions of the cell prism fiducials. Each cell should contain a correctly
installed prism with no visible damage. Replace any missing or damaged
prism fiducials. Refer to “Replacing Magazine Fiducials” on page 10-14.
2. An error code that will often surface after completing an inventory request or
a diagnostic request such as the system Test will be 9B 37....Sled position
sensor not found. The OCP Error LED will be lit and the Library Status on the
web interface will show a Robotic Failure. During the extended recovery
process, by viewing the Standard Trace under the web interface Service
Library → View Logs, the same Robotic Failure entries into this log can be
viewed as the library enters recovery mode for failure to sense a particular
fiducial. Proceed to the next step for failure isolation suggestions.
3. If there are no prism integrity issues and the library continues to post
extended recovery time, refer to “Library Recovery Problem Determination” on
page 7-7 and “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure
Problem” on page 7-11.
Slot Blocker blocking a storage
slot See “Removing the Slot Blocker - 2U Library” on page 10-10
MEDIA
Cleaning or data cartridge Ensure that you are using data and cleaning cartridges that are compatible with
incompatible with drive. the drive and model of your library. The library automatically unloads
incompatible cartridges and the Media Attention LED flashes. Export the media in
order to clear the state. Refer to “Cartridge Compatibility” on page 6-3.
Cannot write to or read from 1. Ensure that the cartridge write-protect switch is in the write enabled position
tape. (see “Write-Protect Switch” on page 6-7).
2. Ensure that you have the appropriate data cartridge for your library model
(see “Cartridge Compatibility” on page 6-3).
3. Ensure that you are using an Ultrium cartridge that has not been degaussed.
Do not degauss Ultrium cartridges.
4. Ensure that the cartridge has not been exposed to harsh environmental or
electrical conditions and is not physically damaged in any way. Refer to
“Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions” on page 6-9 and
“Perform a Thorough Inspection” on page 6-9.
5. Many backup applications do not read or write to cartridges that were created
using a different backup application. In this case, you may have to perform an
erase, reformat, or label replacement operation on the cartridge.
6. Ensure that you understand any data protection or overwrite protection
schemes that your backup application may be using, which could prevent you
from writing to a given cartridge.
7. Retry the operation with a different, known good cartridge.
8. Clean the drive. See “Service Library: Clean Drive” on page 5-57.
Cartridge VOLSER is reported Probable cause: cartridge with no label or damaged label.
as "unknown"
Ensure that cartridge is properly labelled. If cartridge is properly labelled, unload
the cartridge from drive and perform an inventory (OCP: Control → Re-Inventory;
Web: Manage Library → Perform Inventory). If VOLSER is again reported as
"Unknown", run Library Verify (Service → Library Verify).
DRIVE ID (SCSI, SAS, OR FIBRE CHANNEL LOOP)

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 7-5

Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
Changed drive ID, but the host 1. Ensure that all devices on the same bus/network have unique ID numbers.
server does not recognize the
2. Ensure that you cycle power on the library after changing the ID.
new ID
3. Reboot the host server.
Tape library performance: The 1. Check the network bandwidth from the host computer. If you are backing up
library is not efficiently backing data over a network, consider comparing to a local-only backup.
up data
2. Ensure that the library and tape drive are on their own SCSI bus and not
daisy-chained to another tape drive or to the hard drive being backed up.
3. Ensure that the library is connected to a LVDS SCSI bus and there are no
single-ended (SE) devices on the same bus, because this will cause the entire
bus to negotiate down to SE speed.
4. Use an Ultra160 SCSI bus and high-quality cabling with the library.
CUSTOMER REPLACEABLE UNITS (CRU)
Drive Sled See “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 7-10.
Power Supply See “System Status” on page 2-6 and“Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page
7-8.
Library Controller Card See “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page
7-11.
Library Enclosure See “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page
7-11.
ITDT
Performance Test duration Items affecting the duration of the test are:
varies v The level of adapter device driver
v Your adapter model and type
OTHER PROBLEMS
Web User Interface problems See “Isolating Web User Interface Problems” on page 7-12.
Bar code scanner problems See “Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems” on page 7-13.
Host Attachment Interface See “Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems” on page 7-13
problems
Need help with a library
password Refer to “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 9-5.
Key path diagnostic not This diagnostic is available with library firmware level greater than 6.xx. Refer to
working “Verifying/Updating Firmware” on page 4-22 to determine the level of firmware
on your library. If necessary, visit http://www.ibm.com to download the latest
levels of firmware for your library.
Auto Clean status displayed as If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present, or if a cleaning
"Chk Media/Rsvd Slot?" on the cartridge is present but not in the reserved slot, Auto Clean status will show "Chk
Web User Interface System Media/Rsvd Slot?" and Status will show a green check mark and the words
Status screen. "Media Attention."

Installation Problems
Problems encountered during the installation of the library are usually caused by
improper SCSI bus configuration, application software configuration errors, or an
incorrectly configured operating system. If the application software that you are
using is not communicating with the library after installation, check the following:
v Picker Ship Lock Key:

7-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Ensure that the Picker Ship Lock Key on the top cover has been removed before
powering on the library.
v Drive/Library SCSI or Loop ID:
Ensure that the SCSI ID of the Drive/Library (or SAS or Fibre Channel Loop ID)
is correct and not the same as other devices that may be on the same bus.
v Host Bus Adapter (HBA) Compatibility:
Ensure that the library is compatible with the HBA. For best performance, the
HBA used for this library should be SCSI-3 LVDS. Pay particular attention to
any steps describing settings of various jumpers and/or switches.
v HBA LUN 0/1 Support:
A single ID will address both drive and library since the drive is LUN 0 and the
library is LUN 1. These models require an HBA that supports LUN scanning
which must be enabled at the HBA.
v Cable Connections:
Ensure that there are no bent pins on cables and that all connections are securely
fastened.
v Fibre Channel Tape Support:
Make sure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the HBA if you are
installing a library with a Fibre Channel drive.
v SCSI Cable Length:
Ensure that the maximum cable length is not over 25 meters (82 ft.) for a single
device on the bus or 12 meters (40 ft.) for multiple devices. Internal SCSI length
within the library accounts for 2 ft.
v SCSI Termination:
Verify proper termination on both ends of the SCSI bus.
v Backup Application Installation:
Refer to the documentation included with your backup application software
instructions on how to verify proper installation.
v Device Driver Installation:
Make sure that the proper device driver, if applicable, is installed for the library.

Note: Many backup applications use their own drivers for the library and drive.
Before installing a driver, make sure it will not be in conflict with the
software. Contact your Backup Application vendor for this information.

Library Recovery Problem Determination

The 2U and 4U library firmware will generally retry failed operations up to three
times before posting a failure to complete the operation, or, in some situations,
proceeding with an operation that can be completed in an alternative manner. Of
course, if the operation is successful within the allotted retry count, the appropriate
retry counter is updated and recorded in the retry log and the next library
operation will commence.

For example, failure to pick or place a cartridge from or to a designated cell or

drive location after exhausting the retry count will result in a failed operation with
the appropriate error code. However, failure to detect a particular cell location by
sensing the prism fiducial located on the cell shelf because it is missing or
damaged will eventually result in the cell location being located by the gripper, bar
code reader and positional emitter pulse count after the prism detection retry
count is exhausted. If several prisms are missing or damaged or if the accessor

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 7-7

 prism sensor/emitter is inoperable, initialization and/or inventory functions can
take a prolonged amount of time to complete due to the lengthy retry recovery
procedure.

If the library is taking an extended amount of time to initialize, to perform an

inventory or even move a cartridge within the library, the magazines prism
integrity should be verified prior to exchanging a library component. This situation
can be noted by the ACTIVITY line on the Operator Panel posting Recovery. Prism
integrity verification can be done by releasing the magazines and inspecting the
cell prisms. Normal initialization or inventory time for a 2U library once the picker
mechanism starts its operation should be approximately 1 to 2 minutes. For a 4U
library, 2 to 3 minutes. A single missing or damaged prism can add 1 to 2 minutes.
If the accessor tray sensor/emitter is inoperable, or several prisms are missing or
damaged, initialization or inventory could exceed 30 minutes or longer. Refer to
Troubleshooting table “Cartridge Movement Problems”.

Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems

Isolating a Power Supply Problem

Note: Not all power supplies have LEDs. The original power supply for the 2U
library did not have LEDs though any power supplies replaced will likely
have LEDs. The 4U library has power supplies with LEDs.

3
a77ug136

4
5

Figure 7-1. A 250w power supply with LEDs

7-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 6

a77ug198
4
5

Figure 7-2. A 80w power supply without LEDs

Table 7-2. Power Supply LED Meanings

1 If the blue LED is lit, AC voltage is available.
2 If the amber LED is lit, there is a possible fan problem or other power supply
issue. The power supply will need replacement.
3 If the green LED is lit, DC power is OK and active.
4 Cooling Fan Grill
5 Thumb Screws
6 Power Receptacle

If the Library does not power on:

1. With library power OFF and the power cord unplugged, loosen the three
thumb screws (5), grasp two of the thumb screws, pull the power supply out
half way, reseat the power supply, and tighten the three thumb screws.
2. Ensure the power cord is plugged in at the power supply (6) and at the
electrical outlet, then turn library power ON.
a. For power supplies with LED's, the "Blue" LED will be lit if AC power is
good.
b. If your power supply does not have LED's, feel for air flowing out of the
cooling fan grill on the rear of the library (4). AC is good if air is flowing
from the cooling fan grill.
3. If power appears to be missing
a. Plug the power cord into another electrical outlet.
b. If power is still missing, plug another device into the outlet to test.
c. If the outlet tests OK, try another power cord with the library.
4. For power supplies with LED's, if the "Amber" LED is lit, replace the power
supply (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 10-11).

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 7-9

 5. If your power supply has no LED's, and you have verified that the electrical
outlet works properly, but the power supply is still failing, replace it (refer to
“Replacing a Power Supply” on page 10-11).
6. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library (Operator
Control Panel and front panel LED's may be functioning); however, air does not
flow from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library, replace
the power supply (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 10-11).
7. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library (Operator
Control Panel and front panel LED's may be functioning), and air is flowing
from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library, observe the
"Green" LED (lowest of the three). If it is lit, the power supply is OK.

Note: If your library has -04 level redundant power supplies (see label on top
of power supply), it is normal for the one in "Standby" mode to turn its
"Green" LED off. You can test this power supply by pulling the power
connector from the other "Active" power supply. The power supply that
was in "Standby" mode will now become "Active", and its "Green" LED
should light. If it doesn't, replace it (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply”
on page 10-11).

If your library has -05 level redundant power supplies, the "Green" LED
will be ON on both power supplies. If both "Green" LEDs are not ON,
replace the failed power supply (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on
page 10-11).
8. If the "Green" LED is not lit, and it is the only one in the Library, replace it
(refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 10-11).

Isolating Drive Sled Problems

Prior to replacing a drive sled CRU, verify that the following activities have been
performed:
1. BEFORE POWERING OFF THE LIBRARY, write the drive dump to flash. It is
important to preserve the drive dump on the drive for analysis by IBM
Technical Support. For instructions, refer to“Before You Begin” on page A-2.

Note: If you are instructed by IBM Technical Support to copy the drive dump
to your host computer, use one of the following methods:
v Web User Interface: Refer to “Service Library: Save Drive Dump” on
page 5-60.
v ITDT: Refer to “IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on
page 9-4.
2. Ensure that the drive firmware is at the latest level (visit http://www.ibm.com/
storage/). To determine current library and drive firmware version using the
Operator Control Panel:
v Library firmware: Monitor → Library → Identity
v Drive firmware: Monitor → Drives → Identity (select a drive) Drive
firmware is identified in the FW Rev field.
3. Try reseating the drive sled.

Note: The drive sled is hot-pluggable so it is not necessary to power off the
library. See “Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled” on page
10-3.
4. Cycle power to the library.

7-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 5. If air does not flow from the drive sled cooling fan grill on the rear of the
library, replace the drive sled CRU. Several library error codes also point to
cooling problems. See “Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled” on
page 10-3.
6. If the drive is experiencing permanent or temporary errors or if the amber
Clean LED is lit on the front panel of the library, select Clean Drive from the
Operator Control Panel Service Menu (Service → Service → Clean Drive) and
clean the drive. Use only an approved cleaning cartridge (see “Cleaning
Cartridge” on page 6-4).
7. Run the Library Verify Diagnostic which includes a drive performance
Read/Write test. Be sure to use a known good scratch or blank data cartridge.
v If the drive test fails, replace the drive sled CRU (refer to
“Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled” on page 10-3).
v If the drive diagnostic(s) pass, run the drive wrap test from the OCP.Service
→ Service and select a drive. Hit the Enter key to highlight the test options
field, and hit Up/Down keys to scroll through test options. Select Wrap Test
and hit the Enter key. Then use Up/Down keys to highlight <Run> and hit
the Enter key. When prompted, connect the Wrap Test Adapter and select
<OK>.. If the wrap test fails, verify that you are using a wrap tool and not
a terminator. If you are using the correct wrap tool, replace the drive sled
CRU (refer to “Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled” on page
10-3).

Note: On a Half high SAS drive, run SAS wrap test. On a Full high SAS
drive, run SAS Wrap A and then run SAS Wrap B.

Note: If a SCSI drive wrap test fails, run the test again, with a different
SCSI terminator prior to exchanging the drive sled.
8. Using the host interface test tool, ITDT, run the Scan function(s) to verify that
the host application interface (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel) can detect the
drive (LUN 0) and the library (LUN 1). To further test the interface
communication path, run the Test Device function (t), if available, after
selecting the drive. This function will write/read data across the interface as
well as sending a command to the drive to run the internal performance
Read/Write test.
9. If the host tool, ITDT, cannot detect the drive or library, look for problems
with the host interface cabling, the HBA, the device driver or the backup
application software.
10. If the drive passes all the tests, inspect the media to ensure the media is
compatible with the drive and not causing drive errors. Refer to Chapter 6,
“Using Ultrium Media,” on page 6-1.

Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure

Problem
1. If possible, ensure that the library firmware is at the latest level, check the
current library firmware level using the Operator Control Panel (Monitor →
Library → Identity → Version) or the Web User Interface (Monitor Library →
Library Identity), then (visit http://www.ibm.com/storage/).
2. Observe the LED on the Library Controller Card.
v LED On solid - LCC failed or in a hang condition.
v LED Off - LCC not fully inserted, or LCC failed, or library not connected to
power source, or Power Supply defect.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 7-11

 v LED flashing (1 flash per second) - normal operation
v LED flashing (slower than once per second) - normal operation
v LED flashing (faster than once per second) - LCC failed
3. With library power OFF, loosen the two thumb screws which secure the
controller card to the library enclosure and slide it out.
v Inspect the card for any broken components or other anomalies.
v If the card appears to have no abnormalities, reseat the card back in the
library, tighten the thumb screws, and turn library power ON.
4. If both the Operator Control Panel and Web User interfaces are inoperable or
frozen and the latest firmware has been installed, the controller card CRU
electronics is the most likely failure. If only the Web User Interface has failed,
please see “Isolating Web User Interface Problems” before replacing any CRUs.
5. If a control card error code has been obtained and reseating, power cycling, and
updating the library firmware did not fix the problem, the controller card CRU
is the most likely failing CRU (refer to “Replacing a Library Controller Card”
on page 10-12).
6. If the error code indicates an accessor type error (slider, elevator, sled, etc.),
release and remove both magazines (see “Control: Magazine” on page 5-17,
“Manage Library: Release Magazine” on page 5-42, or “Releasing the
Magazines Manually” on page 9-1) and observe the accessor path for any
obvious obstruction or problems. Resolve any observed problem if possible.
Execute a Library System Test. See “Service Library: Perform Diagnostics” on
page 5-60 for the web or “Service: Run Tests” on page 5-30 for the OCP If the
problem is persistent, replace the library enclosure CRU (refer to “Replacing the
Library Enclosure” on page 10-15).
7. If the problem is intermittent or if a particular electronic or mechanical function
of the library is not working properly as evidenced through observation or by
error code, the library enclosure CRU is the most likely failing component.
Execute a Library System Test. See “Service Library: Perform Diagnostics” on
page 5-60 for the web or “Service: Run Tests” on page 5-30 for the OCP If the
problem is persistent, replace the library enclosure CRU (refer to “Replacing the
Library Enclosure” on page 10-15).
8. If the library is taking an extended amount of time in recovery to complete
initialization, perform an inventory, or executing a cartridge movement within
the library, and, after finding the magazine cell fiducials to be present with no
visible damage and correctly installed, suspect the sensor/emitter on the
accessor mechanism to be inoperable. Execute a Library System Test. See
“Service Library: Perform Diagnostics” on page 5-60 for the web or “Service:
Run Tests” on page 5-30 for the OCP If the problem is persistent, replace the
library enclosure CRU (refer to “Replacing the Library Enclosure” on page
10-15).

Isolating Web User Interface Problems

If the Web User Interface is not functioning at all or if it is intermittently
functioning, review the following steps to ensure that it is properly configured, or,
to help determine which CRU or part needs to be replaced. The complete Web
User Interface electronics reside on the library controller card CRU.
1. Ensure that the ethernet cable is securely plugged in the rear of the library at
the ethernet port. See 7 on the “Rear Panel” on page 1-3.
2. Ensure that the correct IP, Netmask, and Gateway addresses are keyed into the
network parameters. From the Operator Control Panel, navigate to Configure →
Network.

7-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 3. Ensure that the correct IP address is being used on the web browser. If you get
a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface, you can
install the certificate or allow an exception (depending on the internet browser
you are using). Even though with some browsers you will still receive a
security certificate warning/error each time you log in to the Web User
Interface, your transmission is secure. SSL is enabled when the URL to your
library begins with https:// and some browsers will show a lock.
4. If the ethernet connection is a direct connection between the PC and the library,
a special "crossover" ethernet cable needs to be used.

Note: On newer PCs, either straight through or crossover ethernet cables may
be used since the crossover requirement is provided internally.
5. Check the ethernet cable carefully (or try another cable) and, if the cable is
connected to a network hub or switch, try a different port.
6. If the Web User Interface is still malfunctioning, replace the Library Controller
Card CRU (refer to “Replacing a Library Controller Card” on page 10-12).

Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems

If the server has reported inventory problems relating to inability to read bar code
labels, or, if some or all of the cartridge labels are not being displayed on the Web
User Interface, use the following procedure to determine if the scanner (library
enclosure CRU) needs to be replaced.
1. Ensure that a supported bar code label (or labels) are being used. Also, check
for damaged labels (see “Bar Code Label” on page 6-5).
2. With library power OFF, reseat the library controller card CRU (refer to
“Replacing a Library Controller Card” on page 10-12), and then switch library
power ON.
3. Perform a re-inventory via the Operator Control Panel (Control →
Re-Inventory) and view the inventory via the Web User Interface (Monitor
Library → Inventory) to determine if the labels are now being read.
4. If the labels are still not being read properly, replace the library enclosure CRU
(refer to “Replacing the Library Enclosure” on page 10-15).

Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems

After successfully exercising "Isolating Drive Sled Problems", and more specifically
the "Library Verify" diagnostic on the Operator Control Panel (Service → Library
Verify) which includes a drive (or drives) read/write diagnostic, the following
procedures are suggested to help isolate the failure to properly establish
connectivity to the Host Bus Adapter (HBA).
1. If not already performed, exercise the drive interface wrap test on the Operator
Control Panel (Service → Service → Drive Tests). The test will require that a
proper Wrap Tool be installed at some point during the test procedure. If the
wrap test fails, replace the drive sled (refer to “Removing/Installing/Adding a
Tape Drive Sled” on page 10-3), and skip steps 2 and 3. Proceed to step 2 if the
wrap test passes.

Note: If a SCSI wrap test fails, run the test one more time with a different SCSI
terminator prior to replacing the drive sled.
2. Use the utility, ITDT, to evaluate connectivity from the HBA through the
cabling to the drive (or drives). ITDT does not require separate device drivers,
thus the Operating System has the ability to scan and find all the LTO devices
that are attached. If ITDT cannot successfully locate the LTO drive, suspect

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 7-13

 cabling or HBA problems, and skip step 3. If ITDT successfully located the LTO
drive, proceed to step 3. See “IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)”
on page 9-4 for a brief description of ITDT and instructions on how to
download the tool from the web.
3. If ITDT successfully locates the LTO device(s), verify that the correct
application device drivers and backup application software is properly
installed.
4. Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and/or
updates (dll’s, PTF’s, etc.) have been installed and applied.

Identifying a Suspect Cartridge

The amber Attention LED will be lit on the front panel of the library when there
has been a failure that indicates a piece of media is bad, marginal, or invalid. It
will be cleared when all invalid cartridges have been exported from the library.

Note: The amber LED may also be lit because a power supply, or a power supply
fan is failing. Refer to “Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page 7-8.
1. Identify the media using the Web User Interface (Monitor Library →
Inventory). Expand the cartridge details for each magazine and look for media
status in the Attn column of the inventory table.
2. Make note of the cartridge location (Slot #) and VOLSER (Label) in the
inventory table.
3. To remove the cartridge from the library:
a. Using the web, select Manage Library → Move Media. If the cartridge is not
in an I/O Station slot, move the cartridge to an I/O Station slot.
b. Using the OCP, select Control → Open I/O Station.
4. Remove cartridge. If cartridge was reported as Bad, properly dispose the
cartridge.
5. Close the I/O Station. If the amber LED was lit because of bad media, the
Attention LED will turn OFF. If the amber LED is still on, check the power
supply or the power supply fans. See “Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on
page 7-8.

7-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 8. Error Codes
If an error occurs during operation of the library, the library stops the current
operation and displays an error code on the LCD screen. Unless otherwise noted in
“Error Codes” on page 8-2, try to resolve the error by cycling power to the library
and retrying the last operation. If the error persists, contact technical support.

Example Error Code

EVENT -6

8D 07

Where:
v -6 indicates the position in sequence list, 0 being the most recent.
v 8D 07 indicates the error. (code 8D = sled blocked,).

The event log with the library also includes a date stamp for each event. Press
SELECT to display the associated time stamp in the following format:

yy.mm.dd hh:mm:ss:HH

Where:
v yy is the year
v mm is the month
v dd is the current day
v hh is hours
v mm is minutes
v ss is seconds
v HH is 1/100 second

The time stamp is set to zero at system start.

A description of each error code and possible solution is provided in “Error

Codes” on page 8-2.

Preparing to Resolve an Error Code

1. Record the error information that is displayed on the Operator Control Panel
display or Web User Interface screen.
2. If possible, cycle library power and retry operation.
v If the error reoccurs, refer to “Error Codes” on page 8-2 for information on
resolving the error.
v If the error does not reoccur, run Library Verify before continuing with
normal library operation.

Complete the steps in “Preparing to Resolve an Error Code” before completing the
User Action listed in “Error Codes” on page 8-2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 8-1

 Error Codes

Errors described in this section are hard errors. If such an error occurs the library
stops all operations and the Error LED starts blinking. An appropriate message
will be posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface. These
errors are also reported via email notification, if enabled. To enable email
notifications, refer to “Configure Library: Email Notification” on page 5-55.
Table 8-1. Main Error Codes
Error Code Description User Action
80 Bar code reader Error, cannot initialize
BCR
81 Bar code reader Error, no response from
BCR
82 EEPROM (Electrically Erasable
| Programmable Read-Only Memory ) Error Code 80 01 may be posted if the library has a BCR
| Error, no response from EEPROM (Bar Code Reader) that requires a minimum level of library
| (located on accessor controller) firmware. Update the library firmware to 9.00 or higher. If
| the problem still exists, follow the procedure below. Refer
83 Accessor controller generic problem to “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor
84 Setting of gripper motor parameters Enclosure Problem” on page 7-11. Possible Replacement
failed CRUs:
v Primary: Library Enclosure
85 Setting of slider motor parameters failed
v Secondary: Library Controller Card
86 Setting of elevator motor parameters
failed
87 Setting of rotation motor parameters
failed
88 Setting of sled motor parameters failed
89 Gripper blocked 1. If this is the first time the library has been powered ON
8A Slider blocked or if it has been moved to a new location, ensure that
the shipping lock has been removed. The lock is located
8B Elevator blocked on the top of the library (see “Removing and Storing the
8C Rotation blocked Shipping Lock” on page 4-4).
8D Sled blocked 2. Refer to “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs.
Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page 7-11. Possible
Replacement CRUs:
v Primary: Library Enclosure
v Secondary: Library Controller Card

8-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table 8-1. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
8E Cannot find gripper block within the
expected range
8F Cannot find slider block within the
expected range
90 Cannot find elevator block within the
expected range
91 Cannot find rotation block within the
expected range
92 Cannot find sled block within the
expected range
93 Gripper outside range,

Gripper has reached a position beyond

the expected range
94 Slider outside range,

Slider has reached a position beyond the

expected range
95 Elevator outside range,

Elevator has reached a position beyond

the expected range
96 Rotation outside range,

Rotation has reached a position beyond Refer to “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor
the expected range Enclosure Problem” on page 7-11. Possible Replacement
97 Sled outside range, CRUs:
v Primary: Library Enclosure
Sled has reached a position beyond the
expected range v Secondary: Library Controller Card

98 Cartridge present sensor not found

99 Slider home sensor not found
9A Rotation home sensor not found
9B Sled position sensor (fiducial sensor) not
found
9C Gripper range out of specification
9D Slider range out of specification
9E Elevator range out of specification
9F Rotation range out of specification
A0 Sled range out of specification
A1 Open I/O Station (Import/Export
Element) failed
| A2 Error during elevator locking
| A6 No elevator home sensor found
B0 Robotic controller response timeout. A
command did not complete in the
required amount of time.
B1 NACK (not acknowledged) received
from robotic controller
B2 Accessor controller communication failed Chapter 8. Error Codes 8-3
Table 8-1. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
B3 Accessor controller urgent stop due to a 1. Verify that the left and right magazines are completely
released magazine inserted, then retry operation.
B4 Cartridge did not transport completely 2. Refer to “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs.
B5 Accessor controller does not respond on Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page 7-11. Possible
command Replacement CRUs:
v Primary: Library Enclosure
v Secondary: Library Controller Card
C0 Network initialization failed
1. Refer to “Isolating Web User Interface Problems” on
C1 Telnet Interface initialization failed page 7-12.
C2 Webserver initialization failed 2. If the error recurs, refer to “Contacting IBM Technical
C6 Ping command did not reach target Support” on page 9-5.

C7 Cannot Upgrade from USB Not supported

C8 Cannot Upgrade from FTP 1. Retry the Firmware upgrade.
C9 Cannot Upgrade Robotic from Flash 2. If the error recurs, refer to “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 9-5.
D0 ROM error. ROM checksum incorrect Refer to “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor
Enclosure Problem” on page 7-11. Possible Replacement
D1 RAM error. Power on Self Test ( POST )
CRUs:
has failed,
v Primary: Library Controller Card
D2 NVRAM (Non-Volatile Random Access
Memory) error. Read/Write operation to v Secondary: Library Enclosure
NVRAM has failed *D7 - Fatal System error can occur due to an
D3 CTC (Channel to Channel ) Error. Timer over-temperature condition. Ensure the environment meets
unit has failed during POST. the Environmental Specifications (refer to “Environmental
Specifications” on page 1-11).
D4 UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter ) Error. Frame overrun or **If you receive a D8 error while restoring your library
Parity Error on serial Interface. configuration from the OCP or Web UI, verify that your file
D5 Display Error extension is .dbb. If the extension is correct, your file may
have been corrupted during the save. Reconfigure, then
Communication to display failed save your library configuration.
Note: Configuration files saved with one version of library
D6 Memory Error, Stack and heap overflow. firmware may not be compatible with other versions of
D7 Fatal system error* firmware. It is recommended to save a configuration file
each time the library firmware is upgraded. Restore the
D8 Data base error**
library using a configuration file that was saved with the
D9 No SCSI IC detected same version of firmware currently installed in the library.
DA While running the Library Verify Test, 1. Check the barcode label on the scratch cartridge and run
the bar code reader read different bar the Library Verify test again..
code data for the same
2. If the error recurs, refer to “Contacting IBM Technical
customer-supplied scratch cartridge label.
Support” on page 9-5.
DB Warning Event! See Table 8-3 on page
8-11
DC I²C Bus Failure 1. Retry the operation..
2. After several occurrences, refer to “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 9-5.
DD Warning Event! See Table 8-3 on page
8-11

8-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table 8-1. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
DE Warning Event! See Table 8-3 on page
8-11
DF Warning Event! See Table 8-3 on page
8-11
E0 Incompatible magazine detected 1. Remove magazine from library.
2. Insert magazine in library. If error recurs, refer to
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 9-5.
| E2 New hardware found. Library firmware Upgrade library firmware to the latest version.
upgrade required.
F0 Drive Over temperature Condition 1. Check the ambient temperature conditions, and check
all fans.
The subcode indicates which drive is
affected. 2. Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 7-10.

Example:

Subcode 02: drive #2

Chapter 8. Error Codes 8-5

Table 8-1. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
F1 Drive Communication Error

Library controller has lost

communication to drive

The subcode indicates which drive is

affected.

Example:

Subcode 02: drive #2

F2 Drive Sled not present

The subcode indicates which drive sled

is affected.

Example:

Subcode 02: drive sled #2

F3 Drive Hardware Error

The subcode indicates which drive is

affected.

Example:

F3 xy

Where x refers to the hardware drive

error code (single character display) and Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 7-10.
Y refers to the drive position in the
library. x values:
v 4: firmware or hardware error
v 5: hardware error
v 6: hardware or media error
v A: recoverable hardware error
F4 Drive Load Timeout

Drive has run in a timeout while loading

a tape.

The subcode indicates which drive is

affected.

Example:

Subcode 02: drive #2

F5 Drive Unload Timeout

Drive has run in a timeout while

unloading a tape

The subcode indicates which drive is

affected.

Example:

subcode 02: drive #2

8-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 8-1. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
F6 No drive installed. A drive has never
been installed
F7 Support ticket download from drive not
possible
F8 Invalid drive command
F9 Invalid drive parameter Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 7-10.
FA SDCI microcode error
FB Drive logged out
FC Internal SCSI command failed with check
condition
FD Internal SCSI command timeout

Sub Error Codes

Table 8-2. Sub error codes
Error Code Description
ROBOTICS
00 No sub error code
01 Mechanical initialization failure

02 Connection to slave robotic failed

03 Error motor initialization

04 Error during gripper close

05 Error slider home positioning

06 Error elevator home movement

07 Error during sled movement to rotation position

08 Error during rotation initialization, get range failed

09 Error elevator init

0A Error during rotation to far position

0B Error first sled init, move to sensor failed

0C Error during sled movement to rotation position

0D Error during rotation to drive position

0E Error slider init, get range failed

0F Error during slider forward movement

Chapter 8. Error Codes 8-7

Table 8-2. Sub error codes (continued)

10 Error gripper init, get range failed

11 Error during slider home movement

12 Error during rotation to FAR position

13 Error sled init, move to sensor failed

14 Error during sled movement; check shipping lock

20 Error Inventory scan

21 Error during gripper close

22 Error slider home movement

23 Error during move gripper to scan pos

24 Error reading barcode label

25 Error during move sled to scan position
26 Error during move elevator to scan position
27 Error during sled preposition movement

28 Error Extra inventory scan

29 Error during closing gripper

2A Error slider preposition movement

2B Error during opening gripper

2C Error during sled movement up to sensor

2D Error slider preposition backwards movement

30 Error slot preposition

31 Error during sled movement in FLMoveRotation function

32 Command sending to robotic failed

33 Error during elevator movement in FLMoveRotation function

34 Error during rotation in FLMoveRotation function

35 Error during elevator movement in FLMoveSled function

36 Error during sled movement in FLMoveSled function

37 Error during sled positioning to sensor in FLMoveSled function

8-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 8-2. Sub error codes (continued)

38 Error during sled positioning to mail slot in FLMoveSled function

39 Error during sled positioning without sensor

3A Error during elevator movement without sensor
3B Error slot position sensor not found

40 Movement to/from slot failed

41 Error during first slider movement

42 Error during first gripper movement

43 Error during second slider movement

44 Error during second gripper movement, get range failed

45 Error during third slider movement, move home failed

4C Inventory lost, because source may be empty
50 Preposition to drive failed
51 Elevator movement to home sensor failed.
52 Sled movement to home sensor failed.
53 Error during sled movement to drive position.
54 Error during rotation to drive position.
55 Error during elevator movement in drive position.
56 Error during sled movement to rotation position.
57 Error during rotation to end position.
60 Move from/to drive failed.
61 Error during first slider movement.
62 Error during first gripper movement.
63 Error during second slider movement.
64 Error during second gripper movement, get range failed.
65 Error during third slider movement, move home failed.
70 Release magazine failed.
71 Error during sled movement to rotation position.
72 Error during rotation to unlock position.
73 Error during move sled to block.
80 Opening I/O slot failed.
81 Error during movement to I/O slot open position.
82 Error during moving back - sensor was found.
90 Movement to home position failed.
91 Elevator movement to home position failed.
92 Error during sled movement to rotation position.
93 Error during rotation to home or far position.

Chapter 8. Error Codes 8-9

Table 8-2. Sub error codes (continued)
94 Sled movement to home sensor position failed.
95 Sled movement to transport position failed.
A0 Movement of I/O slot failed.
A1 Sled movement to sensor failed.
A2 Sled movement to rotation position failed.
A3 Elevator movement to home position failed.
A4 Error during rotation to far position.
A5 Sled movement to I/O slot position failed.
A6 Error during elevator movement to position
B0 EEPROM on robotics controller not accessible or error during Read/Write operation
LIBRARY

81 Drive wake up failed

88 Error accessing slot status

90 Accessor load not reached Cartridge Present sensor

91 No activity after Load command

92 Timeout while loading tape

93 No activity after load command

94 Timeout drive Unload

95 Drive terminated unsuccessfully

96 Tape not ejected at robot unload

97 Slot not free at robot unload

98 Cartridge not seated in load phase

Warning Events

Warning events described in this section are reported via email notification. The
Attention LED will blink when warning events for the following occur:
v Media
v Fan
v Redundant power supply

An appropriate message will be posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web
User Interface.

8-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 8-3. Warning Events
30 SCSI: transport element full
31 SCSI: all slots empty
32 SCSI: invalid opcode
33 SCSI: invalid element address
34 SCSI: invalid field in CDB
35 SCSI: Invalid drive specified
36 SCSI: SEND DIAGNOSTIC command:
invalid test number
37 SCSI: invalid LUN
38 SCSI: parameter list length error Refer to your host application documentation for problem
39 SCSI: parameter list error: invalid field determination information.

3A SCSI: parameter list error: parameter not

supported
3B SCSI: parameter value invalid
3C SCSI: saving parameters not supported
3D SCSI: invalid ID message
3E SCSI: destination element full
3F SCSI: source slot or drive empty
40 SCSI: wrong checksum
41 SCSI: command sequence error
42 SCSI: drive disabled
Check your configuration settings.
43 SCSI: I/O Station disabled
44 SCSI: flash image does not fit bootcode
45 SCSI: media removal prevented by drive Refer to your host application documentation for problem
determination information.
46 SCSI: media removal prevented by
library
47 SCSI: flash image does not fit personality Check the version of firmware used for the upgrade.
48 SCSI: drive type not supported in this Check whether a version of firmware is available which
library supports this drive type. For a list of supported drives, refer
to “Ultrium Tape Drives” on page 1-7.
49 SCSI: incompatible magazine, magazine
Check your configuration settings.
not accessible
4A SCSI: source not ready
Complete move process and retry operation.
4B SCSI: destination source not ready
4C SCSI: library controller busy Complete process and retry operation.
4D SCSI: cannot make reservation
Refer to your host application documentation for problem
4E SCSI: invalid slave robotic controller determination information.
request
4F SCSI: robotic axes/motors aren't Check robotics status. Refer to “Isolating a Library
initialized Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page
7-11.
50 SCSI: cartridge belongs to another Refer to your host application documentation for problem
partition determination information.

Chapter 8. Error Codes 8-11

 Table 8-3. Warning Events (continued)
54 SCSI: failure in LME interface 1. Check your Encryption configuration.
2. Run Key Path Diagnostics.
3. Refer to your EKM server documentation.
55 SCSI: invalid license key entered Re-enter license key. If problem persists, refer to
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 9-5.
58 Recovered Error: SCSI parity error
No user action is required.
59 Recovered Error: Error log overflow
5A Illegal request, downgrade prohibited Disable encryption for firmware downgrade.
5B Incompatible medium generation Replace incorrect cartridge(s).
5C Illegal request, downgrade prohibited Change network settings to IPv4 only before downgrading
because of incompatible network stack firmware.
5D Illegal request, wrong drive FW for drive Obtain correct drive firmware image.
5E Full high drive in illegal position Check correct Drive position.
60 Cleaning cartridge installed Complete the cleaning process and retry the operation.
61 Cleaning failure. Cleaning process could 1. Verify that autoclean is enabled.
not be performed
2. Check for an expired cleaning cartridge and replace if
necessary.
3. Refer to “Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots”
on page 5-65.
62 Cleaning cartridge expired Replace cleaning cartridge.
63 Invalid cartridge. Drive has rejected the
data cartridge as invalid 1. Verify that the correct cartridge is being used. Refer to
“Cartridge Compatibility” on page 6-3.
64 Invalid cleaning cartridge. Drive has
2. Refer to “Identifying a Suspect Cartridge” on page 7-14.
rejected the cleaning cartridge as invalid
65 Invalid upgrade cartridge. Drive has
Not supported
rejected the upgrade cartridge as invalid
66 Medium error; diagnostic tape write
Ensure diagnostic tape is not write protected.
protected
67 Medium error, incompatible medium for
Replace incorrect cartridge(s).
write operation
70 Currently not used
71 Currently not used
72 Currently not used
73 SCSI: overlapped command attempt Refer to your host application documentation for problem
74 SCSI: echo buffer overwritten determination information.

| 80 Movement Retry.
| 81 Fan Alert.
| 82 Clean request from drive.
| 83 Media Attention.
| 84 Drive reported warning or critical tape
alert flag.
| 85 Network problem. Check network connections, configuration, and settings.
| 86 Not enough cleaning cartridges present Insert additional cleaning cartridges to the empty reserved
to autoclean. slots.

8-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table 8-3. Warning Events (continued)
| 87 Drive disabled because it is not
Check drive type and install only supported drives.
supported for use in this library.
| 88 Drive firmware unchanged after This is normal if the old and new drive firmware are the
upgrade. same version.
| 89 Power Supply Fan operation warning. Check the power supply status.
| 8A Power Supply has failed. Check the power supply status and replace the failed power
supply.
| 8B Power supply has failed. Check the power supply status and replace the failed power
supply.
| 8C Invalid Robotic Code. Install the latest version of library firmware.
| 8E Cleaning tape nearly expired. Continue using cleaning cartridge until it is expired, then
replace the expired cleaning cartridge with a new cleaning
cartridge.
| 8F I2C bus recovery. Run library System Test.
| 92 VPD data have been restored from
This is normal when the VPD has been restored EEPROM.
EEPROM.
DB External cooling fan error (fan motion
has stopped).

The subcode indicates which drive sled

fan is affected Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 7-10.

Subcode 01: drive sled #1(bottom)

Subcode 02: drive sled #2

DC I2C Bus Failure
DD Power Supply x fan has failed,

Redundancy may be at risk

The subcode indicates which power

supply fan is affected Refer to “Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page 7-8.

Subcode 01: 1st PS fan from bottom

Subcode 02: 2nd PS fan from bottom

DF Power Good signal changed from 2 to 1
Power Supplies
F6 No drive installed. A drive has never
Install at least one drive.
been installed.

Chapter 8. Error Codes 8-13

8-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 9. Service Procedures
Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots
In the event of a severe mechanical problem with the library or if circumstances
require you to remove tape cartridges, do the following. If the Operator Control
Panel or the Web User Interface is still operational:
1. Move the tapes from the drive(s) to the magazines using the Move Media
command. See “Manage Library: Move Media” on page 5-41.

Note: Refer to “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 9-5 if a cartridge

will not eject from the drive.
2. Use the magazine removal process to release the magazine and remove it from
the library. To use the Operator Control Panel, see “Control: Magazine” on page
5-17. To use the Web User Interface, see “Manage Library: Release Magazine”
on page 5-42. If neither one of these processes works, see “Releasing the
Magazines Manually.”

Releasing the Magazines Manually

If the directions in Steps 1 and 2 above do not allow you to remove the tapes, do
the following:
1. Unplug the power cord from the library.
2. Find the access holes for the right and left magazines.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 9-1

 a77ug025
Figure 9-1. Access holes for the left magazine

9-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug024
Figure 9-2. Access holes for the right magazine

3. To manually release the magazines, push the end of a straightened paper clip
into the access hole for each magazine at the back of the library. While holding
the paper clip, have a second person pull the magazine out of the front of the
unit. DO NOT push the paper clip in more than 1/2 inch.

Chapter 9. Service Procedures 9-3

 a77ug023
Figure 9-3. Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library

a77ug102

Figure 9-4. Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library

4. If there are additional tapes still in the library, or if you were unable to
manually remove the magazines and drive, contact technical support for
further instructions.

IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)

The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT):

9-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v Runs quick or extended diagnostics on tape drives. If the library is online to the
server/host where the tool resides, ITDT will communicate with the drive
through the library to load and unload a test cartridge thereby exercising some
library functions.
v Retrieves firmware dumps from tape drives and libraries.
| v Performs a firmware update on tape drives or libraries. See note below
| regarding library firmware update.
v Tests the performance of the environment by completely writing a cartridge and
measuring performance.
v Retrieves and displays cartridge information.
v Verifies the encryption environment.
v Does not require special device drivers.
v Is available for most major platforms.
v Scans the host interface and will find and display for selection all IBM LTO
devices. The tool will not display non-IBM devices.

| The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) v4.1 is available as a command
| line utility and a graphical user interface (GUI) version.
| v The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) v4.1 tool is a command line
| utility. Invoke it by entering the executable from the directory where the tool is
| located. The Help feature gives a brief explanation of each function and shows
| the required syntax.
| v The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) v4.1 tool is a GUI version
| for Microsoft Windows. Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Server
| 2003 (IX86, 32-bit) are only supported.

| Note: ITDT v4.1 or higher is required for Ultrium 5 tape drives. Before using
| ITDT, verify that your library host operating system is at the latest released
| level. This will ensure optimum read/write operations for diagnostics.

Note: The legacy Tape Products (3580 GEN1 and GEN2, 3581, 3582, and 3583
Products) are not supported with this version of ITDT but are still
supported with the older version of ITDT v1.2.

| Note: If the library has a BCR (Barcode Reader) that requires 9.00 or greater
| firmware, the Update function will terminate with an error code of
| "Unexpected Data" if you attempt to downlevel the library firmware.

To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool, visit
http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/.

Contacting IBM Technical Support

Note: The IBM System Storage™ TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library
is a customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and
maintenance of the tape library. The customer will be charged for service
if a service contract is not in place.

Note: Where instructions refer you to the web, visit http://www-03.ibm.com/

servers/storage/support/lto/.
1. Verify that you have exhausted all of the following troubleshooting options:
a. Perform all recommended diagnostic procedures.

Chapter 9. Service Procedures 9-5

 b. Verify that the library’s and drive’s firmware is at the most recent level. To
determine the latest release of firmware, visit the web.
c. Verify that your device drivers are at the most recent level (see your server
(host) manual for instructions).
v For the latest release of IBM device drivers, visit the web.
v For the latest release of device drivers by Independent Software Vendors
(ISVs), visit the appropriate third-party web site.
d. Verify whether your hardware and software configuration is supported. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web
e. Ensure that cables and connectors are not damaged.
f. Review all documentation carefully. (Experience has demonstrated that most
questions are answered in your documentation.)
2. Follow these steps to take full advantage of your call:
a. Be prepared to explain whether the software or hardware has worked
properly at anytime in the past. Have you changed anything recently?
b. Pinpoint the exact location of your problem, if possible. Note the steps that
led to the problem. Can you duplicate the problem or is it a one-time
occurrence?
c. Note any error messages displayed on your PC monitor or file server. Write
down the exact error message.
d. If at all possible, call while at your computer, with the library installed and
turned on.
e. If running on a network, have all relevant information available (that is,
type, version number, network hardware, and so on).
f. Having this information available when you call for customer assistance will
enable support personnel to resolve your problem in the most efficient
manner possible.
v Library Machine type and Model name(s)
v Serial number of the library (front of the library on the label underneath
the power button)
v Library and drive firmware levels currently installed
v Device driver information
v Host application name and version
v Type of host, operating system version, clock speed, RAM, network type,
network version, and any special boards installed
3. The IBM Support Center will assist with problem determination and initiate
shipment of a replacement part, if needed, to your location. To contact IBM
Technical Support:
v In the USA: 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).
v All other Countries/Regions: http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/.
v To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click Open
a Service Request.

9-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace
Tools Required
To service a library you may need one or more of the following tools:
v #2 Phillips screwdriver
v Ground strap (recommended, if available)

Electrostatic Discharge
Important: A discharge of static electricity can damage static-sensitive devices or
microcircuitry. Proper packaging and grounding techniques are
necessary precautions to prevent damage.

Figure 10-1. ESD label

To prevent electrostatic damage, observe the following precautions:

v Transport products in static-safe containers such as conductive tubes, bags, or
boxes.
v Keep electrostatic-sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free
stations.
v Cover the unit with approved static-dissipating material. If available, provide a
ground strap connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and
equipment. If a ground strap is not available, touch a metal surface to discharge
any static electricity in your body.
v Keep the work area free of no conducting materials, such as ordinary plastic
assembly aids and foam packing.
v Make sure you are always properly grounded when touching a static-sensitive
component or assembly.
v Avoid touching pins, leads, or circuitry.
v Use conductive field service tools.

Relocating Your Library

When moving or shipping your library, it is important that the shipping lock be in
place to prevent the accessor from moving and to protect the library from possible
damage. Before relocating your library, complete the following procedure.
1. Remove all cartridges from inside the library.
2. Power OFF the library. This will align the robot with the shipping lock slot.
3. Remove any cables and terminators connected to the library.
4. Remove the library from the rack, if necessary.
5. Remove the shipping label (2) and lock (1) from the rear panel of the
library.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 10-1

 1

a77ug019
Figure 10-2. Shipping Lock and Label Storage Location

6. Insert the shipping lock (1) into the slot located on the center of the top of
the library and secure with the shipping label (2).

2
a77ug018

Figure 10-3. Shipping Lock and Label

7. Pack the library in its original packaging materials (or equivalent packaging)
for moving or shipping.
Table 10-1. Shipping Lock/Shipping Label
1 Shipping Lock
2 Shipping Label

10-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled
There are two types of drive sleds in a TS3100 library (2U library) and a TS3200
library (4U library). The contents of the ship groups are specific to the type of
drive sled.
v Drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) springs (see Figure 10-4) ship
group:
– Drive sled without ESD springs
– Packet of conductive tape to be applied to the drive sled for ESD protection
v Drive sled with ESD springs (see Figure 10-5 on page 10-4) ship group:
– Drive sled with ESD springs

a77ug008

Figure 10-4. Library drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) springs (SCSI sled shown)

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-3

 1

a77ug202
Figure 10-5. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS sled shown)

Removing a Tape Drive Sled

1. IT IS IMPORTANT TO PRESERVE A DRIVE DUMP FOR IBM ANALYSIS IF
ALL OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS EXIST:
v Library Error LED is ON.
v Operator Control Panel is displaying a drive error message.
v Web User Interface System Status screen is indicating that a drive has failed.
For instructions on preserving the drive dump, refer to “Before You Begin” on
page A-2.
IF NONE OF THE CONDITIONS LISTED ABOVE EXIST, PROCEED TO THE
NEXT STEP.
2. Power OFF the library before removing and/or installing a SCSI drive sled.
Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and
installed while the library is powered ON.
3. If necessary, unload the tape cartridge from the drive to be removed.
v Using the Operator Control Panel: Control → Move Cartridges
v Using the Web User Interface: Manage Library → Move Media
4. Remove the host interface cable (1, 2, or 4 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5)
and terminator (3 for SCSI drive sled only).

10-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 7 9 10 4 7

a77ug204
6 1 3 2 8 5

Figure 10-6. Drive sled components (full-high fibre drive in top position, half-high SCSI drive in middle position,
half-high SAS drive in bottom position) on back panel of a 4U library

1 SCSI cable

2 SAS cable
3 SCSI terminator
4 Fibre Channel cable
5 Ethernet cable
6 Power cords
7 Drive sled blue captive thumbscrews
8 Black pull-out tab
9 Drive sled
10 Drive sled handle

5. If present, remove the conductive tape from the drive sled (refer to Figure 10-9
on page 10-8).
6. Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews (7 in Figure 10-6) on the drive sled.
7. Pull straight back on the drive sled handle (10) to remove it from the library
(see Figure 10-7 on page 10-6).
8. If you are replacing the tape drive sled, proceed to Installing a Tape Drive Sled
for instructions. If you are not replacing the tape drive sled immediately, you
will need to perform the following procedures:
a. Install a drive cover plate to protect your library from dust and debris.
b. To remove the "Missing drive" indicators on the Operator Control Panel
(Attention LED) and the Web User Interface (System Status screen), modify
or resubmit logical library setting (Operator Control Panel: Configure →
Logical Libraries or Web User Interface: Configure Library → Logical
Libraries).

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-5

 a77ug027
Figure 10-7. Pulling the drive sled out of the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)

Installing a Tape Drive Sled

Note: Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled. Fibre Channel and
SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while
the library is powered ON.

Important: In a 4U library a full high drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1
(drive will occupy slot 1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy
slot 3 and slot 4). A full high drive sled should never be installed in
drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).
1. Before installing the new drive sled, inspect all connectors on the drive sled.
Ensure that the connectors are intact, free of any foreign objects, and have no
cracks, deformed, or bent contacts.
2. Extend the black pull-out tab (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5) located
underneath the library near the lower right corner of the drive sled.
3. Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while supporting the
bottom of the drive sled (see Figure 10-8 on page 10-7). Ensure that the black
tab remains extended (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5).

Important: Push in on the drive sled handle (10 in Figure 10-6 on page
10-5) while supporting the bottom of the drive sled until it is
properly seated. Damage to the connector pins may occur if this
procedure is not followed.
4. Push the drive sled slowly into the drive slot until the sled seats itself against
the back of the library.

10-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug028
Figure 10-8. Pushing the drive sled into the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)

5. Tighten the captive thumbscrews (7 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5) until the
drive sled is secure.
6. If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs (see Figure 10-4 on page
10-3), apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Figure 10-9 on page 10-8.

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-7

 2U Library 4U Library

a77ug203
Figure 10-9. Diagrams for applying conductive tape for ESD protection to the back of a drive sled installed in a 2U or
4U library

Note: The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed
to provide ESD protection.
7. Push the black tab (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5) back underneath the
library. When inserted properly, only the handle of the tab will be visible.
8. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version.
Refer to “Configure Library: Drives” on page 5-48 to configure the drive if it
is a SCSI or FC drive. Connect the drive host interface cable to the host or FC
switch.

Note: Go to http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/ to download the latest

firmware for your library and tape drive(s).
9. Run the Library Verify test. (Operator Control Panel: Service → Library
Verify). This test requires the use of a scratch (blank) cartridge.
v If the test passes:
– When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O
Station opens, remove the cartridge used in the test.
– Close the I/O Station by pushing it back into the library.
– Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen.
– Resume normal library operations.
v If the test fails, an error code will be displayed. Make note of the error, then
refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in this document for additional
instructions.
10. Package the failed drive sled in the same packaging in which the new sled
was shipped to you and return to IBM. Fill out the Warranty Redemption
form and return it in the package with the drive sled.

10-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Important: If the failed drive was configured for encryption, to ensure the
replacement drive receives the proper encryption parameters,
resubmit the encryption choices listed on Configure Library →
Encryption for that particular drive or logical library even if the
encryption settings did not change.

Adding a Tape Drive Sled

Use these instructions to add a new tape drive to your 2U or 4U Tape Library.
Refer to Appendix B, “SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical
Configurations,” on page B-1 for more information.

Note: Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled. Fibre Channel and
SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while
the library is powered ON.

Important: In a 4U library a full high drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1
(drive will occupy slot 1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy
slot 3 and slot 4). A full high drive sled should never be installed in
drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).

Complete the following procedure to add a new tape drive to your library.
1. Before installing the new drive sled, inspect all connectors on the drive sled.
Ensure that the connectors are intact, free of any foreign objects, and have no
cracks, deformed, or bent contacts.
2. Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while supporting the
bottom of the drive sled (see Figure 10-8 on page 10-7). If necessary, ensure that
the black tab remains extended (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5). Push in on
the drive sled handle (10 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5) while supporting the
bottom of the drive sled until it is properly seated.

Important: Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not
followed.
3. Tighten the captive thumbscrews (7 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-5) until the
drive sled is secure.
4. If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs (see Figure 10-4 on page
10-3), apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Figure 10-9 on page 10-8.

Note: The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed to
provide ESD protection.
5. Install cover plates on any open drive slots in the library.
6. Power ON the library.
7. Run the Library Verify test. (Operator Control Panel: Service → Library Verify).
This test requires the use of a scratch (blank) cartridge.
v If the test passes:
– When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O
Station opens, remove the cartridge used in the test.
– Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen.
– Proceed to “Configuring the Tape Drive” on page 10-10.
v If the test fails, an error code will be displayed. Make note of the error, then
refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape
Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator and Service Guide (GA32-0545)
for additional instructions.

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-9

 Configuring the Tape Drive
1. Log on to the Web User Interface.
2. Verify that you are running the latest version of Library firmware and drive
firmware (library firmware: Monitor Library → Library Identity; drive
firmware: Monitor Library → Drive Identity). Upgrade, if necessary (Service
Library → Upgrade Firmware).
3. Use the Web UI to update the Logical Library (Configure Library → Logical
Libraries) and Drive (Configure Library → Drives) configurations. Refer to
Chapter 5, “Operations,” on page 5-1. Select Submit on the Configure Library
→ Logical Libraries web page even if there are no required changes. This action
will refresh the Data Transfer Element (DTE) for the drives. Refer to
Appendix B, “SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical
Configurations,” on page B-1 for information regarding DTE addressing. If
Configure Library → Logical Libraries does not correctly refresh/update the
DTE addresses, execute step 3 and step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 5.
4. Reconfigure your library using the OCP to configure your network settings,
then using the Web UI to complete your library configuration.
5. Save your library configuration to your host computer or to a USB device.
6. Update your Library Configuration Form with the new drive and configuration
information.
7. Resume normal library operations.

Removing the Slot Blocker - 2U Library

Earlier versions of the 2U library may have a "slot blocker" in the upper right cell
of the left magazine. A slot blocker is used to close off/restrict a data cell so a data
cartridge cannot be placed there. For 2U libraries using library firmware of 1.90 or
higher, this blocker can be removed by following the procedure below:

a77ug167

Figure 10-10. 2U Magazine with Slot Blocker

Completely remove the magazine from the library. The power does not have to be
turned off.
1. In the upper right cell, locate the slot blocker (1).
2. Remove the slot blocker.
a. From behind the magazine, push a screwdriver or a pen through the hole.
b. Pop the slot blocker out of the cell.

10-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug168
Figure 10-11. Popping the Slot Blocker out of the Cell

3. Slide the magazine back into the rack.

4. After the accessor runs through the inspection, a REMOVE SLOT
RESTRICTION? message will appear on the main menu screen.
5. Choose the YES option. You can replace the empty cell with a data cartridge.

Replacing a Power Supply

1. Power OFF the library by pressing and holding down the power button for 4
seconds.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source, then from the library.
3. Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on
the back panel of the library.
4. Pull on two of the thumbscrews to pull the unit away from the rear panel of
the library, then grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and pull
it out of the library.

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-11

 a66mi096
Figure 10-12. A power supply being removed from a 2U library

5. Remove the packaging from the replacement power supply.

6. Grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and push it into the
library.
7. Tighten the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on
the back panel of the library.
8. Connect the power cord to the library, then to the electrical source.
9. Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel.
10. Run the Library Verify test (refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 5-30).
11. Package the failed power supply in the same packaging in which the new
power supply was shipped to you and return to IBM. Fill out the Warranty
Redemption form and return it in the package with the power supply.

Replacing a Library Controller Card

Read Me before Continuing

The Library Controller Card contains a copy of the vital product data (VPD) for
your library. The VPD contains your current library configuration. A backup copy
of this VPD is contained within the electronics of the Library Enclosure. When the
Library Controller Card is replaced, the new replacement card should contain zeros
(0's) in key VPD locations. Upon detection of these zeros, the library will
automatically attempt to write VPD data to the new Library Controller Card from
the backup copy of the VPD contained in the Library Enclosure. In rare
occurrences, the new Library Controller Card may contain valid (non-zero) VPD
data left over from having been installed previously in another library. If this
occurs, the library, which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area, will instead
detect valid VPD data, and will not know which copy of the VPD is the correct
one. It will detect a “VPD Mismatch” and display on the Operator Control Panel a
screen entitled “VPD Selection”, where it is asking you to determine which copy of
VPD should be written to the new Library Controller Card.

10-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 If the message "VPD Selection" is displayed at the Operator Control Panel,
carefully highlight the “VPD from Enclosure" option to copy that version of the
VPD to the new Library Controller Card. Then continue with the procedure.

Removal and Replacement

1. Power OFF the library by pressing and holding the power button at the front
of the library for 4 seconds.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source, then from the power
supply or supplies at the back of the library.
3. Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card.
4. Grasp the two thumbscrews and pull the defective Library Controller Card
out of the library.

a66mi097
Figure 10-13. A Library Controller Card being removed from the library

5. Remove the packaging from the replacement Library Controller Card.

6. Grasp the two thumbscrews and push the replacement Library Controller
Card into the library.
7. Tighten the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card.
8. Connect the power cord to the power supply or supplies at the back of the
library, then to the electrical source.
9. Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel.
10. After power is restored to the Library Controller Card, the library will
automatically restore the VPD on the new Library Controller Card from the
Library Enclosure. If a "VPD Selection" message is displayed in the Operator
Control Panel, see the "Read Me before Continuing" section earlier in this
procedure to determine how to respond to the message.
11. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version. See
“Service Library: Upgrade Firmware” on page 5-62.
12. Run the Library Verify test (refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 5-30).

Note: Use care when selecting the appropriate VPD to restore from/to. An
error in selection here could cause a long downtime.

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-13

 13. Package the failed Library Controller Card in the same packaging in which
the new control board was shipped to you and return to IBM. Fill out the
Warranty Redemption form and return it in the package with the Library
Controller Card.

Replacing Cartridge Magazines

To replace a cartridge magazine, refer to one of the following procedures:
v Using the Web User Interface, refer to “Manage Library: Release Magazine” on
page 5-42.
v Using the Operator Control Panel, refer to “Control: Magazine” on page 5-17.
v If your library can not be powered ON, refer to “Releasing the Magazines
Manually” on page 9-1.

Replacing Magazine Fiducials

Magazine fiducials are location sensors utilized by the library accessor. Extra
magazine fiducials are included in your original library shipment.

2
1

4
5
a66mi098

6 7

Figure 10-14. Magazine fiducial

1. Remove the cartridge magazine that requires a replacement fiducial (refer to

“Cartridge Magazines” on page 4-37.

10-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2. Remove the damaged fiducial by pushing on the fiducial tab (3) and pulling
the fiducial (1) out of the slot in the magazine (2).
3. Slide the replacement fiducial (1) into the correct magazine slot (2) being
sure that the fiducial tab (6) on each side of the fiducial is underneath the
magazine slot at 5 and above the magazine slot at 4. Ensure that the
fiducial is not installed in the magazine slot as indicated by 7.
4. Slide the cartridge magazine into the library and resume normal library
operation.

Replacing the Library Enclosure

This procedure is necessary when the library enclosure, accessor, or display fails.
These components are contained within the replacement library enclosure.

Important: Refer to the Installation Instructions that are included with the new
replacement library enclosure. Follow the procedures included in this
document for replacing the Library Enclosure, only if Installation
Instructions are not included with the new replacement library
enclosure.

The replacement library enclosure includes cartridge magazines, a power supply, a

Library Controller Card, and a packet of library foot pads. These items are
included with the replacement library enclosure due to safety agency requirements.
These unused parts will be removed from the replacement library enclosure and
returned to IBM in the defective library. The old parts currently in your defective
library will be removed, and installed into the replacement library enclosure.

Note: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:

v observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual
material handling
v obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during
installation or removal

Minimum Installation Time: 1 hr.

Minimum Number of Persons Required: 2

Recommended Tools: #2 Phillips screw driver, paper clip, blank (or scratch) data
cartridge

Preparing the Defective Library for Replacement

1. If possible, use the Operator Control Panel to unload any drives that contain a
cartridge (Control → Move Cartridges).
2. Power OFF the defective library.
3. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the defective library.
4. If the defective library is rack mounted, remove the two screws (1 in
Figure 10-15 on page 10-16) from the front of the defective library anchoring the
mounting brackets on the library to the rack. With assistance, remove the
defective library from the rack.

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-15

 a77ug112
1

Figure 10-15. Removing the two mounting bracket screws anchoring the library to the rack (one screw on each side of
the library)

5. Place the defective library on a clean and sturdy work surface.

6. Proceed to “Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure.”

Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure

Before installing the replacement library enclosure, it is important to verify that the
enclosure is functioning properly.
1. Unpack the replacement library enclosure and place it on a sturdy and clean
work surface near the defective library. Save all packaging materials for
returning the failing part(s) to IBM.
2. Choose one of the options below for installing the foot pads.

Important: Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may
damage your library or cause it not to function properly.
v Rack Mount - temporary placement of the foot pads
v Desktop - permanent placement of the foot pads
a. For a rack mounted library:
1) Lift the replacement library enclosure slightly above the work surface,
have another person place a foot pad under each corner of the library
and on each side of the library halfway between the front and back.
2) Gently set the replacement library enclosure on top of the feet. Adjust
foot pad placement as necessary to stabilize the library. Do not
permanently attach the foot pads to the library.
b. For a desktop library:
1) Carefully, lay the library on its side.
2) Peel the adhesive from the back of each of the six foot pads.
3) Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing
each foot into one of the six areas (1) as shown in Figure 10-16 on
page 10-17.

10-16 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1

a77ug085
Figure 10-16. Foot pads installed on the bottom of the library enclosure

3. Carefully return the library to an upright position.

4. Remove the shipping lock from the top of the replacement library enclosure
(see Figure 10-17 on page 10-18).

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-17

 a77ug195
Figure 10-17. Removing the shipping label and lock from the top of the library and storing on the rear panel

5. Store the lock and label on the back panel of the replacement library enclosure
(see Figure 10-18).

2
a77ug019

Figure 10-18. Library shipping lock and label storage location on the real panel of the library

6. Proceed to “Installing Your Drive(s) in the Replacement Library Enclosure.”

Installing Your Drive(s) in the Replacement Library Enclosure

Note: It is important to install the drives from the defective library into the
same positions in the replacement library enclosure in order to maintain
your current library configuration.

10-18 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1. Remove all drives from the defective library (see Figure 10-19) and install them
in the same positions in the replacement library enclosure.

a77ug027
Figure 10-19. Removing a drive sled from the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)

a. Ensure the power cord is unplugged from the power source for each Power
Supply in the defective library enclosure.
b. On the rear of the defective library, loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on
the drive sled.
c. If necessary, remove the conductive tape from the drive sled.
d. Pull back on the tape drive handle to remove it from the library.
e. On the rear of the replacement library enclosure, extend the black pull-out
tab located underneath the lower right corner of the lowest drive sled
position. Ensure that the black pull-out tab remains extended when
inserting a drive sled in the lowest drive position in the library.

Important: Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is

not followed.
f. Place each tape drive into the replacement library enclosure in the same
drive slot as it was positioned in the defective library.
v While supporting the drive assembly, align the drive sled with the groove
in the drive slot rails.
v Slowly push the drive sled forward until it is properly seated.
g. Tighten the captive thumbscrews until the drive is secure.
h. If installing a drive sled without ESD springs (see Figure 10-19), apply
conductive tape as shown in Figure 10-20 on page 10-20.

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-19

 2U Library 4U Library

a77ug203
Figure 10-20. Drive sled taping diagrams

Note: The gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed.
i. Push the black tab back underneath the drive sled. When inserted properly,
only the handle of the tab will be visible.
2. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
a. If power ON is successful:
1) After power up, the Ready/Activity LED (1 in Figure 10-23 on page
10-24) will turn ON.
a) If the following message is displayed after the library powers ON,
follow the instructions in Step 1. If the message is NOT displayed
skip Step 1 and proceed to Step 2.
[New library detected.]
[1. Perform Library Verify]
[2. Power Off and insert LCC]
[from old library ]
[ ok ]
b) The system will initialize completely.
c) After confirming the pop-up, you should be able to use the
interfaces.
d) Run the Library Verify test (Operator Control Panel: Service →
Library Verify). This diagnostic requires a blank or scratch data
cartridge
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) You must power down, remove the CRU LCC and replace it with the
original LCC to have VPD transferred from the original LCC to the new
chassis.
4) Proceed to “Swapping Power Supplies” on page 10-21.
b. If power ON is not successful:

10-20 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1) The Error LED (4 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-24) will turn ON.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Contact IBM Technical Support for further instructions.

Swapping Power Supplies

1. Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the replacement
library enclosure if this was not done previously (see “Installing Your Drive(s)
in the Replacement Library Enclosure” on page 10-18).
2. Swap the Power Supply in the defective library with the Power Supply in the
replacement library enclosure.
a. Remove the power supply from the defective library and from the
replacement library enclosure. To remove a power supply from a library:
1) Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply.
2) Pull on two of the thumbscrews, on opposite sides of the power supply,
and pull the unit away from the rear panel of the library.
3) Grasp the top and bottom edges of the power supply and remove it
from the library.
b. Install the power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure in
the defective library to return to IBM. To install a power supply:
1) While supporting the power supply, align the power supply with the
groove in the enclosure rails.
2) Push the power supply forward until it is properly seated.
3) Tighten the thumbscrews.

a66mi096

Figure 10-21. A power supply being removed from a library

3. Plug the power cord into the replacement library enclosure then into a power
source.
4. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
a. If power ON is successful:

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-21

 1) The replacement library enclosure will power up with the
Ready/Activity LED (1 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-24) ON.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the library.
4) Proceed to “Swapping Library Controller Cards.”
b. If power ON is not successful, contact IBM Technical Support for further
instructions.

Swapping Library Controller Cards

IMPORTANT - READ ME BEFORE CONTINUING

The Library Enclosure contains a copy of the vital product data (VPD) for your library. The VPD contains your
current library configuration. A primary copy of this VPD is contained within the Library Controller Card. A backup
copy of this VPD is maintained on the accessor in the enclosure (or chassis). When the Library Enclosure is
replaced, the new enclosure electronics should contain zeros (0's) in key VPD locations. Upon detection of these
zeros, the library will automatically write VPD data to the replacement library enclosure from the primary copy of
the VPD contained in the Library Controller Card. In rare occurrences, the replacement library enclosure may
contain valid (non-zero) VPD data left over from having been installed previously in another library. If this occurs,
the library firmware, which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area, will instead detect valid VPD data, and will
not know which copy of the VPD is the correct one. It will detect this VPD mismatch and display a message
entitled “VPD Selection” on the Operator Control Panel. The library will need your input to determine which copy
of VPD to write to the replacement library enclosure. If you are replacing both the Library enclosure and the
Library Controller Card, transfer VPD after installing one part before installing the other.

If the message “VPD Selection” is displayed at the Operator Control Panel, carefully highlight the “VPD from
Controller” option before selecting OK. This will copy VPD from the controller to the replacement library enclosure.

1. Swap the Library Controller Card in the defective library with the Library
Controller Card in the replacement library enclosure.
a. Remove the Library Controller Card (see Figure 10-22 on page 10-23) in the
defective library and in the replacement library enclosure. To remove a
Library Controller Card:
1) Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller
Card.
2) Grasp the thumbscrews and pull the card out of the library.
b. Install the Library Controller Card from the defective library in the
replacement library enclosure. Install the Library Controller Card from the
replacement library enclosure in the defective library to return to IBM. To
install a Library Controller Card:
1) Grasp the Library Controller Card faceplate and align the Library
Controller Card with the groove in the enclosure rails.
2) Push the Library Controller Card forward until it is properly seated.

Note: You will hear a snap when the Library Controller Card is fully
engaged and installed properly.
3) Tighten the thumbscrews.

10-22 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a66mi097
Figure 10-22. Removing a Library Controller Card from the library

Note: If you power on the replacement library without first swapping the
Library Controller Card from the original (defective) library
enclosure, the following message will appear on the Operator Control
Panel shortly after applying power: "New library detected. Please
remove library power and insert Library Controller Card from old
Library". The library requires the library serial number and other
library attributes from the original library which is located in the
VPD on the original Library Controller Card in order to continue
library initialization. See Important - Read Me Before Continuing
message listed above.

As a further Note, if the replacement library does not complete

library initialization successfully after swapping in the original
Library Controller Card, be sure to retain the original Library
Controller Card so it can be swapped into the “new” replacement
library enclosure which will have to be ordered.
2. Plug one end of the power cord (removed earlier from the defective library)
into the rear panel of the replacement library enclosure and plug the other end
into a power source.
3. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
a. If power ON is successful:
1) The Ready/Activity LED (1) will turn ON indicating that all
components are functioning properly.
2) After power is restored to the replacement library enclosure, the library
will automatically restore the VPD on the replacement library enclosure
from the Library Controller Card. If a “VPD Selection” message is
displayed in the Operator Control Panel, see the “Read Me before
Continuing” section earlier in this procedure to determine how to
respond to the message.
3) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
4) Proceed to “Swapping Cartridge Magazines” on page 10-24.
b. If power ON is not successful:

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-23

 1) The Error LED (4 in Figure 10-23) will turn ON. This indicates that the
Library Controller Card from the defective library is not functioning
properly.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Refer to IBM Technical Support for further instructions.

Figure 10-23. Library front panel LEDs

1 Ready/Activity LED (green) 3 Attention LED (amber)

2 Clean Drive LED (amber) 4 Error LED (amber)

Swapping Cartridge Magazines

1. Manually release and remove all magazines from the defective library and from
the replacement library enclosure. To release and remove a cartridge magazine:
a. Find the access holes for the right and left magazines (see Figure 10-24 on
page 10-25 and Figure 10-25 on page 10-26).

10-24 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug025
Figure 10-24. Access hole for the left magazine (facing rear of library)

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-25

 a77ug024
Figure 10-25. Access hole for the right magazine (facing rear of library)

b. Push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for each
magazine at the back of the library. DO NOT push the paper clip in more
than ½ inch. While holding the paper clip, have a second person pull the
magazine out from the front of the unit.

Note: To prevent dropping the magazine, support both ends of the

magazine before it clears the front edge of the library.

10-26 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a77ug102
Figure 10-26. Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library (facing front of library)

2. Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the defective library into the same
positions in the replacement library enclosure.
3. Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the replacement library enclosure
into the same positions in the defective libraryto return to IBM.
4. Wait for inventory of the magazines to complete.
a. If inventory is successful:
1) The replacement library enclosure will complete with the
Ready/Activity LED (1 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-24) ON.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Proceed to “Swapping Power Supplies” on page 10-21.
b. If inventory is not successful:
1) The Error LED (4 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-24) will turn ON.
2) Power OFF the enclosure.
3) Contact IBM Technical Support for further instructions.

Installing the Replacement Library Enclosure

Refer to the appropriate procedure in this section (rack or desktop) for installing
the replacement library enclosure.

Note: If you are shipping the replacement library enclosure to a remote location,
install the shipping lock and label before shipment.

Rack Installation:
1. Remove the mounting brackets (1 in Figure 10-27 on page 10-28) and anchors
(2) from each side of the defective library and install them on the
replacement library enclosure.

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-27

 1 2

a77ug012
Figure 10-27. Mounting brackets and anchors for securing the library in a rack (one bracket and anchor on each side
of the library)

2. With assistance, slide the replacement library enclosure onto the metal rails that
are already in position in the rack (see Figure 10-28).
a77ug196

Figure 10-28. Front view of a rack showing the rails installed

3. Tighten the mounting bracket screws (1 in Figure 10-15 on page 10-16) to
anchor the replacement library enclosure to the rack.
4. Proceed to “Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure.”

Desktop Installation:
1. Place the library in its permanent location.
2. Proceed to “Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure.”

Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library

Enclosure
1. Connect all cables to the replacement library enclosure.
2. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
3. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version.

10-28 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a. Visit http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/ to download the latest levels of
library and drive firmware.
b. Using the Web User Interface (Service Library → Upgrade Firmware),
upgrade library and drive firmware.
4. Run the Library Verify test (Operator Control Panel: Service → Library Verify).
This diagnostic requires a blank or scratch data cartridge.
5. Properly fill out the Repair Identification (RID) Tag that was included with the
replacement library enclosure.

Note: A RID (Repair Identification) Tag maintains the original serial number
record of the library to ensure your warranty coverage, if applicable, is
not interrupted. The tag is important for customer inventory accuracy.
Follow the instructions on the RID tag precisely.
a. Copy the serial number of the defective library onto the RID tag.
b. Apply the tag to the front of the new replacement library enclosure (as
shown in Figure 10-29)

IBM REPAIR IDENTIFICATION TAG

REPAIR ID TAG
MT
SN

PART NUMBER 19P5941

ATTENTION:
1. A Repair ID tag maintains the original serial
number record of the machine and allows IBM
to entitle the machine for future maintenance
or warranty service. Mail in exchange requires
the completion and securing a Repair ID tag
(part number 19P5941) to the replacement
unit. Please be sure to use the following
procedures when replacing your 3580 or 3581
units:
- Verify that the machine serial number on
the failing unit matches the serial number
reported to IBM technical support.
- Transcribe the machine type, model, and
serial number of the failing unit to the
Repair ID tag for the replacement unit.
USE BALLPOINT PEN TO
COMPLETE THE RID TAG.
- Place the Repair ID tag as close as
possible, but not covering, the machine
a77ug032

serial number of the replacement unit.

- The original serial number must be visible.
2. The use of the Repair ID tag is important for
customer inventory accuracy.

Figure 10-29. Proper placement of the Repair Identification (RID) Tag

6. Proceed to “Returning the Defective Library Enclosure.”

Returning the Defective Library Enclosure

1. Remove the shipping label (2 in Figure 10-18 on page 10-18) and lock (1)
from the rear panel of the defective library, place the lock in the slot located in
the top center of the library, and secure with the shipping lock label. This will
secure the library accessor for shipping.
2. Fill out the Warranty Redemption card that was included with the replacement
library enclosure.
3. Using the replacement library enclosure packaging materials, securely package
the defective library (including the left and right magazines, Library Controller

Chapter 10. Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 10-29

 Card, and power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure) and
return it, along with the Warranty Redemption Card, to IBM.

Important: Failure to return all of these components to IBM will result in

you being charged for any missing components.

10-30 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Chapter 11. Optional Features, Replacement Parts and Power
Cords
For information on ordering tape cartridges, refer to “Ordering Media Supplies” on
page 6-19. For information on ordering bar code labels, refer to “Ordering Bar
Code Labels” on page 6-21

Optional Features
Table 11-1. Optional Features
Feature Code Description
| 1682 Path Failover (4U) Supported on 2U with library firmware levels above 8.xx
1901 Additional Power Supply (4U)
5096 LC-SC Fibre Cable Interposer
5400 SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
5402 2 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5406 5.5 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5500 Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
5502 2 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5506 5.5 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5602 2.5 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
5604 4.5 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
5610 10 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
5900 Transparent LTO Encryption
6005 5 m LC/LC Fibre Cable
6013 13 m LC/LC Fibre Cable
6025 25 m LC/LC Fibre Cable
7002 Rack Mount Kit
8002 Cleaning Cartridge L1 UCC
8043 Ultrium 3 LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
8044 Ultrium 3 4Gb/s Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled
8046 Ultrium 3 Half-High SCSI Tape Drive Sled
8047 Ultrium 3 Half-High SAS Tape Drive Sled
8106 Right Side Magazine
8107 Left upper 4U Magazine
8108 Left lower 4U Magazine
8109 Left side 2U Magazine
8143 Ultrium 4 SCSI Tape Drive Sled
8144 Ultrium 4 Fibre Tape Drive Sled
8145 Ultrium 4 SAS Tape Drive Sled
8147 Ultrium 4 Half-High SAS Tape Drive Sled
8305 Data Cart (GEN3) 5-Pack

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 11-1

 Table 11-1. Optional Features (continued)
Feature Code Description
8405 Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges (5 pack)
9001 Driveless Library
9848 Rack Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Line Cord
| 8245 Ultrium 5 SAS (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
| 8244 Ultrium 5 Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
| 8247 Ultrium 5 Half-High SAS (6Gb) Tape Drive Sled
| 8248 Ultrium 5 Half-High Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
| 8505 Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges (5-pack)
9900 Encryption Configuration

Replacement Parts
Note: This library has Tier 1 and Tier 2 CRUs (customer replaceable units). (Tier 1:
No tools needed Tier 2: Tools needed) These CRUs are parts of the library
that should be added, removed, and replaced by the customer. If a customer
chooses to have the CRU added or removed/replaced by an IBM Service
Representative, there will be a charge for the service.
Table 11-2. Replacement Parts
Part Number Description
| 46X4395 Ultrium 5 Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
| 46X4393 Ultrium 5 SAS Drive (6Gb) Tape Drive Sled
| 46X4394 Ultrium 5 HH SAS (6Gb) Tape Drive Sled
| 46X4396 Ultrium 5 HH Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
95P5855 Ultrium 4 Full High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
95P5856 Ultrium 4 Full High Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled
95P5857 Ultrium 4 Full High SAS Tape Drive Sled
45E2695 Ultrium 4 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled
95P5218 Ultrium 3 Full High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
95P5219 Ultrium 3 Full High Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled
95P5858 Ultrium 3 Half High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
95P5859 Ultrium 3 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled
45E0657 Library Controller Card
95P6037 250 W Power Supply (can be used in both 2U and 4U libraries; is a replacement for an 2U
library 80w power supply)
23R7170 Foot Pads
23R5841 SCSI Terminator
23R5840 SCSI Wrap Tool
12R9314 Fibre Channel Wrap Tool
23R3841 2.5 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
23R3594 4.5 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
23R3593 10 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable

11-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 11-2. Replacement Parts (continued)
Part Number Description
95P4587 2 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
39M5700 5 m LC-LC Fibre Channel Cable
12R9559 13 m LC-LC Fibre Channel Cable
39M5701 25 m LC-LC Fibre Channel Cable
95P4588 5.5 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
95P4488 2 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
95P4494 5.5 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
95P5933 SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
95P5177 Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
95P6566 SAS Wrap Tool
23R9679 Library Enclosure (2U)*
23R9629 Library Enclosure (4U)*
23R6471 Left Cartridge Magazine (2U)
23R6452 Right Cartridge Magazine (2U/4U)
23R7175 Lower Left Cartridge Magazine (4U)
23R7174 Upper Left Cartridge Magazine (4U)
23R7172 Block Out Panel, Power Supply (4U)
23R7173 Block Out Panel, Full High Drive Bay (4U)
95P6720 Half High Drive Filler Plate (2U/4U)
45E2709 Half High Drive Blockout Back Plate
* Tier 2 CRUs

Power Cords
To avoid electrical shock, a power cord with a grounded attachment plug has been
provided. Use only properly grounded outlets.

Table 11-3 on page 11-4 lists the power cord part number, feature code, the country or region
where the power cord can be used, and the plug's standard reference. The last column in the
table contains an index number that you can match to a specific receptacle type in
Figure 11-1 on page 11-8.

All power cords use an appliance coupler that complies with the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 320, Sheet C13.

If the power cord that you receive does not match your receptacle, contact your local dealer.

Power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories
(UL), are certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and comply with the plug
standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). For other
worldwide geographies, plug standards are listed in Table 11-3 on page 11-4.

Chapter 11. Optional Features, Replacement Parts and Power Cords 11-3
Table 11-3. Power Cords
Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 11-1
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 11-8
(PN)
US/Canada NEMA 5-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 1
v 2.8 m, 125V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
Canada, Cayman Islands,
v FC 9800
Colombia, Costa Rica,
v PN 39M5081 Curacao, Dominican
Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana,
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica,
Japan, Liberia, Mexico,
Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Saudi Arabia,
South Korea, Suriname,
Taiwan, Trinidad Tobago,
Venezuela, US
Chicago NEMA 5-15P Chicago, U.S.A. 1
v 1.8 m, 125 V
v FC 9986
v PN 39M5080
US/Canada NEMA 6-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 2
v 2.8 m, 250 V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
Canada, Cayman Islands,
v FC 9833
Costa Rica, Curacao,
v PN 39M5095 Dominican Republic, Ecuador,
El Salvador, Guatemala,
Guyana, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Liberia,
Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Suriname,
Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad
Tobago, Venezuela, US
Australia AS 3112 Argentina, Australia, China, 3
v 2.8 m, 250V Colombia, New Zealand,
NZS 198 Papua New Guinea,
v FC 9831
Paraguay, Uruguay, Western
v PN 39M5102 Samoa

11-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 11-3. Power Cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 11-1
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 11-8
(PN)
France, Germany CEE 7 - VII Afghanistan, Algeria, 4
v 2.8 m, 250V Andorra, Angola, Aruba,
Austria, Belgium, Benin,
v FC 9820
Brazil, Bulgaria, Burkina
v PN 39M5123 Faso, Burundi, Cameroon,
Central African Republic,
Chad, Congo-Brazzaville,
Curacao, Czech Republic,
Democractic Republic of
Congo, Denmark, Egypt,
Finland, France, French
Guiana, Germany, Greece,
Guinea, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast,
Jordan, Kenya, Korea,
Lebanon, Luxembourg,
Macau, Malagasy, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania,
Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands,
Netherlands Antilles, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Russia, Saudi Arabia, Senegal,
Spain, Sweden, Sudan, Syria,
Togo, Tunisia, Turkey,
Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe,
Vietnam
Denmark DK2-5A Denmark 5
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9821
v PN 39M5130
South Africa SABS 164 Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, 6
v 2.8 m, 250V South Africa, Sri Lanka
v FC 9829
v PN 39M5144
United Kingdom BS 1363 Antigua, Bahrain, Bermuda, 7
v 2.8 m, 250V Brunei, Channel Islands,
China (Hong Kong S.A.R.),
v FC 9825
Cyprus, Fiji, Ghana, Guyana,
v PN 39M5151 India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan,
Kenya, Kuwait, Malaysia,
Malawi, Malta, Nepal,
Nigeria, Oman, Polynesia,
Qatar, Sierra Leone,
Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda,
UK, United Arab Emirate
(Dubai), Yemen, Zambia

Chapter 11. Optional Features, Replacement Parts and Power Cords 11-5
Table 11-3. Power Cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 11-1
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 11-8
(PN)
Switzerland SEV SN 416534 Liechtenstein, Switzerland 8
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9828
v PN 39M5158
Italy CEI 23- 16 Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, 9
v 2.8 m, 250V Somalia
v FC 9830
v PN 39M5165
Israel S11-32-1971 Israel 10
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9827
v PN 39M5172
Argentina IEC 83-A5 Argentina, Brazil, Colombia, 11
v 2.8 m, 250V Paraguay, Trinidad Tobago,
Uruguay
v FC 9834
v PN 39M5068
China CCEE People's Republic of China 12
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9840
v PN 39M5206
Taiwan LV* CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 13
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9835
v PN 39M5247
Taiwan HV** CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 14
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9841
v PN 39M5254
Japan LV* JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 15
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9842
v PN 39M5199
Japan HV** JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 16
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9843
v PN 39M5186
Korea HV** KS C8305, K60884-1 Korea 17
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9844
v PN 39M5219

11-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 11-3. Power Cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 11-1
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 11-8
(PN)
India HV** IS 6538 India 18
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9845
v PN 39M5226
Brazil LV* InMetro NBR 6147 Brazil 19
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9846
v PN 39M5233
Brazil HV** InMetro NBR 14136 Brazil 20
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9847
v PN 39M5240
* Low Voltage

** High Voltage

Types of Receptacles

Figure 11-1 on page 11-8shows the plugs that are used by the power cords in
Table 11-3 on page 11-4. Match the index number that is beside each plug to the
index number in the table.

Chapter 11. Optional Features, Replacement Parts and Power Cords 11-7
 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

a77ug005
17 18 19 20

Figure 11-1. Types of Receptacles

11-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel
Internal View of Library
Important: FOR REFERENCE ONLY. The customer is not authorized to remove
the top cover of the library. No customer serviceable components are
inside the library.

3 4

a77ug026
6

Figure A-1. Internal view of the library

Table A-1. Internal view description

Number Item Description
1 Right cartridge v In a 2U library, the right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
magazine(s)
v In a 4U library, the right magazines can hold up to 24 cartridges.
2 Left cartridge v In a 2U library, the left magazine can hold up to 11 cartridges and houses
magazine(s) the elective 1-slot I/O Station.
v In a 4U library, the left magazines can hold up to 21 cartridges and houses
the elective 3-slot I/O Station.
3 Accessor This component contains the library robot and bar code reader. The accessor
moves cartridges to/from the following:
v I/O Station
v storage slots
v tape drive(s)
4 Library Controller Card This component is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) and stores the user
configuration information or vital product data (VPD).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 A-1

Table A-1. Internal view description (continued)
Number Item Description
5 Tape drive sled Both libraries support the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive. Each tape
drive in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled. The drive
sled is a customer replaceable unit (CRU), and is designed for easy removal
and replacement.
v The 2U library houses one full high tape drive sled or up to two half high
tape drive sleds.
v The 4U library houses up to two full high tape drive sleds or up to four
half high tape drive sleds. Combinations of full high and half high drive
sleds are allowed.
6 Power supply The power supply is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) and the sole source of
power for the library. The 2U has one power supply. The 4U has one or can
have an optional second power supply for redundancy.

Manual Cartridge Removal Procedure

Attention
v It is strongly recommended that the drive and tape be returned to IBM for
removal and recovery.
v If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail to
unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge, make
no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and open a
PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive
with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.
v These procedures must be performed only by a trained IBM service provider.
SSRs should claim their time against service code 33 ECA 013 when
performing this procedure.
v Inform the customer the following procedure has high risk of damaging the
drive and high risk of not being able to recover the data.

Recommended Tools
v #1 Phillips screwdriver
v ESD Kit
v Flashlight (optional)
v #1 Flathead screwdriver (optional)

Before You Begin

When a tape drive error is reported by the library, the drive produces a dump and
saves it in RAM. If the library or drive is powered OFF, this information will be
lost. To preserve this information for analysis by IBM Technical Support, the drive
dump must be copied to the drive's flash memory. Complete the following steps to
write a drive dump to flash memory.
1. Log in to the Web User Interface.
a. Username: Service
b. Password: [contact IBM Technical Support for the Service password]
2. Expand Service Library and click Advance Diagnostic.

A-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 3. Select the drive that has failed, then select Write Drive Dump to Flash. To
determine which drive has failed, refer to the Web User Interface System Status
screen.
4. Click Execute to write the drive dump to flash memory.
5. If you have not already done so, attempt to remove the cartridge with the
device power ON and using library manager, a host application, or the unload
button. When using the Unload button, press and hold the button for 12
seconds. This will cause the drive to eject the cartridge when it has completed
the midtape recovery
6. If you have not already done so, ensure the operator has issued the appropriate
application commands to perform a rewind and unload of the cartridge. This is
to ensure that the stuck cartridge is not due to a hang condition in the
application
7. If you have not already done so, attempt to remove the cartridge by power
cycling the drive. Look for the drive to attempt a midtape recovery.

Note: It can take 5 minutes to 1 hour (depending on cartridge type (LTO4, LTO
3, etc.) and how much of the tape is spooled out of the cartridge) for the
cartridge to rewind and unload.
8. If the cartridge unloads, inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded. If
the cartridge does not unload, repeat steps 2 and 3 once before continuing with
this procedure.

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or

'ONLY COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at
the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject
the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call
Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn't already open, to initiate
the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for
recovery.

Beginning Procedure
Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge,
make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and
open a PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.

Removing the Drive Brick from the Sled

1. Remove the tape drive sled from the library. See “Removing a Tape Drive Sled”
on page 10-4.
2. Place the sled on a clean, sturdy work surface.
3. If necessary, perform the following steps to remove the sled connection card to
provide access to the two screws securing the sled to the drive brick:

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-3

Figure A-2. Drive connection card showing screws and plastic cover

1 Connection card screws

2 Plastic cover
3 Connection card
4 Screws that hold the drive brick to the sled (2 on each side)
5 Signal cable
6 Power cable
7 RS-422 cable

a. Remove the three screws (1) securing the connection card 3) to the sled.
b. Remove the plastic cover (2) from the connection card.
c. Carefully move the connection card to one side. DO NOT UNPLUG ANY
CABLES CONNECTED TO THE CARD.
4. Remove the drive brick from the sled by performing the following steps:
a. Remove the four screws (two on each side of the sled 4) that secure the
sled to the drive brick.

A-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Figure A-3. Half high drive with the connection card moved to the side showing the screws

b. Carefully pull the drive brick out of the front of the sled far enough to
unplug the signal cable (SCSI, Fibre Channel or SAS 5).

Figure A-4. The drive brick showing the cables to be unplugged

c. With the signal cable unplugged, carefully pull the drive brick out so that
the power cable (6) and the RS-422 cable (7) can be accessed and
unplugged.

Note: The SAS signal cable also contains the power cable.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-5

 Note: The RS-422 cable is very delicate. Use your fingernails to work the
cable loose before unplugging it.
d. Remove the drive brick from the sled.

Removing the Drive Cover

1. Ground yourself to the drive by using an ESD Kit.
2. Remove the cover of the full high drive by performing the following steps:
a. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the three screws and washers (see 1
in Figure A-5) that secure the bezel 2 to the internal drive, then remove
the bezel.
b. Remove the cover of the internal drive by performing the following steps:
1) Remove the four cover-mounting screws and washers 3.
2) Remove the cover by lifting it up.

1 2

3
a82ru007

Figure A-5. Removing the bezel and the cover from the 4U internal drive

3. Remove the cover of the half high drive by performing the following steps:
a. To remove the drive bezel, pull the right side of the bezel (1) from the
front of the drive, then pull the left side of the bezel out of the frame of the
drive.
b. Remove the cover of the internal drive by performing the following steps:
1) Remove the four cover-mounting screws (2). Two screws are located
on each side of the drive.
2) Remove the cover by lifting it up.

A-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2

a82hd001
1

Figure A-6. Removing the bezel and the cover from the half high internal drive

4. Inspect the drive to decide which of the following conditions most closely
matches the symptom on the drive:
v Tape spooled off the supply reel - All the tape appears to be on the take up
reel and no tape is on the supply reel (inside the cartridge). Test the drive
after the procedure is completed.
v Tape pulled from leader pin (or broken at the front end) - All the tape
appears to be on the supply reel (inside the cartridge) and very little or no
tape appears to be on the take up reel. The leader block is positioned in the
take up reel. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
v Tape broken in mid-tape - Tape appears to be on both the supply reel
(inside the cartridge) and take up reel. Test the drive after the procedure is
completed.
v Tape tangled along tape path - Tape appears to be tangled and damaged but
intact. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
-- OR --
No damage to tape (or no apparent failure) - There appears to be no
damage or slack to the tape. Return the drive after the procedure is
completed.

Full-high Drive: Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge,
make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and
open a PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-7

 1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the
take up reel from the left side of the drive.
2. From the take up reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over
the head and rollers on the left side of the drive.
3. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
5. From the bottom of the drive, insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the
bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle.

1
a82ru008

Figure A-7. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge

6. Turn the supply reel clockwise, allowing the moistened tape to adhere to the
hub as it winds around the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
7. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
8. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Half-high Drive: Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel

ATTENTION: DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTER GUIDE RAIL (2 ). THIS RAIL
IS VERY DELICATE AND EASILY DAMAGED.

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge,
make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and

A-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 open a PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.
1. From the takeup reel, pull an arm's length of tape around the rear of the tape
path and over the head and rollers on the left side of the drive.
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
3. Ensure that the tape is not twisted. Untwist the tape if required.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
5. Turn the supply reel (4) clockwise, allowing the moistened tape to adhere to
the hub as it winds around the supply reel (inside the cartridge).

4
a82hd002

Figure A-8. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor
(WARNING: Do Not Touch)

6. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (4) 10 additional
turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
7. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Full-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-9

 2 3

7
8
6

5
1

a82ru009
Figure A-9. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

1 Loader motor worm gear 6 Threader mechanism gear

Cartridge loader tray guide
2 7 Lever
bearing
3 Rotator stub 8 Loader mechanism gear
4 Threader motor worm gear
5 Threader intermediate gear

1. From the left side of the drive, pull out tape from the take up reel.

Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the take up
reel, go to “Full-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-13.
2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the take up reel, cut
off the excess tape as close to the leader pin, as possible.
3. Locate the threader motor worm gear (4) the rear of the drive. Use your
finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader
mechanism gear (6) clockwise . This rotates the threader motor worm gear
(4) clockwise, drawing the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the
cartridge.
4. As the LBA is secured in the cartridge, you should hear the LBA retention
spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until
the threader motor worm gear (4) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the
cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure A-7 on page A-8.
5. Notice the following:

A-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a. Loader mechanism gear (8) nearest the front of the drive that actuates
the cartridge loader mechanism
b. Position of the rotator stub (3).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (1). Rotating this gear allows the loader
mechanism gear (8) to turn.
6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (1) to turn the loader mechanism gear
(6) counterclockwise. Continue turning until the rotator stub (3) loses
contact with the lever (7). This releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (4) to turn the threader mechanism
gear (6) counterclockwise. This moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past
the read/write head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide
roller nearest the rear of the drive (1).

a82ru010
Figure A-10. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

8. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (1) until the rotate stub (3)
is positioned as shown. Notice that the rotator stub (3) is nearly aligned
with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (2).
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Half-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-11

 1

a82hd003
2

Figure A-11. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

1 Threader 2 Threader mechanism 3 Loader motor worm

intermediate gear gear gear

1. Pull out tape from the takeup reel.

Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup
reel, go to “Half-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-14
2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup reel, cut
off the excess tape as close to the leader pin, as possible.
3. Reattach the leader pin to the remaining tape.
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (1) near the rear of the drive. You can
use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear (1) and slowly
rotate the threader mechanism gear (2) clockwise. This draws the tape
leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.
5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you should hear the leader pin
retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue
rolling until the threader intermediate gear(1) stops. The LBA is in the
correct position.
6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3) clockwise as viewed from the front
of the drive until it stops. This releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader intermediate gear (1) counterclockwise until the leader
block is in front of the Read/Write head. This moves the LBA out of the
cartridge.

A-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a82hd004
1 2

Figure A-12. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

1 Loader motor worm gear 2 Leader block assembly (LBA)

8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3) counterclockwise as viewed from the
front of the drive until it stops.
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Full-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape

1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the
take up reel from the left side of the drive.

Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the take up

reel, go to “Full-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader
Pin” on page A-9.
2. From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of
tape.
3. From the take up reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over
the head rollers on the left side of the drive.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end. Overlap the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
5. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
6. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (1 in Figure A-13 on
page A-14) in the bottom cover. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the
bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle. begin spooling tape back
into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-13

 1

a82ru008
Figure A-13. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge

7. Turn the supply reel clockwise, carefully guiding the mended portion of the
tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel located inside the cartridge.
Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut. The tape must
remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not
stretch the tape.
8. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Half-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape

1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the
takeup reel. From the takeup reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path
and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive.

Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the takeup reel,
go to “Half-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on
page A-11.
2. From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of
tape.
3. Ensure that the tape is not twisted. Untwist the tape if required
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end. Overlap the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
5. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up
6. Turn the supply reel (4) clockwise, carefully guiding the mended portion of
the tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel located inside the cartridge.
Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut. The tape must
remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (4)

A-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 10 additional turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.

a82hd002
Figure A-14. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor
(WARNING: Do Not Touch)

7. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Full-high Drive: Tape Tangled along Tape Path

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge,
make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and
open a PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.
1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.

Note: If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following

appropriate procedures:
v “Full-high Drive: Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel” on page A-7
v “Full-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on
page A-9
--OR--
“Full-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-13

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-15

 2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

a82ru008
Figure A-15. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge

3. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (1 in Figure A-15).
4. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and
into the reel motor axle. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by
turning the hex wrench clockwise.
5. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
6. Locate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) on
the rear of the drive. Use your finger to rotate the treader motor worm gear
and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16 on page
A-17) clockwise. This rotates the threader motor worm gear (4 in
Figure A-16 on page A-17) clockwise, drawing the LBA into the cartridge.

A-16 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2 3

7
8
6

5
1

a82ru009
Figure A-16. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

1 Loader motor worm gear 6 Threader mechanism gear

Cartridge loader tray guide
2 7 Lever
bearing
3 Rotator stub 8 Loader mechanism gear
4 Threader motor worm gear
5 Threader intermediate gear

7. As the tape leader block assembly (LBA) is secured in the cartridge, you
should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear
the click, continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear (4 in
Figure A-16) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the
cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure A-15 on page A-16.
8. Notice the:
a. Loader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16) nearest the front of the drive
that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism.
b. Position of the rotate stub (3 in Figure A-16).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-16). Rotating this gear
allows the loader mechanism gear (8 in Figure A-16) to turn.
9. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-16) to turn the threader
mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16) counterclockwise. Continue turning until
the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-16) loses contact with the lever (7 in
Figure A-16). This releases the LBA leader pin.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-17

 10. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) to
turn the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16 on page A-17)
counterclockwise. This moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the
read/write head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller
nearest the rear of the drive shown as 1 Figure A-17.

a82ru010
Figure A-17. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

11. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-16 on page
A-17) until the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) is positioned as
shown. Notice that the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) is nearly
aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (2 in Figure A-16 on
page A-17).
12. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
13. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Half-high Drive: Tape Tangled along Tape Path

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge,
make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and
open a PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.
1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.

Note: If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following appropriate
procedures:
v “Half-high Drive: Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel” on page A-8
v “Half-high Drive: Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on
page A-11
–OR–
v “Half-high Drive: Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-14
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

A-18 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2

a82hd002
Figure A-18. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor
(WARNING: Do Not Touch)

3. Turn the supply reel (4) clockwise.

4. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (4) 10 turns.
Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
5. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Full-high Drive: No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge,
make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and
open a PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.
1. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-19

 1

a82ru008
Figure A-19. Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge

2. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (1 in Figure A-19).
3. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and
into the reel motor axle. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by
turning the hex wrench clockwise.
4. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
5. Locate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) on
the rear of the drive. Use your finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear
and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20 on page
A-21) clockwise. This rotates the threader motor worm gear (4 in
Figure A-20 on page A-21) clockwise, drawing the LBA into the cartridge.

A-20 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2 3

7
8
6

5
1

a82ru009
Figure A-20. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

1 Loader motor worm gear 6 Threader mechanism gear

Cartridge loader tray guide
2 7 Lever
bearing
3 Rotator stub 8 Loader mechanism gear
4 Threader motor worm gear
5 Threader intermediate gear

6. As the tape leader block assembly (LBA) is secured in the cartridge, you
should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear
the click, continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear (4 in
Figure A-20) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the
cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure A-19 on page A-20.
7. Notice the:
a. Loader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20) nearest the front of the drive
that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism.
b. Position of the rotate stub (3 in Figure A-20).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-20). Rotating this gear
allows the loader mechanism gear (8 in Figure A-20) to turn.
8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-20) to turn the loader
mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20) counterclockwise. Continue turning until
the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-20) loses contact with the lever (7 in
Figure A-20). This releases the LBA leader pin.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-21

 9. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) to
turn the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20 on page A-21)
counterclockwise. This moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the
read/write head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller
nearest the rear of the drive shown as 1 Figure A-21.

a82ru010
Figure A-21. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

10. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-20 on page
A-21) until the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) is positioned as
shown. Notice that the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) is nearly
aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (2 in Figure A-20 on
page A-21).
11. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
12. Go to “Ending Procedure” on page A-25.

Half-high Drive: No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (i.e., there is no backup), eject commands issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge,
make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and
open a PMR if one isn’t already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.
1. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

A-22 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2

a82hd002
Figure A-22. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor
(WARNING: Do Not Touch)

2. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the supply reel
motor (4) clockwise.
3. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
Continue spooling until all tape is removed from the takeup reel (3).
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (1) near the rear of the drive. You can
use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear (1) and slowly
rotate the threader mechanism gear (2) clockwise. This draws the tape
leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-23

 1

a82hd003
2

Figure A-23. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

1 Threader 2 Threader mechanism 3 Loader motor worm

intermediate gear gear gear

5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you should hear the leader pin
retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue
rolling until the threader intermediate gear (1) stops. The LBA is in the
correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the
cartridge.
6. Rotate the loader intermediate gear (1) clockwise as viewed from the front
of the drive until it stops. This releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (3) counterclockwise until the leader
block is in front of the Read/Write head. This moves the LBA out of the
cartridge.
a82hd004

1 2

Figure A-24. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

1 Loader motor worm gear 2 Leader block assembly (LBA)

8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3) counterclockwise as viewed from the
front of the drive until it stops.

A-24 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Go to “Ending Procedure.”

Ending Procedure
1. Reassemble the drive brick by reversing the steps in “Removing the Drive
Cover” on page A-6.
2. Reassemble the drive sled by performing the following steps:
a. Reinstall the drive brick into the sled by performing the following steps:
v Plug in the RS-422 cable, the power cable (if applicable), and the signal
cable.
v Push the drive brick fully into the sled.
v Align the two screws holes on each side of the sled with the screw holes
on each side of the drive brick. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS
COMPLETELY.
v After verifying that the drive and sled are properly aligned, fully tighten
the screws.
b. If necessary, perform the following steps to reinstall the connection card and
protective plastic cover on the sled.
v Place the card and the protective plastic cover on top of spacers aligning
the three screw holes. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS COMPLETELY.
v After verifying that the connection card and protective plastic cover are
properly aligned, fully tighten the three screws.
3. Install the tape drive sled in the library. Refer to “Installing a Tape Drive Sled”
on page 10-6.
4. Power ON the library and wait for the library to finish POST (power on self
test), inventory and mid-tape recovery (this can take up to 1 hour).
5. If the cartridge does not eject from the drive, move the cartridge from the drive
to the I/O Station (Operator Control Panel: Control → Move Cartridges; Web
User Interface: Manage Library → Move Media), then discard the cartridge.
6. Run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations. Refer to
“Service: Library Verify” on page 5-30.
7. If necessary, return the failed drive sled to IBM.

Accessing the Library using Telnet

To access a customer's library using telnet, complete the following procedure:
1. Ask the library administrator to enable the serial port (Operator Control
Panel: Service → Telnet Service Port).
2. Open a Windows Command Prompt screen.
3. Enter telnet [library IP address] then press the Enter key.
4. FLMON> will display.
5. Enter lgi then press the Enter key.
6. Enter service as your Username, then press the Enter key.
7. Enter the service Password, then press the Enter key. Contact your next level
of support for the password.
8. Enter help then press the Enter key for the expanded command menu.
9. To end the telnet session, enter lgo then press the Enter key to log out of the
library.
10. Enter exit then press the Enter key to disconnect from the library.

Appendix A. Information for Trained Service Personnel A-25

 11. Inform the library administrator that your telnet session has ended and
instruct the administrator to reboot his library to disable telnet capabilities to
the library.

A-26 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix B. SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and
Physical Configurations
For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing, see “Library
Partitioning and Element Addressing” on page B-3.

The following tables contain element addresses for the 2U library and the 4U
library.
Table B-1. 2U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses
Element Type Element Address Range
Media Transport (Accessor) Element (MTE) 1 (0x01)
I/O Station Element (IEE) 16 (0x10)
Data Transfer (Drive) Element (DTE) 256 (0x100), 257 (0x101)
Storage Elements (STE) 4096 (0x1000) - 4117 (0x1015)

Table B-2. 4U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses

Element Type Element Address Range
Media Transport (Accessor) Element (MTE) 1 (0x01)
I/O Station Elements (IEE) 16 (0x10), 17 (0x11), 18 (0x12)
Data Transfer (Drives) Elements (DTE) 256 (0x100), 257 (0x101), 258 (0x102, 259
(0x103)
Storage Elements (STE) 4096 (0x1000) - 4139 (0x102B)

2U Library I/O Slot, Storage Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses
and Physical Locations
For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing, see “Library
Partitioning and Element Addressing” on page B-3.

The following table contains the physical location and SCSI element address
(decimal and hexadecimal) of the I/O slot, storage slots, and drive slot in the 2U
librarylibrary configured with one drive and one logical partition. If a second drive
were installed, it would be located at address 257 (0x101).

With two drives installed, the library can be configured as one partition (with two
drives) or as two partitions (with one drive per partition).

When configured with two drives and one logical partition, the Element Address
assignments will be as follows: DTE assignments
v Drive 1: 256 (0x100)
v Drive 2: 257 (0x101)
The STE assignments will be as shown in Table B-3 on page B-2.

When configured with two drives and one logical partition, the Element Address
assignments will be as follows:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 B-1

 DTE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Drive 1: 256 (0x100)
v Logical Library 2: Drive 2: 256 (0x100)

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 11 4096 (x1000) through 4106 (0x100A)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 12 through slot 23 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
Table B-3. 2U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with one drive)
Left Magazine Library Right Magazine
⇐ Front of 2U library Rear Panel Front of 2U library ⇒
Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 23 Slot 22 Slot 21 Slot 20
4103 4104 4105 4106 4118 4117 4116 4115
(0x1007) (0x1008) (0x1009) (0x100A) (0x1016) (0x1015) (0x1014) (0x1013)
Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Drive 1 Slot 19 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16
4099 4100 4101 4102 256 4114 4113 4112 4111
(0x1003) (0x1004) (0x1005) (0x1006) (0x100) (0x1012) (0x1011) (0x1010) (0x100F)
I/O slot Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12
16 4096 4097 4098 4110 4109 4108 4107
(0x10) (0x1000) (0x1001) (0x1002) (0x100E) (0x100D) (0x100C) (0x100B)

4U Library I/O Slots, Storage Slots, and Drive Slots Element Addresses
and Physical Locations
For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing, see “Library
Partitioning and Element Addressing” on page B-3.

The following table contains the physical location (Slot x) and SCSI element
address in decimal (4xxx) and in hexadecimal (0x10xx) of the I/O slots, storage
slots, and drive slots in the 4U library containing only two drive sleds.

In older 4U libraries where the Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS) is in a fixed location
(slot 9) and elected to be retained as a DCS (option to delete DCS is available in
library firmware greater than 1.95), the above slot numbering and element address
changes starting with slot 10. In 4U libraries with a DCS, the information shown in
slot 9 below moves to slot 10 and so forth through the remaining magazine slots.
The final slot is slot 44 instead of slot 45 for libraries without a DCS. See
“Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots” on page 5-65 for information on
how to delete the dedicated cleaning slot. Once the DCS is deleted, you cannot get
it back. You will have to create a reserved slot if you want to clean the drive(s).
Table B-4. 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with drives in slot
1 and slot 2)
Upper Left Magazine Library Upper Right Magazine
⇐Front of 4U library Rear Panel Front of 4U library⇒

B-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table B-4. 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with drives in slot
1 and slot 2) (continued)
Slot 18 Slot 19 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 45 Slot 44 Slot 43 Slot 42
4113 4114 4115 4116 4140 4139 4138 4137
(0x1011) (0x1012) (0x1013) (0x1014) (0x102C) (0x102B) (0x102A) (0x1029)
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Drive 2 Slot 41 Slot 40 Slot 39 Slot 38
4109 4110 4111 4112 257 4136 4135 4134 4133
(0x100D) (0x100E) (0x100F) (0x1010) (0x101) (0x1028) (0x1027) (0x1026) (0x1025)
Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 37 Slot 36 Slot 35 Slot 34
4105 4106 4107 4108 4132 4131 4130 4129
(0x1009) (0x100A) (0x100B) (0x100C) (0x1024) (0x1023) (0x1022) (0x1021)
Lower Left Magazine Lower Right Magazine
I/O Slot 3 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 33 Slot 32 Slot 31 Slot 30
18 4102 4103 4104 4128 4127 4126 4125
(0x12) (0x1006) (0x1007) (0x1008) (0x1020) (0x101F) (0x101E) (0x101D)
Drive 1
I/O Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 256 Slot 29 Slot 28 Slot 27 Slot 26
17 4099 4100 4101 (0x100) 4124 4123 4122 4121
(0x11) (0x1003) (0x1004) (0x1005) (0x101C (0x101B) (0x101A) (0x1019)
I/O Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 25 Slot 24 Slot 23 Slot 22
16 4096 4097 4098 4120 4119 4118 4117
(0x10) (0x1000) (0x1001) (0x1002) (0x1018) (0x1017) (0x1016) (0x1015)

Library Partitioning and Element Addressing

Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 1.70 and higher, and containing at
least 2 drives, have the ability to configure two logical libraries (create two
partitions). This partitioning has been expanded with the new library firmware and
half-high drive integration. Now it is possible to configure 1, 2, 3 or 4 partitions in
the 4U library. Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two
partitions. Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library
(partition).

Partitioning of 2U Libraries

When two half high drives are installed in a 2U library, the library firmware will
support partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two
full high drives today. The first partition will contain the first magazine and the
first drive. The second partition will contain the second magazine and the second
drive. The I/O station (if configured as I/O) will be shared, as is done with the
partitioned 4U library.

One full high drive is "Drive 1". When using half high drives, the first half high
drive position will be called "Drive 1", The second half high drive position will be
called "Drive 2."

Partitioning of 4U Libraries

When one or more half high drives are added to a 4U library, the drive naming
will change. Currently, the first full high drive is "Drive 1" and the second full high
drive is "Drive 2". When you consider that each full high drive slot may contain
one or two half high drives, there are four potential drives in the space that used
to occupy two. As a result, the first half high drive position, or the first full-high
drive position, will be called "Drive 1". The second half high drive position will be

Appendix B. SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations B-3
 called "Drive 2". The third half high drive position, or the second full high drive
position, will be called "Drive 3". The fourth half high drive position will be called
"Drive 4".

Important: In a 4U library a full high drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1
(drive will occupy slot 1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy
slot 3 and slot 4). A full high drive sled should never be installed in
drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).

Mixing of Drives

The library will support a mix of full high and half high drives in the same
physical library and the same logical library. They will support a mix of Gen 3,
| Gen 4, and Gen 5 drives in the same physical library and the same logical library.
They will also support a mix of SCSI, SAS, and Fibre Channel in the same physical
library and the same logical library; however, mixing drive interface types in the
same logical library is not recommended.

Configuration of a 1 - Partition System

A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives
present in any drive positions, and it will contain all four magazines.

When configured with one logical partition, the Element Address assignments will
be as follows:
v DTE assignments will be as shown in Figure B-1.
v STE assignments will be as shown in Figure B-4 on page B-6.

Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 259 Drive 3 259 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
257 258
Element Address Element Address
258 258
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address

a77ug161
Drive 1 Drive 1
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure B-1. Configuration of a one - partition system

Configuration of a 2 - Partition System

A two partition system must have a minimum of two drives, but may have three
or four drives. Partition 1 will contain any drives in drive position 1 and drive
position 2. Partition 1 will also contain magazine 1 and magazine 2. Partition 2 will
contain any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 2 will also
contain magazine 3 and magazine 4.

When configured with two logical partitions, the Element Address assignments
will be as follows: DTE assignments will be as shown in Figure B-2 on page B-5.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4116 (0x1014)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4019 (0x1017)

B-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 257 Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address

a77ug162
Drive 1 Drive 1
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure B-2. Configuration of a two - partition system

Configuration of a 3 - Partition System

| A three partition system must have at least three drives installed. A drive must be
| installed in drive position 1, another drive must be installed in drive position 2,
| and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4.
| Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine. Partition 2 will
| contain the second drive and the second magazine. Partition 3 will contain any
| drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 3 will also contain
| magazine 3 and magazine 4.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4119 (0x1017)

Drive 4
Element Address
Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address 2 4
256 Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 256 1 3 a77ug163
Drive 1 Drive 1
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure B-3. Configuration of a three - partition system

Configuration of a 4 - Partition System

A four partition system must have four drives. Each partition will contain one
drive and one magazine.

When configured with four logical partitions, the Element Address assignments
will be as follows: DTE assignments will be as shown in Figure B-4 on page B-6.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 33 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 4: Slot 34 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)

Appendix B. SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations B-5
 Drive 4
Element Address
256 Magazine Magazine
Drive 3 2 4
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 1 3

a77ug164
Drive 1
Element Address
256 Front side

Figure B-4. Configuration of a four - partition system

SCSI Element Addressing

Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element
start address (default value 256). It will be incremented from the bottom to the top
slots for every drive slot. There is one exception to this addressing scheme to
accommodate libraries currently in the field. A 4U library which contains only full
high drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257, thus
causing no interruptions to their operation. Drive slots will still be incremented by
1 for each drive slot position.

Note: Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library
needing to be reconfigured.

4U Unit with only FH drives

(1 logical library)

SCSI Element Slot

4
257
3
2
256
1

4U Unit with FH and HH drives

(1 logical library)
SCSI Element Slot
4
258
3
a77ug165

257 2
256 1

Figure B-5. Examples of SCSI element addressing

The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing. Special
handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification. Also
temporarily removed drives need to have their addresses preserved to not confuse
the attached host and host application. Generally only drives which are currently
physically available or temporarily removed are reported. Empty (unused) slots
located at the bottom or the top should not be reported, with an exception in case
of a “removed” condition. A drive slot which does not contain a drive, and has a
position between used slots, needs to be reported as a SCSI element. To signal the
host application that this slot is not usable, its ACCESS bit will be disabled.

B-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Note: When reducing the number of drives in your library, update the Logical
Library configuration. This will remove the Attention LED on the front
panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive
is missing.

Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element
addressing and drive numbering. Replacing LTO half high drives with full high
drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the
drive element addressing and drive numbering. See “Configure Library:
Save/Restore” on page 5-56.

Appendix B. SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations B-7
B-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags
This appendix is intended to provide additional information to the reader about
the tape drive. All error code and diagnostic information contained in this chapter
can be accessed from the Operator Control Panel of the Library. The drive portion
of the Operator Control Panel Display will contain any drive error codes.
Therefore there is no need to open the Library to access the buttons on the drive as
described in this chapter. See the Setup, Operator and Service Guide for a complete
description of the Operator Control Panel functions and Displays.

TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems experienced by

devices such as tape drives, autoloaders, and libraries. The standard enables a
server to read TapeAlert messages (called flags) from a tape drive via the SCSI bus.
The server reads the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E.

| Refer to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library
| SCSI Reference document for additional library TapeAlert Flag information. Refer
| to the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference document for
| additional tape drive TapeAlert Flag information.

This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology, which provides error and
diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the server. Because
library and drive firmware may change periodically, the SNMP interface in the
library does not require code changes if devices add additional TapeAlerts that are
not supported today. However, should this occur the Management Information
Block (MIB) is written to minimize impact to the SNMP monitoring station. At the
time of this writing, the TapeAlert flags in this appendix correctly represent
TapeAlerts that will be sent. The MIB file should not be taken to mean that all
traps that are defined in the MIB (refer to Appendix F, “SNMP Status MIB
Variables and Traps,” on page F-1) will be sent by the library or that they will be
sent in the future.

This appendix lists TapeAlert flags that are supported by the Ultrium 3 and
Ultrium 4 Tape Drives.

TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library

Parameter Flag name Type Description
Code
01d Library C The media changer mechanism is having difficulty communicating with
Hardware A the drive:
v Turn the library OFF then ON
v Restart the operation

If problem persists, contact Technical Support.

02d Library W There is a problem with the media changer mechanism. If the problem
Hardware B persists, contact Technical Support.
03d Library C The media changer has a hardware fault:
Hardware C v Make sure the media changer and drives are not being used by any
host, then reset the library from the front panel.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 C-1

04d Library C v Make sure the media changer and drives are not being used by any
Hardware D host, then reset the library from the front panel.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
13d Library Pick W There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader picking a cartridge
Retry from a drive or slot.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support

This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.

14d Library Place W There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader placing a cartridge
Retry into a slot.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.

15d Drive Load W There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader or drive when
Retry placing a cartridge into a drive.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.

16d Library Door W The operation has failed because the library door is open.
v Clear any obstructions from the library door.
v Close the library door.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

This flag is cleared when the door is closed.

17d Library I/O C There is a mechanical problem with the library media I/O Station.
Station
19d Library W Library security has been compromised. The door was opened then
Security closed during operation.
24d Library C The library has detected an inconsistency in its inventory.
Inventory v Redo the library inventory to correct inconsistency.
v Restart the operation.

Check the applications users manual or the hardware users manual for
specific instructions on redoing the library inventory.
27d Cooling FAN W One or more fans inside the library have failed. This flag is cleared when
Failure all fans are working again.
32d Unreadable I The library was unable to read the barcode on a cartridge.
Bar Code
Labels

v I = Informational suggestion to user

v W = Warning. Remedial action is advised. Performance of data may be at risk.
v C = Critical immediate remedial action is required.

C-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive
Table C-1. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive
Flag
Number Flag Description Action Required
3 Hard error Set for any unrecoverable read, write, See the Action Required column for
or positioning error. (This flag is set in Flag Number 4, 5, or 6 in this table.
conjunction with flags 4, 5, or 6.)
4 Media Set for any unrecoverable read, write, Replace the tape cartridge.
or positioning error that is due to a
faulty tape cartridge.
5 Read failure Set for any unrecoverable read error If Flag 4 is also set, the cartridge is
where isolation is uncertain and defective. Replace the tape
failure could be due to a faulty tape cartridge.
cartridge or to faulty drive hardware.
6 Write failure Set for any unrecoverable write or If Flag Number 9 is also set, make
positioning error where isolation is sure that the write-protect switch is
uncertain and failure could be due to set so that data can be written to
a faulty tape cartridge or to faulty the tape (see “Write-Protect Switch”
drive hardware. on page 6-7). If Flag Number 4 is
also set, the cartridge is defective.
Replace the tape cartridge.
7 Media life Set when the tape cartridge reaches its 1. Copy the data to another tape
end of life (EOL). cartridge.
2. Discard the old (EOL) tape.
8 Not data grade Set when the cartridge is not Replace the tape with a data-grade
data-grade. Any data that you write tape.
to the tape is at risk.
9 Write protect Set when the tape drive detects that Ensure that the cartridge's
the tape cartridge is write-protected. write-protect switch is set so that
the tape drive can write data to the
tape (see “Write-Protect Switch” on
page 6-7).
10 No removal Set when the tape drive receives an Refer to the documentation for your
UNLOAD command after the server server's operating system.
prevented the tape cartridge from
being removed.
11 Cleaning media Set when you load a cleaning No action required.
cartridge into the drive.
12 Unsupported format Set when you load an unsupported Use a supported tape cartridge.
cartridge type into the drive or when
the cartridge format has been
corrupted.
15 Cartridge memory chip Set when a cartridge memory (CM) Replace the tape cartridge.
failure failure is detected on the loaded tape
cartridge.
16 Forced eject Set when you manually unload the No action required.
tape cartridge while the drive was
reading or writing.
17 Media loaded is Set when a cartridge marked as read No action required.
Read-only format only is loaded into the drive. The flag
is cleared when the cartridge is
ejected.

Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags C-3

Table C-1. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive (continued)
Flag
Number Flag Description Action Required
18 Tape directory corrupted Set when the drive detects that the Re-read all data from the tape to
in the cartridge memory tape directory in the cartridge rebuild the tape directory.
memory has been corrupted.
19 Nearing media life Set when the tape cartridge is nearing 1. Copy the data to another tape
its specified end of life. The flag is cartridge.
cleared when the cartridge is removed
2. Replace the tape cartridge.
from the drive.
20 Clean now Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive.
needs cleaning.
21 Clean periodic Set when the drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as
needs routine cleaning. possible. The drive can continue to
operate, but you should clean the
drive soon.
22 Expired clean Set when the tape drive detects a Replace the cleaning cartridge.
cleaning cartridge that has expired.
23 Invalid cleaning tape Set when the drive expects a cleaning Use a valid cleaning cartridge.
cartridge and the loaded cartridge is
not a cleaning cartridge.
30 Hardware A Set when a hardware failure occurs Go to“Contacting IBM Technical
that requires that you reset the tape Support” on page 9-5.
drive to recover.
31 Hardware B Set when the tape drive fails its Note the error code on the
internal Power-On Self Tests. single-character display, then go
to“Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 9-5.
32 Interface Set when the tape drive detects a Go to“Contacting IBM Technical
problem with the host interface. Support” on page 9-5.
33 Eject media Set when a failure occurs that requires Unload the tape cartridge, then
you to unload the cartridge from the reinsert it and restart the operation.
drive.
34 Download fail Set when an FMR image is Ensure that it is the correct FMR
unsuccessfully downloaded to the image. Download the FMR image
tape drive through the host interface. again.
37 Drive voltage Set when the drive detects that the Go to“Contacting IBM Technical
externally supplied voltages are either Support” on page 9-5.
approaching the specified voltage
limits or are outside the voltage
limits.
38 Predictive failure of Set when a hardware failure of the Go to“Contacting IBM Technical
drive hardware tape drive is predicted. Support” on page 9-5.
39 Diagnostics required Set when the drive detects a failure Go to“Contacting IBM Technical
that requires diagnostics for isolation. Support” on page 9-5.
51 Tape directory invalid at Set when the tape directory on the Use your backup software to
unload tape cartridge that was previously rebuild the tape directory by
unloaded is corrupted. The file-search reading all the data.
performance is degraded.
52 Tape system area write Set when the tape cartridge that was Copy the data to another tape
failure previously unloaded could not write cartridge, then discard the old
its system area successfully. cartridge.

C-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table C-1. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive (continued)
Flag
Number Flag Description Action Required
53 Tape system area read Set when the tape system area could Copy the data to another tape
failure not be read successfully at load time. cartridge, then discard the old
cartridge.
55 Loading Failure When loading a tape into a drive, a Take this action if the tape cartridge
hardware malfunction can prevent the will not load in the drive:
tape from being loaded into the drive, 1. Remove the tape cartridge from
or the tape may actually get stuck in the library and inspect it for
the drive. damage. If damaged, discard it.
2. Try another cartridge in that
tape drive. If it still fails, replace
the drive sled. See
“Removing/Installing/Adding a
Tape Drive Sled” on page 10-3.
Take this action if the tape is stuck
in the drive:
1. Attempt to unload the tape from
the drive using the host backup
application that is currently
using the drive, or using the
remote or local UI.
2. If the cartridge will not unload,
go to “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 9-5.
56 Unload Failure When attempting to unload a tape 1. Unload the cartridge from the
cartridge, a drive hardware drive using the Operator Control
malfunction can prevent the tape from Panel (Control → Move
being ejected. The tape may actually Cartridge) or the Web User
be stuck in the drive. Interface (Manage Library →
Move Media).
2. Cycle drive power using the
Operator Control Panel (Service
→ Service → Drive Power) or the
Web User Interface (Configure
Library → Drives).
3. Try unloading the cartridge from
the drive again using the
Operator Control Panel (Control
→ Move Cartridge) or the Web
User Interface (Manage Library
→ Move Media).
4. If the cartridge will not unload
from the drive, go to
“Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 9-5.
59 WORM Medium – Set when the drive determines that 1. Copy the data to another
integrity check failed the data on tape is suspect from a WORM tape cartridge.
WORM point of view.
2. Discard the old WORM tape.

Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags C-5

Table C-1. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive (continued)
Flag
Number Flag Description Action Required
60 WORM Medium – Set when the drive rejects a write Append the information on a
Overwrite attempted operation because the rules for WORM tape cartridge or write the
allowing WORM writes have not been data to a non-WORM cartridge.
met. Data can only be appended to
WORM media. Overwrites to WORM
media are not allowed.

C-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Appendix D. Sense Data
When a drive encounters an error, it makes sense data available. You can use IBM
device drivers to examine the sense data and determine errors. Instructions for
downloading, installing, and properly configuring the IBM device drivers are
available in the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide. The IBM
device drivers may conflict with some commercial software applications unless
properly configured. To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems, refer to
your device driver's procedures for setting the driver to manual startup mode.For
applications that use Open Systems device drivers that are provided by IBM (for
example, AIX®, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, Windows 2000, Linux®, and Windows 2003),
the Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide contains information about
how to obtain sense data after an error has occurred.

If your application uses other device drivers, see the appropriate documentation
for those drivers to obtain the sense data.

| Refer to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library
| SCSI Reference document for additional library sense data information. Refer to the
| IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference document for
| additional tape drive sense data information.

Raw sense data (as returned from the drive) is documented in the IBM LTO
Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

In addition to device drivers, other methods exist for obtaining sense data and
error information. The sections that follow describe alternatives for gathering such
information from the IBM System i™, and System p™ servers.

Library Sense Data

The following table lists the Additional Sense Codes (ASC) and Additional Sense
Code Qualifiers (ASCQ) associated with the reported Sense Keys.

A sense key of 00h (no sense) has no ASC/ASCQ associated with it. A few
ASC/ASCQs can be associated with more than one sense key. The sense keys that
can give a particular ASC/ASCQ are indicated within the Sense Key column.
ASC/ASCQs that can indicate an abnormal element state as part of element
descriptor.
Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Recovered Error (01) 0Ah 00h Error log overflow
47h 00h SCSI parity error

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 D-1

Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Not Ready (02) 00h 17h Drive cleaning requested
04h 00h Cause not reportable
04h 01h In progress becoming ready, scanning magazines, etc.
04h 02h Initializing command required
04h 03h Manual intervention required
04h 07h Operation in progress
04h 12h Offline
04h 83h Door open
04h 85h Firmware upgrade in progress
04h 87h The drive is not enabled
04h 88h The drive is busy
04h 89h The drive is not empty
04h 9Ah Drive fibre down
04h 8Eh The media changer is in sequential mode
30h 03h Cleaning in progress
3Bh 12h Magazine removed
Medium Error (03) 30h 00h Incompatible media installed
30h 03h Cleaning tape installed
30h 07h Cleaning failure

D-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Hardware Error (04) 81h 80h Cannot initialize bar code reader
81h 81h No response from bar code reader
81h 82h No response from EEPROM
81h 83h Slave robotic generic problem
81h 84h Setting of gripper pic value failed
81h 85h Setting of slider pic value failed
81h 86h Setting of elevator pic value failed
81h 87h Setting of rotation pic value failed
81h 88h Setting of sled pic value failed
81h 89h Gripper blocked
81h 8Ah Slider blocked
81h 8Bh Elevator blocked
81h 8Ch Rotation blocked
81h 8Dh Sled blocked
81h 8Eh Cannot find gripper block
81h 8Fh Cannot find slider block
81h 90h Cannot find elevator block
81h 91h Cannot find rotation block
81h 92h Cannot find sled block
81h 93h Gripper outside range
81h 94h Slider outside range
81h 95h Elevator outside range
81h 96h Rotation outside range
81h 97h Sled outside range
81h 98h No cartridge present sensor found
81h 99h No slider home sensor found
81h 9Ah No rotation home sensor found
81h 9Bh No sled position sensor found
81h 9Ch The range of gripper is wrong
81h 9Dh The range of slider is wrong
81h 9Eh The range of elevator is wrong
81h 9Fh The range of rotation is wrong
81h A0h The range of sled is wrong
81h A1h Open import/export element failed
81h A2h Locking failed
81h A3h SE2 Block
81h A4h SE2 No Block
81h A5h No Sled2 Home Sensor
81h A6h No Elev Home Sensor

Appendix D. Sense Data D-3

Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Hardware Error (04) 81h B0h Slave robotic controller response timeout
(continued)
81h B1h NACK received from slave robotic controller
81h B2h Slave robotic controller communication failed
81h B3h Slave robotic controller urgent stop
81h B4h Cartridge did not transport completely
81h B5h Slave robotic controller does not respond on command
80h C0h Network init
80h C1h Telnet interface
80h C2h Webserver
80h C3h EEPROM parameter
80h C4h Cannot init LAN card
80h C5h Write to EEPROM failed
80h C6h Ping command did not reach target
80h C7h Cannot upgrade from USB
80h D0h ROM error
80h D1h RAM error
80h D2h NVRAM error
80h D3h CTC error
80h D4h UART error
80h D5h Display error
80h D6h Memory error
80h D7h Fatal system error
80h D8h dBase error
80h D9h No SCSI IC detected
80h DAh Different bar code labels
80h DBh External cooling fan failure
80h DCh Internal I2C bus error
80h DFh Power Good failed
80h E0h Incompatible Magazine
82h F0h Over temperature problem
82h F1h Drive communication error
82h F2h Drive sled not present
82h F3h Drive broken: needs repair
82h F4h Drive load timeout
82h F5h Drive unload timeout
82h F6h Drive never present
82h F7h Drive support ticket error

D-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Illegal Request (05h) 1Ah 00h Parameter length error
20h 00h Invalid command operation code
21h 01h Invalid element address
24h 00h Invalid field CDB
3Dh 00h SCSI invalid ID message
25h 00h Invalid LUN
2Ch 00h Command sequence error
26h 00h Invalid field in parameter list
26h 01h Parameter list error: parameter not supported
26h 02h Parameter value invalid
26h 90h Wrong firmware image, does not fit boot code
26h 91h Wrong personality firmware image
26h 93h Wrong firmware image, checksum error
39h 00h Saving parameters not supported
3Bh 0Dh Medium destination element full
3Bh 0Eh Medium source element empty
3Bh 11h Medium magazine not accessible
3Bh 81h Cartridge of other partition
3Bh A0h Medium transfer element full
53h 02h Library media removal prevented state set
53h 03h Drive media removal prevented state set
44h 80h Bad status library controller
44h 81h Source not ready
44h 82h Destination not ready
44h 83h Cannot make reservation
44h 84h Wrong drive type
44h 85h Invalid slave robotic controller request
44h 86h Accessor not initialized
Unit Attention (06h) 28h 00h Not ready to ready transition
28h 01h Import/export element accessed
29h 01h Power on occurred
29h 02h SCSI Bus reset occurred
29h 05h Bus type changed to Single Ended (SE)
29h 06h Bus type changed to Low Voltage Differential (LVD)
2Ah 01h Mode parameters changed
2Ah 10h Time stamp changed
3Bh 13h Medium magazine inserted
3Fh 01h Microcode has changed
53h 02h Media removal prevented

Appendix D. Sense Data D-5

Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Command Aborted (0Bh) 3Fh 0Fh ECHO buffer overwritten
43h 00h SCSI message error
47h 00h SCSI parity error
49h 00h SCSI invalid message
4Eh 00h Overlapped command attempt

Drive Sense Data

LTO Ultrium 4 drives contain hardware which performs user data write encryption
and read decryption, protecting all user data written to the medium from
unauthorized use, provided it is integrated into a secure system design.
Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Address
valid

When set to
1, the info
0 byte field Error Code
contains a
valid
logical
block
address.
1 Segment Number (0)
2 Filemark EOM (end ILI Reserved Sense Key Description
of medium) (Incorrect 0 - No sense
length 1 - Recovered error
indicator) 2 - Not ready
3 - Media error
4 - Hardware error
5 - Illegal request
6 - Unit attention
7 - Data protect
8 - Blank Check
9 - Reserved
A - Reserved
B - Aborted command
C - Reserved
D - Volume overflow
E - Reserved
F - Reserved
3 Information byte (most significant byte)
4 Information byte
5 Information byte
6 Information byte (least significant byte)
7 Additional Sense Length
8-11 Command specific information

D-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
00 00 - No additional sense - The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for
the command failure
00 01 - Filemark detected - A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM
The FM flag is set.
00 02 - EOM - A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical
end of tape was encountered, or a Read or Space command encountered EOM
The EOM flag is set
00 04 - BOM - A space command ended at Beginning of Tape
The EOM bit is also set
00 05 - EOD - Read or Space command terminated early
because End of Data was encountered
00 16 - Operation in Progress
04 00 - Cause not reportable - A cartridge is present in the drive, but it is in the
process of being unloaded
04 01 - Becoming Ready - A media access command was received during a
front panel initiated load or an immediate reported load command
04 02 - Initializing Command Required - A cartridge is present in the drive, but is not
logically loaded. A Load command is required
04 03 - Manual Intervention Required - A cartridge is present in the drive but could
not be loaded or unloaded without manual intervention
04 10 - Logical unit not ready, auxiliary memory not accessible
04 12 - Logical unit not ready, offline
08 01 - Logical unit communication failure
09 00 - Track following error (servo)
0C 00 - Write Error - A Write operation has failed. This is probably due to bad
media, but may be hardware related
11 00 - Unrecovered Read Error - A Read operation failed. This is probably due
to bad media, but may be hardware related
11 12 - Auxiliary memory read error. The drive reported that it is unable to read the
Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
14 00 - Recorded Entity Not Found - A space or Locate command failed because
a format violation prevented the target from being found.
14 03 - End Of Data not found - A Read type operation failed because a format
violation related to a missing EOD data set
14 10 - Not Ready - Auxiliary memory not accessible. The drive is not able to become
ready because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
17 01 - Recovered data with retries
1A 00 - Parameter list length error - The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect
20 00 - Invalid Command Operation Code - The Operation Code in the command
was not a valid Operation Code
24 00 - Invalid field in CDB - An invalid field has been detected in a
Command Descriptor Block
25 00 - LUN not supported - The command was addressed to a non-existent
logical unit number
26 00 - Invalid Field in Parameter List - An invalid field has been detected in the
data sent during the data phase

Appendix D. Sense Data D-7

Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC) -
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) (Continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
27 00 - Write Protect - A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which
has been write protected
28 00 - Not Ready to Ready Transition - A cartridge has been loaded successfully into
the drive and is now ready to be accessed
28 01 - Import or export element accessed
29 00 - Reset - The drive has powered on, received a reset signal or a bus device
reset signal since the initiator last accessed it
29 04 - Device internal reset
2A 01 - Mode Parameters Changed - The Mode parameters for the drive have
been changed by an initiator other than the one issuing the command
2C 00 - Command sequence error
2C 0B - Not reserved - The OIR bit of the sequential access device page
is set and the I-T nexus attempting to communicate with the drive does not hold
a reservation.
2F 00 - Commands cleared by another initiator
30 00 - Incompatible Media Installed - A write type operation could not be
executed because it is not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded.
30 01 - Unknown Format - An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge
in the drive is of a format not supported by the drive
30 02 - Incompatible Format - An operation could not be completed because the
Logical Format is not correct
30 03 - Cleaning Cartridge Installed - An operation could not be carried out
because the cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge
30 05 - Cannot write medium, incompatible format
30 07 - Cleaning Failure - A cleaning operation was attempted, but could not
be completed for some reason
30 0C - Data Protect - WORM overwrite attempted. The drive rejected a write operation
because it would have resulted in an overwrite. Overwrite is not allowed on
WORM media.
30 0D - Medium Error - WORM integrity check. The drive rejected a Read or Write
operation because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge.
31 00 - Media format corrupted - Data could not be read because the format on tape is
not valid, but is a known format. A failure occurred attempting to write the FID
37 00 - Rounded parameter - A Mode Select command parameter has been
rounded because the drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command.
3A 00 - Media Not Present - A media access command has been received
when there is no cartridge loaded
3B 00 - Sequential Positioning Error - A command has failed and left the logical
position at an unexpected location
3B 0C - Position past beginning of medium
3D 00 - Invalid bits in identify Message - An illegal Identify Message has been
received at the drive at the start of a command
3E 00 - Logical Unit has not Self-Configured - The drive has just powered on and
has not completed its self test sequence and can not process commands
3F 01 - Code Download - The firmware in the drive has just been changed
by a Write Buffer command
3F 03 - Inquiry data has changed
3F 0E - Reported LUNs data has changed
3F 0F - Echo buffer overwritten
40 xx - Diagnostic failure - A diagnostic test has failed. The xx (ASCQ) is a
vendor specific code indicating the failing component.

D-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC) -
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) (Continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
41 00 - Data path failure
43 00 - Message Error - A message could not be sent or received due to excessive
transmission errors
44 00 - Internal target failure - A hardware failure has been detected in the drive
that has caused the command to fail
45 00 - Select/Reset Failure - An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to
complete the command has failed
48 00 - Initiator detected error message received
49 00 - Invalid message error
4A 00 - Command phase error
4B 00 - Data Phase Error - A command could not be completed because too many
parity errors occurred during the Data phase
4E 00 - Overlapped Commands - An initiator selected the drive even though it
already had a command outstanding in the drive
50 00 - Write Append Error - A write type command failed because the point at
which to append data was unreadable
51 00 - Erase failure - An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the
media
52 00 - Cartridge fault - A command could not be completed due to a fault in the
tape cartridge
53 00 - Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 03) An attempt to load or eject
the cartridge failed due to a problem with the cartridge.
53 00 - Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 04) An attempt to load or eject
the cartridge failed due to a problem with the drive
53 02 - Media Removal Prevented - An Unload command has failed to eject the
cartridge because media removal has been prevented
5A 01 - Operator medium removal request
5D 00 - Failure Prediction Threshold - Failure Prediction thresholds have been
exceeded indicating that a failure may occur soon
5D FF - Failure Prediction False - A Mode Select command has been used to test
for Failure Prediction system.
82 82 - Drive requires cleaning - The drive has detected that a cleaning operation
is required to maintain good operation
82 83 - Bad Code Detected - The data transferred to the drive during a
firmware upgrade is corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware

Appendix D. Sense Data D-9

Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC) -
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) (Continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ

Sense Key 0 (No Sense)

EE 13 - Encryption - Key Translate
EF 13 - Encryption - Key Translate EKM

Sense Key 3 (Medium Error)

30 02 - Encryption - Encryption feature is not enabled so format/processing is not supported
EE 60 - Encryption - Proxy Command Error
EE D0 - Encryption - Data Read Decryption Failure
EE D1 - Encryption - Data Read after Write Decryption Failure
EE E0 - Encryption - Key Translation Failure
EE E1 - Encryption - Key Translation Ambiguous
EE F0 - Encryption - Decryption Fenced (Read)
EE F1 - Encryption - Encryption Fenced (Write)

Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error)

EE 0E - Encryption - Key Service Timeout
EE 0F - Encryption - Key Service Failure
40 00 - Encryption - Failure Hardware, POST or Module Failure

Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request)

EE 00 - Encryption - Key Service Not Enabled
EE 01 - Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
EE 02 - Encryption - Key Service Not Available
EE 10 - Encryption - Key Required
EE 20 - Encryption - Key Count Exceeded
EE 21 - Encryption - Key Alias Exceeded
EE 22 - Encryption - Key Reserved
EE 23 - Encryption - Key Conflict
EE 24 - Encryption - Key Method Change
EE 25 - Encryption - Key Format Not Supported
EE 26 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dAK
EE 27 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dSK
EE 28 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - eAK
EE 29 - Encryption - Authentication Failure
EE 2A - Encryption - Invalid RDKi
EE 2B - Encryption - Key Incorrect
EE 2C - Encryption - Key Wrapping Failure
EE 2D - Encryption - Sequencing Failure
EE 2E - Encryption - Unsupported Type
EE 2F - Encryption - New Key Encrypted Write Pending
EE 30 - Encryption - Prohibited Request
EE 31 - Encryption - Key Unknown
EE 32 - Encryption - Keystore Related Problem
EE 42 - Encryption - EKM Challenge Pending
EE E2 - Encryption - Key Translation Disallowed
EE FF - Encryption - Security Prohibited Function
EF 01 - Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
26 11 - Encryption - Incomplete Key - Associate Data Set
26 12 - Encryption (T10) - Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found
55 08 - Encryption (T10) - Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded

D-10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention)
EE 12 - Encryption - Key Change Detected
EE 18 - Encryption - Changed (Read)
EE 19 - Encryption - Changed (Write)
EE 40 - Encryption - EKM Identifier Changed
EE 41 - Encryption - EKM Challenge Changed
EE 50 - Encryption - Initiator Identifier Changed
EE 51 - Encryption - Initiator Response Changed
2A 11 - Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus
2A 12 - Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event

Sense Key 7 (Data Protect)

EF 10 - Encryption - Key Required
EF 11 - Encryption - Key Generation
EF 13 - Encryption - Key Translate
EF 1A - Encryption - Key Optional
EF C0 - Encryption - No Operation
26 10 - Encryption - Data Decryption Key Fail Limit
2A 13 - Encryption - Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Has Changed
74 00 - Security Error
74 01 - Encryption - Unable to Decrypt Data
74 02 - Encryption - Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting
74 03 - Encryption - Incorrect Data Encryption Key
74 04 - Encryption - Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed
74 05 - Encryption - Error Decrypting Data
14 FRU code
15 SKSV C/D Reserved BPV Bit pointer

When set to
1, the bit
pointer is
valid.
16 -17 SKSV = 0: First Error Fault Symptom Code (FSC).
SKSV = 1: Field Pointer
18-19 First Error Flag Data
20 Reserved (0)
21 CLN Reserved Reserved VolValid
22-28 Volume Label
29 Current Wrap
30-33 Relative LPOS
34 SCSI Address
35 Frame number Drive number

Appendix D. Sense Data D-11

Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
36-39 Port Identifier (Relative Target Port Address) Reporting Sense (This is the port address of the drive port
through which sense is being reported.

On Fibre Channel drives, it is the Fibre Channel Fabric Port Address [for example, 011E13 or 000026] with
byte 36 being reserved.

On SAS drives, it is the Hashed SAS Address of the drive port [for example, F32A94] with byte 36 being
reserved.

On SCSI, bytes 36 through 38 are reserved, and byte 39 is set to the port’s SCSI address [i.e., byte 39 =
byte 34].)
40 Tape Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relative Tgt Port Reporting Sense
Directory
Valid 0: Reserved

1: Relative Tgt Port 1 (Port 0)

2: Relative Tgt Port 2 (Port 1)

3: Relative Tgt Port 3 (Library Port)

41 Host Command (SCSI Opcode)
42 Density Type

0: No media present

1: Gen1 (384 track) Media Type (Vendor Reserved)

2: Gen2 (512 track)

3: Gen3 (704 track)

43
Volume Label Cartridge Type
44
45-48 Logical Block Number

(Current LBA that would be reported in Read Position command)

49-52 Data set Number
53
1st Error FSC
54
55
1st Error Flag Data
56
57
2nd Error FSC
58
59
2nd Error Flag Data
60
61
Next-to-Last Error FSC
62
63
Next-to-Last Error Flag Data
64

D-12 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
65
Last Error FSC
66
67
Last Error Flag Data
68
69 LPOS Region
70-85 ERP Summary Information
86-89 Product Revision Level: YMDV

(as defined in Standard Inquiry; this is also known as the Code Level)
90-95 Reserved (0)

The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape
drive. This tape drive conforms to all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI
standards.

Note:
1. The Error Code field (Byte 0) is set to 70h to indicate a current error,
that is one associated with the most recently received command. It is
set to 71h to indicate a deferred error which is not associated with the
current command.
2. The segment number (Byte 1) is zero since the Copy, Compare, and
Copy and Verify commands are not supported.
3. The File Mark flag (Byte 2, bit 7) is set if a Space, Read, or Verify
command did not complete because a file mark was read.
4. The End of Media (EOM) flag (Byte 2, bit 6) is set if a Write or Write
File Marks command completed in the early warning area. Spacing into
BOM also causes this flag to be set. It is also set on an attempt to read
or space past EOD, or if an attempt is made to space into Beginning of
Media.
5. The Illegal Length Indicator (ILI) flag (Byte 2, bit 5) is set if a Read or
Verify ended because a block was read from tape that did not have the
block length requested in the command.
6. The Information Bytes (Bytes 3-5) are only valid if the Valid flag is set.
This occurs only for current errors and not for deferred errors.
7. The Field Replaceable Unit field (Byte 14) is set to either zero or to a
non-zero, vendor-specific code indicating which part of the drive is
suspected of causing the failure.
8. The Clean (CLN) flag (Byte 21, bit 3) is set if the drive needs cleaning
and clear otherwise.
9. The Volume Label Fields Valid (VolValid) bit (Byte 21, bit 0) is set if the
Volume Label being reported is valid.
10. The Volume Label field (Bytes 22-28) reports the volume label if a
cartridge is loaded in the drive and Volume Label Fields Valid is set.
11. The Current Wrap field (Byte 29) reports the physical wrap of the tape.
The least significant bit reflects the current physical direction. A 0

Appendix D. Sense Data D-13

 means that the current direction is away from the physical beginning of
the tape. A 1 means that the current direction is towards the physical
beginning of the tape.
12. Relative LPOS fields (Bytes 30-33) reports the current physical position
on the tape.
13. SCSI Address field (Byte 34) reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive.
Values returned range from 00h to 0Fh.
14. This field (Byte 35) contains the frame and drive number, passed across
the RS-422 serial interface.

D-14 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host
Retrieving messages from different hosts are discussed in this appendix.

Obtaining Error Information from the Host

How error information is obtained from the host depends on the type of device
driver being utilized. Refer to the table below for instructions specific to your type
of device driver.

If you are... Then

Using an IBM device driver Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers
Installation and User's Guide (GC27-2130) for
problem determination information specific
to your host operation system. Visit
ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/devdrvr/
Doc/ to download the latest version of the
manual.
Using a non-IBM device driver Refer to “IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic
Tool (ITDT)” on page 9-4. Visit
http://www-1.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=ssg1S4000662 to
download the diagnostic tool.

Retrieving from an IBM System p™ or IBM Power System with AIX

IBM device drivers for the System p system logs error information when an error
occurs on a tape drive or library.

The error information includes the following:

1. Device VPD
2. SCSI command parameters
3. SCSI sense data (if available)

The AIX Tape and Media Changer Device Driver for the System p provides
logging to the system error log for a variety of errors. You can view the error log
by following this procedure.
1. At the AIX command line, type errpt |pg to display a summary report, or type
errpt -a |pg to display a detailed report. Press [Enter].

Note: In most cases you will use the summary report to find the date and time
of any errors related to library devices, then use the detail report to
obtain the sense data needed to identify the cause of the error.
2. Press [Enter] to scroll through the error log.
3. Type q and press [Enter], to quit the error log at any time.

To correct a problem you noticed in the errpt report, determine the type of error by
using the examples that follow:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 E-1

 v For library errors [Resource Name = smcn (for example, smc0) and Resource
Type = 3573-TL]), refer to “SCSI Sense Data Definition” and Sense Data in
Appendix C.
v For drive errors [Resource Name = rmtn (for example, rmt0) and Resource Type
= LTO], refer to “SCSI Sense Data Definition” and Sense Data in Appendix C.
v For fibre channel errors (not fibre channel adapter errors), determine which host
adapter and device are affected, and go to that host documentation to resolve
any fibre channel problems. If unsuccessful, call for IBM support.
v For fibre channel adapter errors (not fibre channel bus errors), use the
maintenance package for the host.

Note: See Appendix D, “Sense Data,” on page D-1 for further details on sense
data.

SCSI Sense Data Definition

Following is an example of a tape drive communication failure while attached to
an Open Systems host through a fibre channel link, using SCSI protocol. When the
host detected the failure, it built the following SCSI Sense Data record. An
explanation of the SCSI Sense Data breakout in this example follows.

SENSE DATA

aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

0600 0000 1200 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0200 0300 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note: The bold area above represents the SCSI Sense Data presented by the host. The regular font data (in this case
many bytes of ’zero’), designated by ’ssss’ would normally contain device sense data, but with the kind of
failure in this example (COMMAND TIMEOUT), the host could not collect valid device sense data, so zeros
are the result and should be ignored. If the host had been able to collect valid sense data from the drive, the
first byte ’ss’ would be ’70’, ’71’, ’F0’ or ’F1’, and valid device sense data would be listed.
DETAIL DATA

aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host. In this case, '06' bytes.
bb SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address '00'.
xx Unused or reserved
cc Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case, '12' which was an "Inquiry".

SCSI Sense Data - Library Error

The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from an RS/6000 Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look
like. Unlike the previous situation with “SCSI Sense Data Definition”, this data
contains valid sense data as defined by the hex ‘70’ in the first sense byte position.
Therefore, instead of all zeros as in the previous example, we have valid data to
rely on. While the data shows that this is a TAPE_ERR2, it could also be caused by
a library failure. As described above, the resource name is smc0 indicating a library
error. The ASC/ASCQ points to a “Mechanical Positioning Error” while attempting
a “Move Medium” command (‘A5’). For more information about Sense Data,

E-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 consult your “IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library
SCSI Reference” document.

LABEL: TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER: 476B351D

Date/Time: Fri May 04 42:26 DFT

Sequence Number: 1665
Machine ID: 0046083B4C00
Node ID: risc4
Error Class: H
Error Type: PERM
Resource Name: smc0
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: 3573
Location: P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L1000000000000
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......3573-TL
Serial Number...............X2U78B0384
Device Specific . (FW) .....4.09 (Firmware Level)

Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE
Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES

Detail Data

aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ...

aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host. In this case, '0C' bytes.
bb SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address '00'.
xx Unused or reserved
cc Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case, 'A5' which was a "Move Medium".

SENSE DATA
0C00 0000 A500 0000 100F 1010 0000 0000 0102 0000 7000 0400 0000 000A 0000 0000
818F 0000 BE00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Figure E-1. AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example

Table E-1. AIX ERRPT Library Sense Data

Hex Description

A5 SCSI Command (in this case Move Medium)

70 Byte 0 of Library Sense Data (Valid Data)
04 Sense Key (in this case Hardware Error)
818F ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier), in this case a “Cannot Find
Slider Block” error.

SCSI Sense Data - Drive Error

The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from a RS/6000 Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look
like. Like the SCSI Sense Data in Example 1, this Sense Data example contains

Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host E-3

 valid sense data as defined by the hex ‘71’ in the first sense byte position.
Therefore, we have valid data to rely on. While the data shows that this example is
a TAPE_ERR2, it could also be caused by a library failure. Further review of the
ASC/ASCQ, (Media load or eject failed), points more to a problem with the media
or the drive. Also note that the FSC listed was F402 which is a timeout while
attempting to load drive 2. For more information about the Sense Key and
ASC/ASCQ fields, refer to the “IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and
TS3200 Tape Library SCSI Reference” document.

LABEL: TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER: 476B351D

Date/Time: Wed May 09 07:51:42 DFT

Sequence Number: 1669
Machine ID: 0046083B4C00
Node ID: risc4
Error Class: H
Error Type: PERM
Resource Name: rmt0
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: LTO
Location: P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L0
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......ULT3573-TD4
Serial Number...............1300000680
Device Specific . (FW) .....74H4 (Firmware Level)
Loadable Microcode Level....A1700D5C

Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE
Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES

Detail Data
SENSE DATA
0600 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0102 0000 7100 0400 0000 0058 0000 0000
5300 0702 F402 0000 0001 0110 0001 0000 0000 0000 0200 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2800 01E0 0000 0000 0000 4133 3820
2020 2000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Figure E-2. AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example

Table E-2. AIX ERRPT Drive Sense Data

Hex Description

71 Valid Sense Data Follows

04 Sense Key (Hardware Problem)
5300 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier)
F401 FSC (fault symptom code) in this case, Drive Load Timeout. Likely a drive problem.

Retrieving from a Sun System

The Sun System provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or
library in system-errolog /var/adm/messages. When you have located the error
information, go to Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting,” on page 7-1.

E-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Retrieving from an HP-UX System
The HP-UX system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or
library in syslog /var/adm/syslog.log. When you have located the error
information, go to Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting,” on page 7-1.

Retrieving from an IBM System i™ or IBM Power System with IBM i OS

IBM device drivers for the System i system logs error information when an error
occurs on a tape drive or library.

The error information includes the following:

1. Device VPD
2. SCSI command parameters
3. SCSI sense data (if available)

To gain access to the System i problem logs and error logs, sign on at any available
workstation using the QSRV logon and its security password (QSRV). After signing
on, the proper access authorizations will be granted and the System i MAIN
MENU displays.
1. Type STRSST (Start System Service Tools) command on the command entry line
on the System i Main Menu, and press [Enter].
2. On the “System Service Tool (SST)” screen, select Start a service tool, and press
[Enter].
3. On the “Start a Service Tool” screen, select Product activity log, and press
[Enter].
4. On the “Product activity log” screen, select Analyze log, and press [Enter].
5. On the “Select Subsystem Data” screen, select Magnetic media, enter the From
and To time period for searching the error log, and press [Enter].
6. On the “Select Analysis Report Options” screen, select the following, and press
[Enter].
a. Report type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
b. Optional entries to include
1) Informational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES
2) Statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO
c. Reference code selection
1) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2) Reference codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . *ALL
d. Device selection
1) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2) Device type or resource names . . *ALL
7. On the “Log Analysis Report” screen, enter a 5 on an error line that has a
resource type of 3583 (library) or 3580 (drive), and press [Enter].
8. On the “Display Detail Report for Resource” screen, press:
v F4=Additional Information.
Pressing F4 will display the machine type and serial number of the device. It
also will display SCSI sense data, if available.
v F6=Hexadecimal report.
Pressing F6 will display the device hexadecimal data (for support use).

Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host E-5

 v F9=Address Information.
Pressing F9 will display the SCSI address information.

System i Product Activity Log

Product Activity Log Page . . . : 1
ROMLPAR1 08/26/05 10:28:40
Invocation . . . . . . : Product Activity Log
Title . . . . . . . . . : Log ID Report
System type . . . . . . : 9406
System model . . . . . : 825
System release . . . . : V5R3M0
System name . . . . . . : ROMLPAR1
System serial
number . . . . . . . : 10-F321B
Log ID . . . . . . . . : 09020145
Include hexadecimal
data . . . . . . . . : Y Y=YES
N=NO
Product Activity Log Page . . . : 2
ROMLPAR1 08/26/05 10:28:40
Detail Report for Resource
Serial Resource
Name Type Model Number Name
TAPMLB19 3580 001 00-1004538
Log ID . . . . . . . . . : 09020145 Sequence . . . . . . : 211510
Date . . . . . . . . . . : 04/21/05 Time . . . . . . . . : 10:40:11
Reference code . . . . . : 9350 Secondary code . . . : 00000000
Table ID . . . . . . . . : 63A00001 IPL source/state . . : B / 3
Class . . . . . . . . . . : Permanent
System ref code . . . . . : 63A09350
Tape unit detected a read or write error on tape medium
Physical location:
Frame ID . . . . . . . :
Card position . . . . . :
Device position . . . . :
Logical address:
PCI bus: Library:
System bus . . . . . . : 36 I/O adapter . . . . . . : 2
System board . . . . . : 0 I/O bus . . . . . . . . : 1
System card . . . . . . : 32 Library: 20
Controller . . . . . . : 4
Device . . . . . . . . : 0
SENSE DATA FOLLOWS. . . . :
DATA OFFSET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00000000 71000300 0000001C 00000000 53000600
00000010 31190601 00020000 00000000 00000000
00000020 00000301
00000000 0000 C5D3F0F5 00000188 00E00180 8983EBC2 4B9D8001 00033A36 20E00902 01450000 *EL05...h....ic.B................*
00000000 0040 F3F8F2F8 F4F4F6F3 C1F00002 00240000 00200000 00050001 00140004 00000002 *38284463A0......................*
00000000 0060 00000000 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40400000 00000000 00000000 *............ ..........*
00000000 0080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000E3C1 *..............................TA*
00000000 00A0 D7D4D3C2 F1F94040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 *PMLB19 ................ *
00000000 00C0 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * *
00000000 00E0 F6F3C1F0 F0F0F0F1 0000E2D3 C9C3C9D6 4040E5F5 D9F3D4F0 40400000 00000000 *63A00001..SLICIO V5R3M0 ......*
00000000 0100 01030000 00000000 00000141 00000000 00000000 01950000 00000000 00000197 *.....................n.........p*
00000000 0120 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 *................................*
00000000 0140 E3C1D7F2 F7404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 00070001 *TAP27 ....*
00000000 0160 00000000 10200003 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0009001E 00000188 *...............................h*
00000000 0180 F8807800 28440001 00002600 21410400 63A00001 93500100 45381202 05D80000 *8...................l&.......Q..*
00000000 01A0 00000000 00004624 00000000 00000000 00040000 00003580 0001A170 02903435 *................................*
Product Activity Log Page . . . : 3
ROMLPAR1 08/26/05 10:28:40
00000000 01C0 36310040 00007100 03000000 001C0000 00005300 06003119 06010002 00000000 *... ............................*
00000000 01E0 00000000 00000000 03010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 *................................*
00000000 0200 00000000 0000D9C5 D8400000 D9E2000C 02000000 0000E2C3 E2C91202 00180000 *......REQ ..RS........SCSI......*
00000000 0220 00000000 0000C5D9 D940C3C8 C3D20444 8502D9E2 0000E2C3 E2C91202 00180300 *......ERR CHCK..e.RS..SCSI......*
00000000 0240 00008000 0000E2D5 E2C47100 03000000 001C0000 0000C5D9 D7C11202 05D80000 *......SNSD............ERPA...Q..*
00000000 0260 00171202 05D8D9C5 E2D70000 00171202 05D8D9E2 00000000 D4C5C4C9 C10000C3 *.....QRESP.......QRS....MEDIA..C*
00000000 0280 D7D7F1F2 F5C500D4 E3C1D7C3 D3D500C3 D7D7F6F4 F0F000E4 C6C9F0F0 F8F7F1C3 *PP125E.MTAPCLN.CPP6400.UFI00871C*
00000000 02A0 D7D7F1F8 F5C600D5 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 *PP185F.N........................*
00000000 02C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 C3D7D7F6 F3F0C3D5 *........................CPP630CN*
00000000 02E0 F6F3C1F0 F9F3F5F0 F0F0F0F0 F0F0F0F0 F0F0F0F0 F0F1F9F7 F8F0F0F7 0000E8D5 *63A0935000000000000001978007..YN*
00000000 0300 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 *........ *
* * * * * E N D O F C O M P U T E R P R I N T O U T * * * * *

E-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Appendix F. SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps
Note: For additional information, refer to “SNMP Messaging” on page 1-6.
Table F-1. SNMP Status Events
Event Trap ID Definition
Status Change 1 Library status has changed.
Door Open 2 Library door has been opened.
Mail Slot Accessed 3 Library I/O Station has been
accessed.
Fault Posted 4 Library has posted a hard fault/error.
Request Drive Clean 5 Drive has requested a clean.
Drive Error 6 Drive has reported an error.
Loader Retries Excessive 7 Library has reported excessive load
retries.
Loader OK 8 Library has resumed normal
operations.
Account Password Change 9 Account password in the library has
changed.
Note: Trap ID 9 requires library firmware level 8.0 or greater, and the latest SNMP MIB file.
Configuration Change 10 Library or drive configuration has
changed.
Library Login 11 Someone has logged into the library
via the Web User Interface.
Library Logout 12 Someone has logged out of the
library via the Web User Interface.
| Note: Trap IDs 10, 11, and 12 require library firmware level 9.00 or greater and the latest SNMP MIB file.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 F-1

F-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix G. Library Configuration Form
Use this form when planning your library configuration. Keep this document in a
secure location and update it when changes are made to the library configuration.

General Information
Library type TS3100 TS3200
Library Serial
Number
Library name
I/O Station Enabled Disabled
AutoClean Enabled Disabled
Library Network Settings
DHCP Enabled Disabled
IP Address
Netmask
Address
Gateway
Address
DNS Servers IP
Addresses
EKM Servers IP
Addresses
Encryption
Settings
Logical Libraries
Number in 1 2 3 4
library
Mode Random: ON/OFF Random: ON/OFF Random: ON/OFF Random: ON/OFF
Sequential: ON/OFF Sequential: ON/OFF Sequential: ON/OFF Sequential: ON/OFF
Autoload: ON/OFF Autoload: ON/OFF Autoload: ON/OFF Autoload: ON/OFF
Loop: ON/OFF Loop: ON/OFF Loop: ON/OFF Loop: ON/OFF
Magazine h Upper Left h Upper Left h Upper Left h Upper Left
Assignment h Lower Left h Lower Left h Lower Left h Lower Left
h Upper Right h Upper Right h Upper Right h Upper Right
h Lower Right h Lower Right h Lower Right h Lower Right
Number of
Active Slots
Drive Serial 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4:
Numbers 4U Position 3: 4U Position 3: 4U Position 3: 4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 G-1

Drive types 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4:4U
4U Position 3: 4U Position 3: 4U Position 4: Position 3:2U/4U
2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2: 4U Position 3: Position 2:2U/4U
2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 2: Position 1:
2U/4U Position 1:4U
Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
Fibre Channel Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library:
Drive settings Position: Position: Position: Position:
Speed: Speed: Speed: Speed:
Port type: Port type: Port type: Port type:
Loop ID: Loop ID: Loop ID: Loop ID:
SAS Drive Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library:
settings Position: Position: Position: Position:
ID: ID: ID: ID:
SCSI Drive Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library:
settings Position: Position: Position: Position:
ID: ID: ID: ID:
User Accounts
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:

Activation Key Labels

[Adhere one of the activation key labels here for future reference.]
Encryption Key

Path Failover [Adhere one of the activation key labels here for future reference.]
Key

G-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix H. Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted
mobility or limited vision, to use the HTML version of the customer
documentation successfully.

Features

These are the major accessibility features for the HTML version of this document:
v You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what
is displayed on the screen. The following screen readers have been tested:
WebKing and Window-Eyes.
v You can operate all features using the keyboard instead of the mouse.

Navigating by keyboard

You can use keys or key combinations to perform operations and initiate many
menu actions that can also be done through mouse actions. You can navigate the
HTML version of the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape
Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide help system from the keyboard by
using the following key combinations:
v To traverse to the next link, button, or topic, press Tab inside a frame (page).
v To move to the previous topic node, press ^ or Shift+Tab.
v To scroll all the way up or down, press Home or End, respectively.
v To print the current page or active frame, press Ctrl+P.
v To select, press Enter.

Accessing the publications

You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format
(PDF) using the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The PDFs are provided at the following
Web site:

http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 H-1

H-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries (or regions). Consult your local IBM representative for information
on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an
IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that
IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent
product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property
right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and
verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) do not allow disclaimer
of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement
may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those web
sites. The materials at those web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of

those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.
IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of
performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 I-1

Trademarks
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in
the United States, or other countries (or regions), or both:

AIX System p
System i xSeries
IBM Tivoli
iSeries TotalStorage
pSeries zSeries
System x System Storage
i5/OS System z

The following are U.S. trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company, International

Business Machines Corporation, and Certance.

Linear Tape-Open
LTO
Ultrium

Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States, or other

countries (or regions), or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, and the Windows logo are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, or other
countries (or regions), or both.

Solaris and Sun are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Incorporated.

Unix is a trademark of The Open Group in the United States, or other countries or
regions, or both.

Other company, product, or service names may be the trademarks or service marks
of others.

Electronic Emission Notices

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

I-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du

Canada.

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Directive
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The
limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product

might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take
adequate measures.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and
to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are available
from IBM authorized dealers. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any interference
caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors.

European community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Telephone: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
E-mail: [email protected]

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie
zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie

2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022
Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu

installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

Notices I-3
 "Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Mabnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür
aufzukommen."

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische

Verträglichkeit von Geräten

Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit

von Geräten (EMVG)." Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die

elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG
Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart.

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.

Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement

vcci
People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission
Statement

Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement

I-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
IBM Taiwan Contact Information
IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Information:
IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan
Tel: 0800-016-888

f2c00790
Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product
might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take
adequate measures.

Notices I-5
I-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, archive. To collect and store files in a designated
abbreviations, and acronyms that are used in this place.
publication. If you do not find the term you are
ASCII. American National Standard Code for
looking for, refer to the index or to the Dictionary
Information Interchange. A 7 bit coded character set (8
of Computing, 1994. bits including parity check) that consists of control
characters and graphic characters.
Numbers assigning a device . The establishing of the
2:1 compression. The relationship between the relationship of a device to a running task, process, job,
quantity of data that can be stored with compression as or program.
compared to the quantity of data that can be stored
assignment. The naming of a specific device to
without compression. In 2:1 compression, twice as
perform a function.
much data can be stored with compression as can be
stored without compression. asynchronous. Pertaining to two or more processes
that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific
A events such as common timing signals.

attention (notice). A word for calling attention to the

A. Ampere.
possibility of danger to a program, device, or system,
ac. Alternating current. or to data. Contrast with caution and danger.

access method. A technique for moving data between ATTN. Attention.

main storage and input or output devices.

accessor. This component contains the library robot

B
and bar code reader. The accessor moves cartridges to
backup. To make additional copies of documents or
and from the I/O Station, storage slots, and tape
software for safekeeping.
drives.
bar code. A code representing characters by sets of
adapter card. A circuit board that adds function to a
parallel bars of varying thickness and separation which
computer.
are read optically by transverse scanning.
adj. Adjustment.
bar code label. Paper bearing a bar code and having
AIX. Advanced Interactive Executive. IBM’s an adhesive backing. The bar code label must be
implementation of the UNIX® operating system. The affixed to a tape cartridge to enable the library to
RS/6000 system, among others, uses AIX as it's identify the cartridge and its volume serial number.
operating system.
bar code reader. A laser device specialized for
alphanumeric. Pertaining to a character set that scanning and reading bar codes and converting them
contains letters, numerals, and usually other characters, into either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code.
such as punctuation marks.
bezel. Decorative and safety cover.
alter. To change.
bicolored. Having two colors.
ambient temperature. The temperature of air or other
bit. Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary
media in a designated area, particularly the area
numbering system.
surrounding equipment.
BOM or bill of materials. A list of specific types and
ampere (A). A unit of measure for electric current that
amounts of direct materials expected to be used to
is equivalent to a flow of one coulomb per second, or
produce a given job or quantity of output.
to the current produced by one volt applied across a
resistance of one ohm. browser. A client program that initiates requests to a
Web server and displays the information that the server
ANSI. American National Standards Institute.
returns.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 J-1

buffer . A routine or storage used to compensate for a contingent connection. A connection between a
difference in rate of flow of data or time of occurrence channel path and a drive caused when a unit check
of events, when transferring data from one device to occurs during an I/O operation.
another.
controller. A device that provides the interface
bus. A facility for transferring data between several between a system and one or more tape drives.
devices located between two end points, only one
device being able to transmit at a given moment. control path drive. A drive that communicates
messages from the host computer to the library in
byte. A string consisting of a certain number of bits which the drive is installed.
(usually 8) that are treated as a unit and represent a
character. A fundamental data unit. CP. Circuit protector.

ctrl. Control.
C
CU. Control unit.
capacity. The amount of data that can be contained on
storage media and expressed in bytes of data.
D
cartridge manual rewind tool. A device that can be
fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind danger (notice). A word to call attention to possible
tape into or out of the cartridge. lethal harm to people. Contrast with attention and
caution.
cartridge storage slot. Individual slot located within a
magazine that is used to house tape cartridges. data. Any representations such as characters or analog
quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned.
caution (notice). A word to call attention to possible
personal harm to people. Contrast with attention and data buffer. The storage buffer in the control unit.
danger. This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate
between the control unit and the channel.
CE. Customer engineer; field engineer; service
representative. data cartridge. A tape cartridge dedicated to storing
data. Contrast with cleaning cartridge.
centimeter (cm). One one-hundredth of a meter (0.01
m). Approximately 0.39 inch. data check. A synchronous or asynchronous indication
of a condition caused by invalid data or incorrect
channel command. An instruction that directs a data positioning of data.
channel, control unit, or device to perform an operation
or set of operations. dc. Direct current.

char. Character. DCS. Designated Cleaning Slot

CHK. Check. degauss. To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by

means of electrical coils carrying currents that
cleaning cartridge. A tape cartridge that is used to neutralize the magnetism of the tape.
clean the heads of a tape drive. Contrast with data
cartridge. degausser. A device that makes magnetic tape
nonmagnetic.
command. A control signal that initiates an action or
the start of a sequence of actions. degradation. A decrease in quality of output or
throughput or an increase in machine error rate.
compact disc (CD). A disc, usually 4.75 inches in
diameter, from which data is read optically by means of degraded. Decreased in quality of output or
a laser. throughput or increased machine error rate.

compression. The process of eliminating gaps, empty deserialize. To change from serial-by-bit to
fields, redundancies, and unnecessary data to shorten parallel-by-byte.
the length of records or blocks.
detented. A part being held in position with a catch or
concurrent. Refers to diagnostic procedures that can lever.
be run on one control unit while the rest of the
device. Any hardware component or peripheral, such
subsystem remains available for customer applications.
as a tape drive or tape library, that can receive and
send data.

J-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
device driver. A file that contains the code needed to tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption
use an attached device. keys are provided by the host application or host
server.
DIAG . Diagnostic section of maintenance information
manual. EPO. Emergency power off.

differential. See High Voltage Differential (HVD). EPROM. Erasable programmable read only memory.

direct access storage. A storage device in which the EQC . Equipment check.
access time is independent of the location of the data.
equipment check. An asynchronous indication of a
download. (1) To transfer programs or data from a malfunction.
computer to a connected device, typically a personal
computer. (2) To transfer data from a computer to a Error log. A dataset or file in a product or system
connected device, such as a workstation or where error information is stored for later access.
microcomputer.
ESD. Electrostatic discharge.
DRAM. Dynamic random-access memory.

drive, magnetic tape. A mechanism for moving

F
magnetic tape and controlling its movement.
fault symptom code (FSC). A hexadecimal code
Drive Not Configured. This message occurs during generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in
the first boot after a factory settings restore is executed. response to a detected subsystem error.
This is not a real issue since it takes the library a while
FC. Feature code.
to configure.
FCC. Federal communications commission.
DRV. Drive.
FE. Field engineer, customer engineer, or service
DSE. Data security erase.
representative.
DSP. Digital signal processor.
fiducial. A target used for teaching a physical location
to a robot.
E
field replaceable unit (FRU). An assembly that is
EBCDIC. Extended binary-coded decimal interchange replaced in its entirety when any one of its components
code. fails.

EC. Edge connector. Engineering change. file. A named set of records stored or processed as a
unit. Also referred to as a dataset.
ECC. Error correction code.
file protection. The processes and procedures
EEPROM. Electrically erasable programmable established in an information system that are designed
read-only memory. to inhibit unauthorized access to, contamination of, or
deletion of a file.
EIA. Electronics Industries Association.
file transfer protocol (FTP). In the Internet suite of
EIA unit. A unit of measure, established by the protocols, an application layer protocol that uses TCP
Electronic Industries Association, equal to 44.45 and Telnet services to transfer bulk-data files between
millimeters (1.75 inches). machines or hosts.

eject. To remove or force out from within. firmware. Proprietary code that is usually delivered as
microcode as part of an operating system. Firmware is
electronic mail. Correspondence in the form of more efficient than software loaded from an alterable
messages transmitted between user terminals over a medium and more adaptable to change than pure
computer network. hardware circuitry. An example of firmware is the Basic
Input/Output System (BIOS) in read-only memory
e-mail. See electronic mail.
(ROM) on a PC motherboard.
encryption. To alter (a file, for example) using a secret
FLASH EEPROM. An electrically erasable
code so as to be unintelligible to unauthorized parties.
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) that can
An encryption enabled drive contains the necessary
be updated.
hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host
FMR. Field microcode replacement.

Glossary J-3
format. The arrangement or layout of data on a data magnetic tape in an IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge.
medium. The drive houses the mechanism (drive head) that
reads and writes data to the tape.
formatter. Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that
performs data conversion, speed matching, encoding, ID. Identifier.
first level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more
tape drives. identifier (ID). (1) In programming languages, a
lexical unit that names a language object; for example,
FP. File protect. the names of variables, arrays, records, labels, or
procedures. An identifier usually consists of a letter
frayed. Damaged as if by an abrasive substance. optionally followed by letters, digits, or other
characters. (2) One or more characters used to identify
FRU. Field replaceable unit. or name data element and possibly to indicate certain
properties of that data element. (3) A sequence of bits
FSC. Fault symptom code.
or characters that identifies a program, device, or
FSI. Fault symptom index. system to another program, device, or system.

functional microcode. Microcode that is resident in IML. Initial microprogram load.

the machine during normal customer operation.
Incomp. Mag.. Incompatible Magazine: This message
appears on the Operator Control Panel during library
G initializing. It occurs during factory restore or VPD.
This is not a real issue since it takes the library a while
g. Gram. to configure.

GB. gigabyte. initial microprogram load (IML). The action of

loading a microprogram from an external storage to
GBIC. Gigabit Interface Converter. writable control storage.

Gbi. gigabit initiator. The component that executes a command.

The initiator can be the host system or the tape control
gigabit (Gbit). 1 000 000 000 bits. unit.
gigabyte (GB). 1 000 000 000 bytes. INST. Installation.
Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC). Converts copper interface. A shared boundary. An interface might be a
interface to optic interface. hardware component to link two devices or it might be
a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or
gnd. Ground.
more computer programs.

H interposer. The part used to convert a 68-pin

connector to a 50-pin D-shell connector.
hertz (Hz). Unit of frequency. One hertz equals one
cycle per second. intervention required. Manual action is needed.

hex. Hexadecimal. INTRO. Introduction.

High Voltage Differential (HVD). A logic signaling I/O. Input/output.

system that enables data communication between a
IOP. Input/output processor.
supported host and the library. HVD signaling uses a
paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects IPL. Initial program load.
of noise on the SCSI bus. Any noise injected into the
signal is present in both a plus and minus state, and is ISV. Independent software vendor.
thereby canceled. Synonymous with differential.
ITST. Idle-time self-test.
HVD. SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential

Hz. Hertz (cycles per second). K

kilogram (kg). One thousand grams (approximately
I 2.2 pounds).

IBM Ultrium Tape Drive. Located within the library, km. kilometer. 1000 Meters, Approximately 5/8 mile.
a data-storage device that controls the movement of the

J-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
L media-type identifier. Pertaining to the bar code on
the bar code label of the IBM Ultrium Tape Cartridge, a
2-character code, L1, that represents information about
LAN. Local area network. A computer network within
the cartridge. L identifies the cartridge as one that can
a limited area.
be read by devices which incorporate LTO technology;
LCD. See liquid crystal display. 1 indicates that it is the first generation of its type.

LED. Light-emitting diode. mega. One million of.

Linear Tape-Open (LTO). A type of tape storage meter. In the Metric System, the basic unit of length;
technology developed by the IBM Corporation, equal to approximately 39.37 inches.
Hewlett-Packard, and Certance. LTO technology is an
micro. One millionth of.
“open format” technology, which means that its users
will have multiple sources of product and media. The microcode. (1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A
“open” nature of LTO technology enables compatibility code, representing the instructions of an instruction set,
between different vendors' offerings by ensuring that implemented in a part of storage that is not
vendors comply with verification standards. The LTO program-addressable. (3) To design, write, and test one
technology is implemented in two formats: the Accelis or more micro instructions. (4) See also microprogram.
format focuses on fast access; the Ultrium format
focuses on high capacity. The Ultrium format is the microdiagnostic routine. A program that runs under
preferred format when capacity (rather than fast access) the control of a supervisor, usually to identify field
is the key storage consideration. An Ultrium cartridge replaceable units.
has a compressed data capacity of up to 800 GB (2:1
compression) and a native data capacity of up to 400 microdiagnostic utility. A program that is run by the
GB. customer engineer to test the machine.

liquid crystal display (LCD). A low-power display microinstruction. A basic or elementary machine
technology used in computers and other I/O devices. instruction.

loadable. Having the ability to be loaded. microprogram. A group of microinstructions that

when executed performs a preplanned function.
LTO cartridge memory (LTO-CM). Within each LTO
The term microprogram represents a dynamic
Ultrium data cartridge, an embedded electronics and
arrangement or selection of one or more groups of
interface module that can store and retrieve a
microinstructions for execution to perform a particular
cartridge's historical usage and other information.
function. The term microcode represents
LVD. SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential microinstructions used in a product as an alternative to
hard-wired circuitry to implement certain functions of a
processor or other system component.
M
MIM. Media information message.
magnetic tape. A tape with a magnetical surface layer
on which data can be stored by magnetic recording. mm. Millimeter.

MAP. Maintenance analysis procedure. modifier. That which changes the meaning.

mask. A pattern of characters that controls the mount a device. To assign an I/O device with a
retention or elimination of portions of another pattern request to the operator.
of characters. To use a pattern of characters to control
the retention or elimination of portions of another MP. Microprocessor.
pattern of characters.
ms. Millisecond.
master file. A file used as an authority in a given job
MSG. Message.
and that is relatively permanent, even though its
contents may change. Synonymous with main file. multipath. Pertaining to using more than one path.
MB. Mega Byte (usually expressed as data rate in
MB/s or MB/second). N
media capacity. The amount of data that can be N/A. Not applicable.
contained on a storage medium, expressed in bytes of
data. node. In a network, a point at which one or more
functional units connect channels or data circuits.

Glossary J-5
NVS. Nonvolatile storage. A storage device whose electronic distribution of documents. PDF files are
contents are not lost when power is cut off. compact, can be distributed globally (via e-mail, the
Web, intranets, or CD-ROM), and can be viewed with
the Acrobat Reader, which is software from Adobe
O Systems that can be downloaded at no cost from the
Adobe Systems home page.
oersted. The unit of magnetic field strength in the
unrationalized centimeter-gram-second (cgs) PROM. Programmable read only memory.
electromagnetic system. The oersted is the magnetic
field strength in the interior of an elongated, uniformly PS. Power supply.
wound solenoid that is excited with a linear current
density in its winding of one abampere per 4π PWR. Power.
centimeters of axial length.

offline. Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit R

without the continual control of a computer. Contrast
with online. rack. A unit that houses the components of a storage
subsystem, such as the library.
online. Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
that is under the continual control of a computer. rackmount kit. A packaged collection of articles used
Contrast with offline. to install the rack mounted version of the library.

OPER. Operation. RAM. Random access memory.

ov. Over voltage. Random access memory. A storage device into which
data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a
overrun. Loss of data because a receiving device is nonsequential manner.
unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted.
RAS. Reliability, availability, and serviceability.
overtightening. To tighten too much.
record. A collection of related data or words, treated
as a unit.
P
recording density. The number of bits in a single
parameter. A variable that is given a constant value linear track measured per unit of length of the
for a specified application and that may denote the recording medium.
application.
recoverable error. An error condition that allows
p bit. Parity bit. continued execution of a program.

PC. Parity check. ref. Reference.

PCC. Power control compartment. reg. Register.

PDF. Portable Document Format. reinventory. To inventory again.

PE. Parity error. Product engineer. retention. The process or function of tightening the
tape onto the cartridge, if it is sensed that the tape has
pick. Pertaining to the library, to remove, by means of a loose wrap on the cartridge.
a robotic device, a tape cartridge from a storage slot or
drive. RH. Relative humidity.

picker. A robotic mechanism located inside the library robot. Picker.

that moves cartridges between the cartridge storage
slots and the drive. robotics. Picker assembly.

PM. Preventive maintenance. RPQ. Request for price quotation.

POR. Power-on reset. R/W. Read/write.

port. A physical connection for communication

between the drive/library and the host processor.
S
Portable Document Format (PDF). A standard s. Seconds of time.
specified by Adobe Systems, Incorporated, for the

J-6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
SAC. Service Action Code. Code developed to indicate v Ultra SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus, and supports
possible FRU or FRU's to replace to repair the data rates of 20 or 40 MBps.
hardware. v Ultra2 SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus and supports
data rates of 40 or 80 MBps.
scratch cartridge. A data cartridge that contains no
useful data, but can be written to with new data. v Ultra3 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data
rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
SCSI. Small computer system interface. v Ultra160 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data
rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
SE. Single-ended.
SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol, a
segment. A part. standard TCP/IP protocol to send alerts about
conditions (such as need for operator intervention) over
sel. Select.
a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS). A drive sled with a SAS station.
interface can be linked directly to controllers. SAS is a
SNS. Sense.
performance improvement over traditional SCSI
because SAS enables multiple devices (up to 128) of special feature. A feature that can be ordered to
different sizes and types to be connected enhance the capability, storage capacity, or performance
simultaneously with thinner and longer cables; its of a product, but is not essential for its basic work.
full-duplex signal transmission supports 3.0 GBs. In
addition, SAS drives can be hot-plugged. SR. Service representative, see also CE.

serialize. To change from parallel-by-byte to SRAM. Static random access memory.

serial-by-bit.
SS. Status store.
serializer. A device that converts a space distribution
of simultaneous states representing data into a ST. Store.
corresponding time sequence of states.
standard feature. The significant design elements of a
servo, servos. An adjective for use in qualifying some product that are included as part of the fundamental
part or aspect of a servomechanism. product.

servomechanism. A feedback control system in which START. Start maintenance.

at least one of the system signals represents mechanical
motion. subsystem. A secondary or subordinate system,
usually capable of operating independently of, or
Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP, a asynchronously with, a controlling system.
standard TCP/IP protocol to send alerts about
conditions (such as need for operator intervention) over SUPP. Support.
a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring
station. sync. Synchronous, synchronize. Occurring with a
regular or predictable time relationship.
Slot Blocker. A slot blocker is used to restrict/close
off a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be placed
there. This blocker can easily be removed.
T
tachometer, tach. A device that emits pulses that are
Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI). A
used to measure/check speed or distance.
standard used by computer manufacturers for attaching
peripheral devices (such as tape drives, hard disks, tape cartridge. A container holding magnetic tape that
CD-ROM players, printers, and scanners) to computers can be processed without separating it from the
(servers). Pronounced “scuzzy”. Variations of the SCSI container.
interface provide for faster data transmission rates than
standard serial and parallel ports (up to 160 megabytes tape void. An area in the tape in which no signal can
per second). The variations include: be detected.
v Fast/Wide SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus, and supports data
rates of up to 20 MBps. TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol.
v SCSI-1: Uses an 8-bit bus, and supports data rates of
4 MBps. TCU. Tape control unit.
v SCSI-2: Same as SCSI-1, but uses a 50-pin connector
instead of a 25-pin connector, and supports multiple TH. Thermal.
devices.

Glossary J-7
thread/load operation. A procedure that places tape
along the tape path.

TM. Tapemark.

U
UART. Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter.

unload. Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from

the drive.

utilities. Utility programs.

utility programs. A computer program in general

support of the processes of a computer; for instance, a
diagnostic program.

uv. Under voltage.

V
VOLSER. Volume serial number.

volume. A certain portion of data, together with its

data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit.

VPD. Vital product data. The information contained

within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage
used by functional areas of the drive, and information
required for manufacturing, RAS, and engineering.

W
word. A character string that is convenient for some
purpose to consider as an entity.

World Wide Node Name (WWNN). In a fibre channel

connected library, the Drive ID as listed in the Web
User Interface.

Write. Write command.

WT. world trade.

X
XR. External register.

XRA. External register address register.

J-8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Index
A cleaning slot 5-65
clearance 4-2
environment (continued)
operating 1-12
Access PIN, Operator Control Configure menu particulates 1-12
Panel 5-26 network settings 4-20 environmental specifications 1-10
accessibility configuring library using Web User Error Codes 8-1
keyboard H-1 Interface 4-19 Error LEDs 7-8
repeat rate of up and down configuring the library 4-18 Error log 8-1
buttons H-1 control keys 5-7 errors
shortcut keys H-1 control path drive 5-34, 5-48 obtaining from library and
accessor 1-4 control path failover 3-2, 5-45 drives E-1
Accessor A-1 control paths 5-23 System p E-1
accessory package 4-2 multiple 3-2 errpt command, using E-1
active slots 5-20, 5-43 multiple paths for iSeries and Ethernet Port 1-3
Active Slots 4-23 as/400 3-2 Export Media 4-42, 5-16, 5-41, 5-64
air quality 4-2 using multiple for control path
air vents, front panel 1-1 failover 3-2
AME 5-46
Application Managed Encryption F
(AME) 4-27 factory default settings 5-27
ASC D-1 D fan vents 1-3
ASCQ D-1 daisy-chaining 3-10 feature activation key 5-45
auto clean 5-20, 5-43 Data Cartridge 5-64 features
Auto Clean 4-23 data transfer rate 1-6 optional
DCS 5-65 drives 1-7
dedicated cleaning slot B-2 Fibre Channel 3-7
B default settings 5-27
description 1-1
Fibre Channel interface
cables and speeds 3-11
Bar code labels desktop installation 4-1 connectors and adapters 3-11
ordering 6-21 Device drivers supported 1-12 persistent binding 3-7
Bar Code Labels 6-5 DHCP 4-20, 4-30, 5-24, 5-50 sharing on a SAN 3-12
guidelines for using 6-6 Diagnostics 5-60 zoning 3-11
bar code reader 1-4 display contrast 5-31 fibre channel interposer 4-17
bootcode firmware, current level 5-33 dll 7-13 Fibre Channel ports 3-10
BOP 5-37 Drive Firmware
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 1-5 channel calibration 1-9 updating
power management 1-9 using ITDT Tool 9-4
speed matching 1-9 firmware, upgrade 5-62
C drive configuration 5-48 foot pads, installing 4-3
cable, host interface 4-15 Drive Density 5-37 front panel components 1-1
Cartridge 1-9, 6-1 Drive Diagnostics 5-31, 5-60
capacity scaling 6-1, 6-3 drive dump, saving to host 5-60
cleaning 6-4 drive firmware, current version 5-34
drive interface 5-23
G
compatibility 6-3 Gateway address 4-20
data 6-1 Drive Log 5-59
Gateway Address 4-30, 5-24, 5-50
disposal of 6-18 drive serial number 5-34
glossary J-1
leader pin 6-11 drive sled
memory chip 6-4 description 1-7
ordering 6-19 drive status 5-37
proper handling 6-8 drive, clean 5-57 H
specifications 6-17 Host Attachment 7-13
Write-Protect Switch 6-7 host bus adapter 3-7
cartridge magazines 1-1, 4-37, A-1 E host connection, verifying 4-37
host interface cable 4-15
Cartridge, environment 6-9 EC 5-14
cartridge, suspect 2-2 host interface connectors 1-3
ED 5-14
cartridges host interfaces 3-7
EKM 4-27
inserting in library 4-42 host preparation 4-37
EKM Server Setting 4-27
populating library 4-42 hp-ux system error information E-5
element addresses 3-3, B-2, B-3
Cartridges, insert and remove 5-64 humidity 4-2
element addressing B-1
Cartridges, repairing A-2 element types B-1
channel calibration 1-9 Encryption 1-5, 4-27
choosing a location 4-2 environment 1-12
clean drive 5-57

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2010 X-1

I M PTF 7-13

I/O Station 1-1, 4-37, 5-64 MAC Address 1-5

I/O Station, configuring 5-65 magazines 1-1, 4-37, A-1
I/O Station, open and close 5-65 Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) 1-5 Q
identifying a suspect cartridge 1-1, 2-2 media 1-9 Quiesce 5-61
Import Media 4-42, 5-16, 5-41, 5-64 Media 6-1
installation 4-1 media capacity 1-1
Interface 7-13 menu shortcuts 5-1 R
interfaces 3-7 menu tree rack installation 4-1, 4-6
interfaces, supported 1-7 Operator Control Panel 5-9 rack mounting the library 4-6
internal view of library A-1 Menus rack requirements 4-2
Internet Protocol version 4 1-5 Configure RAID controllers 3-7
Internet Protocol version 6 1-5 network settings 4-20 Read/Write capability 6-3
interposer, fibre channel 4-17 MIB 1-6, C-1 rear panel of library 1-3
Inventory 5-14, 5-42 Monitor menu Remove/replace procedures 10-1
IP address 4-20, 5-33 Drive 5-12 reserve slot, active slot 5-65
IP Address 4-30, 5-24, 5-50 Library 5-10 Reserved Slots 4-23
IP Stack 5-24 Move Media 4-42, 5-16, 5-41 RFC (Request for Comments) 1-5
IPv4 1-5 Multiple control paths 3-2 Router assigned IPv6 address 5-10
IPv6 1-5
ITDT Tool 9-4
N S
Navigation 5-7
K Netmask 4-20
Safety inspection procedure xix
SAS interface 3-10
Key Path 5-37 Network Address Translation (NAT) 1-5 screens displayed at power ON 2-2
Key Path Diagnostics 5-61 network configuration 5-24 SCSI interface 3-8
keyboard H-1 Network Mask 4-30, 5-24, 5-50 bus termination 3-9
network settings 5-24 connectors and adapters 3-10
description 1-7
L multiple buses 3-9
Labels O physical characteristics 3-8
bar code 6-5 OCP 4-36 SCSI LVD 3-7, 3-10
guidelines for using 6-6 ON/OFF power button 2-4 SCSI Trade Association Web site 3-10
ordering 6-21 operating systems supported 1-12 Sense data
LED, amber 7-14 operation specifications 1-10 using D-1
LEDs 2-2, 7-8 Operator Control Panel sense data, library D-1
LEDs, front panel 1-1 Access PIN 5-26 sequential mode, starting 5-20
library configuration form G-1 Configure: Save/Restore 5-27 sequential mode, stopping 5-20
Library Controller Board A-1 control keys on front panel 1-1 serial number 5-33
library firmware, current level 5-33 display 1-1 serial number, drive 5-34
library logs 5-58 menu tree 5-9 Serial Port 1-3
library mode 4-23, 5-20, 5-33, 5-43 Monitor menu server attachment
library name 5-43 Drive 5-12 SCSI interface 3-8
library network configuration 4-30, 5-50 Library 5-10 servers supported 1-12
library recovery 7-7 power ON display 2-2 Sharing the library 3-1
library SNMP configuration 4-35, 5-55 Operator Control Panel menus shipment verification 4-3
library status 5-36 Configure: Drive 5-23 shipping container 4-2
Library Verify 5-30 Configure: Library 5-20 shipping label, removing and
library weight 1-10 storing 4-4
license activation key 4-26, 4-27, 5-29 shipping lock and label storage
Link-local IPv6 address 5-10
LME 5-46
P location 1-3
shipping lock. removing and storing 4-4
packaging materials 4-2 shortcut keys H-1
locating the library 4-2
partitioning 3-3, 4-25, B-3 Simple Network Management
logical libraries 4-25, 5-18, 5-44
partitioning your 4U library 5-44 Protocol 1-6
determining number 3-1
path failover 4-26, 5-29 sled, description of tape drive 1-7
basic guidelines 3-1
physical specifications 1-10 Slot Blocker 10-10
using multiple for sharing 3-2
power button 1-1, 2-4 slot physical locations B-2
logical libraries, assigning 4-25
power connector 1-3 SME 5-46
logs 5-58
power management 1-9 SNMP 1-6, 4-35, 5-50, 5-55, C-1, F-1
low voltage differential (LVD) SCSI
power ON display 2-2 software supported 1-12
interface 1-7
power source 4-2 specifications 1-10
low-power mode 1-9
power specifications 1-10 environmental 1-10
LUN 3-7
power supply A-1 operation 1-10
LUN scanning 3-7
Power Supply Problem 7-8 physical 1-10
LVD SCSI interface 1-7
product ID 5-33 power 1-10

X-2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Specifications write-protect switch
cartridges 6-17 Write Protect Switch Setting C-3
speed matching 1-9 Write-Protect Switch
SSL 4-30, 5-50 setting 6-7
storage capacity 1-6 WWNN 5-33
System p
error information E-1

T
tape cartridge 1-9
tape drive sled 1-3, A-1
Tape drives
channel calibration 1-9
power management 1-9
quantity in library 1-7
speed matching 1-9
TapeAlert Flags
for drives C-3
TapeAlert Flags, library C-1
technical support 9-5
Telnet A-25
Telnet Service Port 5-32
Traps F-1
troubleshooting 7-1

U
Ultra160 1-6
Ultra320 1-6
Ultrium Tape Drives 1-7
unpacking the library 4-2
Updating firmware
using ITDT Tool 9-4
upgrade firmware 5-62
USB port 1-3

V
verifying the shipment 4-3
View Drive Logs 5-59

W
Web User Interface
Configure Library: Email
Notification 5-55
Configure Library: Save/Restore 5-56
configuring library 4-19
drive information 4-29
event notification 4-34
general library information 4-23
logging on 4-21
logs and traces 4-33
user access information 4-32
Web User Interface menus
Configure Library: User Access 5-52
Web User InterfaceConfigure Library
date and time 4-33
World Wide Node Name (WWNN) 3-7
World Wide Port Name (WWPN) 3-7
worldwide node name 5-33
WORM (Write Once, Read Many) 6-3
Write Once, Read Many (see
WORM) 6-3

Index X-3
X-4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide


Part Number: 46X4206

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 46X4206

GA32-0545-09
Spine information:

IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup,
 Library and TS3200 Tape Library Operator, and Service Guide Machine Type 3573